Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisDiscover data analytics methodologies for the diagnosis and prognosis of industrial systems under a unified random effects model InIndustrial Data Analytics for Diagnosis and Prognosis -A Random Effects Modelling Approach, distinguished engineers Shiyu Zhou and Yong Chen delivera rigorous and practical introduction to the random effects modeling approach for industrial system diagnosis and prognosis.In the book's two parts, general statistical concepts and useful theory are described and explained, as are industrial diagnosis and prognosis methods. The accomplished authors describe and model fixed effects, random effects, and variation in univariate and multivariate datasetsand cover the application of the random effects approach to diagnosis of variation sources in industrial processes. They offer a detailed performance comparison of different diagnosis methodsbefore moving on to the application of the random effects approach to failure prognosis in induTable of ContentsChapter 1 Introduction Part 1 Statistical Methods and Foundation for Industrial Data Analytics Chapter 2 Introduction to Data Visualization andChapteraracterization Chapter 3 Random Vectors and the Multivariate Normal Distribution Chapter 4 Explaining Covariance Structure: Principal Components Chapter 5 Linear Model for Numerical and Categorical Chapter 6 Linear Mixed Effects Model Part 2 Random Effects Approaches for Diagnosis and Prognosis Chapter 7 Diagnosis of Variation Source Using PCA Chapter 8 Diagnosis of Variation Sources Through Random Effects Estimation Chapter 9 Analysis of System Diagnosability Chapter 10 Prognosis Through Mixed Effects Models for Longitudinal Data Chapter 11 Prognosis Using Gaussian Process Model Chapter 12 Prognosis Through Mixed Effects Models for Time-to-Event Data Appendix: Basics of Vectors, Matrices, and Linear Vector Space References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface viii 1 Introduction to Dynamic Systems and Control 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Classification of Dynamic Systems 2 1.3 Modeling Dynamic Systems 3 1.4 Objectives and Textbook Outline 4 References 5 2 Modeling Mechanical Systems 6 2.1 Introduction 6 2.2 Mechanical Element Laws 6 2.3 Translational Mechanical Systems 11 2.4 Rotational Mechanical Systems 21 Summary 26 References 27 3 Modeling Electrical and Electromechanical Systems 28 3.1 Introduction 28 3.2 Electrical Element Laws 28 3.3 Electrical Systems 31 3.4 Operational-Amplifier Circuits 38 3.5 Electromechanical Systems 41 Summary 51 References 52 4 Modeling Fluid and Thermal Systems 53 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Hydraulic Systems 53 4.3 Pneumatic Systems 65 4.4 Thermal Systems 70 Summary 75 References 75 5 Standard Models for Dynamic Systems 76 5.1 Introduction 76 5.2 State-Variable Equations 76 5.3 State-Space Representation 79 5.4 Linearization 88 5.5 Input–Output Equations 93 5.6 Transfer Functions 95 5.7 Block Diagrams 98 5.8 Standard Input Functions 102 Summary 104 Reference 104 6 Numerical Simulation of Dynamic Systems 105 6.1 Introduction 105 6.2 System Response Using MATLAB Commands 105 6.3 Building Simulations Using Simulink 111 6.4 Simulating Linear Systems Using Simulink 113 6.5 Simulating Nonlinear Systems 117 6.6 Building Integrated Systems 124 Summary 129 References 129 7 Analytical Solution of Linear Dynamic Systems 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Analytical Solutions to Linear Differential Equations 131 7.3 First-Order System Response 138 7.4 Second-Order System Response 145 7.5 Higher-Order Systems 161 7.6 State-Space Representation and Eigenvalues 162 7.7 Approximate Models 165 Summary 167 Reference 168 8 System Analysis Using Laplace Transforms 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Laplace Transformation 169 8.3 Inverse Laplace Transformation 176 8.4 Analysis of Dynamic Systems Using Laplace Transforms 180 Summary 191 References 191 9 Frequency-Response Analysis 192 9.1 Introduction 192 9.2 Frequency Response 192 9.3 Bode Diagrams 203 9.4 Vibrations 218 Summary 223 References 224 10 Introduction to Control Systems 225 10.1 Introduction 225 10.2 Feedback Control Systems 225 10.3 Feedback Controllers 231 10.4 Steady-State Accuracy 245 10.5 Closed-Loop Stability 250 10.6 Root-Locus Method 252 10.7 Stability Margins 271 10.8 Implementing Control Systems 278 Summary 281 References 282 11 Case Studies in Dynamic Systems and Control 283 11.1 Introduction 283 11.2 Vibration Isolation System for a Commercial Vehicle 283 11.3 Solenoid Actuator–Valve System 294 11.4 Pneumatic Air-Brake System 301 11.5 Hydraulic Servomechanism Control 311 11.6 Feedback Control of a Magnetic Levitation System 326 Summary 335 References 336 Problems (Available in e-text for students) P-1 Appendix A Units A-1 Appendix B MATLAB Primer for Analyzing Dynamic Systems A-2 B.1 Introduction A-2 B.2 Basic MATLAB Computations A-2 B.3 Plotting with MATLAB A-5 B.4 Constructing Basic M-files A-6 B.5 Commands for Linear System Analysis A-7 B.6 Commands for Laplace Transform Analysis A-8 B.7 Commands for Control System Analysis A-9 Appendix C Simulink Primer A-11 C.1 Introduction A-11 C.2 Building Simulink Models of Linear Systems A-11 C.3 Building Simulink Models of Nonlinear Systems A-19 C.4 Summary of Useful Simulink Blocks A-22 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface Acknowledgments Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Polyurethane Building Blocks 2.1 Polyols 2.11 Polyether polyols 2.111 Building blocks 2.112 Polymerization of alkoxides to polyethers 2.12 Polyester polyols 2.121 Polyester polyol building blocks 2.122 Preparation of polyester polyols 2.123 Aliphatic polyester polyols 2.124 Aromatic Polyester Polyols 2. 13 Other Polyols 2.131 Polycarbonate Polyols 2.1311. Preparation of polycarbonate polyols 2. 132 Polyacrylate polyols 2.1321 Preparation of acrylic polyols 2.14. Filled polyols 2.141 Copolymer polyols 2.142 PHD Polyols 2.143 PIPA polyols 2.15 Seed-oil derived polyols 2.151 Preparation of seed oil derived polyols 2.1511 Epoxidation and ring opening 2.1512 Ozonolysis 2.1513 Hydroformylation and reduction 2.1514 Metathesis 2.16 Prepolymers 2.2 Isocyanates 2.21 TDI 2.211 Conventional Production of TDI 2.212 Non-phosgene routes to TDI 2.2121 Thermolysis of Carbamic acid, N,N'-(4-methyl-1,3-phenylene)bis-, C,C'-dimethyl ester made from the reaction of toluene diamine with methyl carbonate 2.2122 Thermolysis of Carbamic acid, N,N'-(4-methyl-1,3-phenylene)bis-, C,C'-dimethyl ester made from the reductive carbonylation of dinitrotoluene. 2.2123 Isocyanates by thermal decomposition of acyl azides – The Curtius rearrangement 2.22 Diphenylmethane diisocyanates (MDI) 2.221 Production of MDI 2.23 Aliphatic Isocyanates 2.231. Production of Aliphatic isocyanates 2.2311 hexamethylene diisocyanate (HDI) 2.2312 Isophorone diisocyanate(IPDI) 2.2313 4,4’- diisocyanatodicyclohexylmethane (H12MDI) 2.232 Use of aliphatic isocyanates 2.3 Chain extenders Chapter 3 Introduction to Polyurethane Chemistry 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Mechanism and Catalysis of Urethane Formation 3.3 Reactions of Isocyanates with Active Hydrogen Compounds 3.31 Urea Formation 3.32 Allophanate Formation 3.33 Formation of Biurets 3.34 Formation of Uretdione (isocyanate dimer) 3.35 Formation of Carbodiimide 3.36 Formation of uretonimine 3.37 Formation of amides Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts and Techniques in Polyurethane Science 4.1 Formation of Polyurethane Structure 4.2 Properties of Polyurethanes 4.21 Models and Calculations for Polymer Modulus 4.22 Models for Elastomer Stress Strain Properties 4.221 Factors that affect Polyurethane Stress-Strain Behavior 4.222 Calculating Foam Properties 4.23 The Polyurethane Glass Transition Temperature Chapter 5 Analytical Characterization of Polyurethanes 5.1 Analysis of reagents for making polyurethanes 5.11 Analysis of Polyols 5.111 Hydroxyl number 5.112 CPR 5.12 Analysis of Isocyanates 5.121 Analysis of pMDI composition 5.2 Instrumental Analysis of Polyurethanes 5.21 Microscopy 5.211 Optical microscopy 5.212 Scanning electron microscopy 5.213 Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) 5.214 Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) 5.22 Infra-red Spectrometry 5.23 X-ray Analyses 5.231 Wide Angle X-ray Scattering (WAXS) 5.232 Small Angle X-ray scattering (SAXS) 5.3 Mechanical Analysis 5.31 Tensile, tear and elongation testing 5.32 Dynamic mechanical analysis 5.4 Nuclear Magnetic Spectroscopy (NMR) 5.5 Foam Screening: FoamatR Chapter 6 Polyurethane Flexible Foams: Chemistry and Fabrication 6.1 Making Polyurethane Foams 6.11 Slabstock Foams 6.12 Molded Foams 6.2 Foam Processes 6.21 Surfactancy and Catalysis 6.211 Catalysis 6.212 Surfactancy 6.3 Flexible Foam Formulation and Structure Property Relationships 6.31 Screening tests 6.32 Foam Formulation and Structure Property Relationships Chapter 7 Polyurethane Flexible Foams: Markets, Applications, Markets and Trends 7.1 Applications 7.11 Furniture 7.12 Mattresses and Bedding 7.13 Transportation 7.14 The Molded Foam Market 7.2 Trends in Molded Foam Technology and Markets Chapter 8 Polyurethane Rigid Foams: Markets, Applications, Markets and Trends 8.1 Regional Market Dynamics 8.2 Applications 8.21 Construction Foams 8.211 Polyisocyanurate Foams 8.212 Spray, Poured and Froth Foams 8.2121 Spray foam 8.2122. Froth Foams 8.2123 Pour-in-place foams 8. 22 Rigid Construction Foam Market Segments 8.23 Appliance Foams 8.3 Blowing Agents and Insulation Fundamentals 8.31 Blowing Agents 8.32 Blowing Agent Phase-out Schedule 8.4 Insulation Fundamentals 8.5 Trends in Rigid Foams Technology Chapter 9 Polyurethane Elastomers: Markets, Applications, Markets and Trends 9.1 Regional Market Dynamics 9.2 Applications 9.21 Footwear 9.211 Trends in Footwear Applications 9.22 Non-footwear Elastomer Applications and Methods of Manufacture 9.221 Cast Elastomers 9.222 Thermoplastic polyurethanes 9.223 RIM Elastomers 9.224 Polyurethane Elastomer Fibers 9.3 Trends in Polyurethane Elastomers Chapter 10 Polyurethane Adhesives and Coatings: Manufacture, Applications, Markets and Trends 10.1 Adhesives and Coatings Industries: Similarities and Differences 10.2 Adhesives 10.2.1 Adhesive Formulations 10.2.1.1 1-Part Adhesives 10.2.1.2 Hot-melt adhesives 10.2.1.2.1 Non-reactive hot-melt adhesive 10.2.1.2.2 Reactive hot-melt adhesive 10.2.1.3 Water borne polyurethane adhesives 10.3 Trends in Polyurethane Adhesives 10.3 Coatings 10.3.1 Polyurethane coating formulations 10.3.1.1 2–part solvent borne coating 10.3.1.2 Water-borne coatings 10.3.1.3 Water-borne hybrids 10.3.1.4 UV cured water-borne dispersions for coatings 10.3.1.5 Polyurethane Powder Coatings 10.3.2 Trends in Polyurethane Coatings Chapter 11 Special Topics: Medical Uses of Polyurethane 11.1 Markets and Participants 11.2 Technology 11.2.1 Catheters 11.2.2 Wound dressings 11.2.3 Bioabsorbable polyurethanes. 11.2.4 Hydrogels 11.2.5 Gloves and Condoms 11.3 Future Trends Chapter 12 Special Topic: Non-isocyanate Routes to Polyurethanes 12.1 Governmental Regulation of Isocyanates 12.2 Non-isocyanate routes to polyurethanes 12.2.1 Reactions of polycyclic carbonates with polyamines 12.2.2 Direct transformations of amines to urethanes 12.2.3 Reactions of polycarbamates 12.2.4 Conversion of hydroxamic acids to polyurethane 12.2.5 Conversion of hydroxylamines to polyurethanes Chapter 13 Polyurethane hybrid polymers 13.1 Introduction 13.2 Polyurethane-acrylate hybrids 13.3 Polyurethane-epoxy hybrids 13.4 Polyurethane-silicone hybrids 13.4.1 Silicone modified prepolymers 13.4.2 Urethane/silicone hybrids produced using diblock compatabilizers 13.4.3 Hybrids employing covalent and hydrogen bonded crosslinks 13.4.4 Polyurethane hybridization with polyhedral oligomeric silsesquixanes (POSS) 13.5 Polyurethane- polyolefin hybrids 13.6 Hybridization via transurethanification Chapter 14. Recycling of polyurethanes 14.1 Introduction 14.2 Glycolysis/Hydrolysis/Aminolysis/Acidolysis 14.3 Pyrolysis 14.4 Recycle for fuel value 14.5 Regrinding and incorporation Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the analysis and design of compliant offshore structures that highlights a new generation of platforms Offshore Compliant Platforms provides an authoritative guideto the analysis and design of compliant offshore structures and puts the focus on a new generation of platforms such as: triceratops, Buoyant Leg Storage and Regasification platforms. Whilst the authors noted experts on the topic include basic information on the conceptual development of conventional platforms, the book presents detailed descriptions of the design and development of new deep-water platforms. The book describes the preliminary design of triceratops in ultra-deep waters and presents a detailed analysis of environmental loads that are inherent in offshore locations such as wave, wind and current. The new methodology for the dynamic analysis of triceratops under ice loads, predominantly in ice-covered regions, is also examined with detailed parametric studies. In addition, the book covers the structural geometry and the various methods of analysis for assessing the performance of any other similar offshore platform under the special loads. A discussion of the fatigue analysis and service life prediction is also included. This important book: Includes the analysis and design of compliant offshore structures with a focus on a new generation of platforms Examines the preliminary design of triceratops in ultra-deep waters Covers an analysis of environmental loads that are inherent in offshore locations such as wave, wind and current Reviews the structural geometry and various methods of analysis for assessing the performance of any other similar offshore platform under special loads Discusses fatigue analysis and service life prediction Written for engineers and researchers across engineering including civil, mechanical, structural, offshore, ocean and naval architecture, Offshore Compliant Platforms fills the need for a guide to new offshore platforms that provides an understanding of the behaviour of these structures under different loading conditions.Table of ContentsList of Figures ix List of Tables xiii Foreword by Professor Purnendu K. Das xv Foreword by Dr. Atmanand N.D. xvii Series Preface xix Preface xxi 1 Common Compliant Platforms 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Tension Leg Platforms 8 1.3 Guyed Tower and Articulated Tower 19 1.4 Floating Structures 21 1.5 Response Control Strategies 24 1.5.1 Active Control Algorithm 25 1.5.2 Semi-Active Control Algorithm 25 1.5.3 Passive Control Algorithm 26 1.5.4 Friction Dampers 27 1.5.5 Metallic Yield Dampers 27 1.5.6 Viscous Fluid Dampers 27 1.5.7 Tuned Liquid Dampers 29 1.5.8 Tuned Liquid Column Damper 30 1.6 Tuned Mass Dampers 31 1.7 Response Control of Offshore Structures 36 1.8 Response Control of TLPs Using TMDs: Experimental Investigations 38 1.9 Articulated Towers 44 1.10 Response Control of ATs: Analytical Studies 48 1.11 Response Control of ATs: Experimental Studies 52 1.11.1 MLAT Without a TMD 53 1.11.2 MLAT with a TMD 56 2 Buoyant Leg Storage and Regasification Platforms 59 2.1 Background Literature 60 2.1.1 Buoyant Leg Structures 62 2.1.2 Floating Production and Processing Platforms 63 2.2 Experimental Setup 64 2.3 Experimental Investigations 65 2.4 Numerical Studies 72 2.5 Critical Observations 76 2.6 Stability Analysis of the BLSRP 85 2.7 Fatigue Analysis of the BLSRP 90 3 New-Generation Platforms: Offshore Triceratops 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 Environmental Loads 96 3.2.1 Regular Waves 96 3.2.2 Random Waves 97 3.2.3 Wind 98 3.2.4 Currents 100 3.3 Fatigue Analysis of Tethers 101 3.4 Response to Regular Waves 104 3.5 Response to Random Waves 108 3.6 Response to Combined Actions of Wind, Waves, and Current 113 3.6.1 Deck Response 116 3.6.2 Buoyant Leg Response 120 3.6.3 Tether Tension Variation 122 3.7 Summary 123 4 Triceratops Under Special Loads 125 4.1 Introduction 125 4.1.1 Ice Load 126 4.1.2 Impact Load Due to Ship Platform Collisions 129 4.1.3 Hydrocarbon Fires 131 4.2 Continuous Ice Crushing 134 4.2.1 The Korzhavin Equation 135 4.2.2 Continuous Ice Crushing Spectrum 136 4.3 Response to Continuous Ice Crushing 138 4.3.1 Response to Ice Loads 139 4.3.1.1 Deck and Buoyant Leg Responses 139 4.3.1.2 Tether Response 140 4.3.2 Effect of Ice Parameters 140 4.3.2.1 Ice Thickness 140 4.3.2.2 Ice Crushing Strength 143 4.3.2.3 Ice Velocity 144 4.3.3 Comparison of Ice- and Wave-Induced Responses 145 4.4 Response to Impact Loads 147 4.4.1 Parametric Studies 151 4.4.1.1 Indenter Size 151 4.4.1.2 Collision Zone Location 152 4.4.1.3 Indenter Shape 153 4.4.1.4 Number of Stringers 154 4.4.2 Impact Response in the Arctic Region 154 4.5 Deck Response to Hydrocarbon Fires 156 4.6 Summary 158 5 Offshore Triceratops: Recent Advanced Applications 161 5.1 Introduction 161 5.2 Wind Turbines 161 5.3 Wind Power 163 5.4 Evolution of Wind Turbines 163 5.5 Conceptual Development of the Triceratops-Based Wind Turbine 164 5.6 Support Systems for Wind Turbines 164 5.6.1 Spar Type 165 5.6.2 TLP Type 165 5.6.3 Pontoon (Barge) Type 165 5.6.4 Semi-Submersible Type 166 5.6.5 Triceratops Type 166 5.7 Wind Turbine on a Triceratops 166 5.8 Response of a Triceratops-Based Wind Turbine to Waves 166 5.8.1 Free-Decay Response 166 5.8.2 Response to Operable and Parked Conditions 169 5.8.3 Effect of Wave Heading Angles 170 5.8.4 PSD Plots 171 5.8.5 Tether Response and Service Life Estimation 172 5.9 Stiffened Triceratops 173 5.9.1 Preliminary Design 173 5.9.2 Response to Wave Action 175 5.9.3 Effect of Wave Direction 177 5.10 Triceratops with Elliptical Buoyant Legs 179 5.10.1 Conceptual Development 180 5.10.2 Response of a Triceratops with Elliptical Buoyant Legs to Wave Action 182 5.11 Summary 186 Model Test Papers 187 References 209 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisDeformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, Sixth Edition, provides a detailed examination of the mechanical behavior of metals, ceramics, polymers, and their composites. Offering an integrated macroscopic/microscopic approach to the subject, this comprehensive textbook features in-depth explanations, plentiful figures and illustrations, and a full array of student and instructor resources. Divided into two sections, the text first introduces the principles of elastic and plastic deformation, including the plastic deformation response of solids and concepts of stress, strain, and stiffness. The following section demonstrates the application of fracture mechanics and materials science principles in solids, including determining material stiffness, strength, toughness, and time-dependent mechanical response. Now offered as an interactive eBook, this fully-revised edition features a wealth of digital assets. More than three hours of high-quality video fooTable of ContentsForeword xvii Preface to the Sixth Edition xix The Comet and Titanic Disasters: Fiction Foreshadows Truth ! xix Additional References for Video Entitled "The Comet and Titanic Disasters: Fiction Foreshadows Truth!!" xix Stress Intensity Factor Formulations xx Elliptical and Penny-Shaped Stress Intensity Factors xx Multiplicity of Y-calibration Factors xx Design Concepts xx Estimation of Crack Tip Plastic Zone Size and Shear Lip Development xx Compact-Tension Fracture Toughness Test xx Fatigue Fracture xxi Extensive Folder of Powerpoint Slides xxii Chapter Thirteen: Final Thoughts xxii Dedication xxii Acknowledgments xxii About the Authors xxv Section One Recoverable and Nonrecoverable Deformation 1 Chapter 1 Elastic Response of Solids 3 1.1 Mechanical Testing 3 1.2 Definitions of Stress and Strain 4 1.3 Stress–Strain Curves for Uniaxial Loading 8 1.4 Nonaxial Testing 23 1.5 Multiaxial Linear Elastic Response 27 1.6 Elastic Anisotropy 34 1.7 Thermal Stresses and Thermal Shock-Induced Failure 50 Chapter 2 Yielding and Plastic Flow 63 2.1 Dislocations in Metals and Ceramics 63 2.2 Slip 81 2.3 Yield Criteria for Metals and Ceramics 88 2.4 Post-Yield Plastic Deformation 90 2.5 Slip in Single Crystals and Textured Materials 102 2.6 Deformation Twinning 111 2.7 Plasticity in Polymers 120 Chapter 3 Controlling Strength 143 3.1 Strengthening: A Definition 143 3.2 Strengthening of Metals 143 3.3 Strain (Work) Hardening 151 3.4 Boundary Strengthening 155 3.5 Solid Solution Strengthening 158 3.6 Precipitation Hardening 164 3.7 Dispersion Strengthening 170 3.8 Strengthening of Steel Alloys by Multiple Mechanisms 172 3.9 Metal-Matrix Composite Strengthening 175 3.10 Strengthening of Polymers 177 3.11 Polymer-Matrix Composites 182 Chapter 4 Time-Dependent Deformation 189 4.1 Time-Dependent Mechanical Behavior of Solids 189 4.2 Creep of Crystalline Solids: An Overview 191 4.3 Temperature–Stress–Strain-Rate Relations 195 4.4 Deformation Mechanisms 202 4.5 Superplasticity 205 4.6 Deformation-Mechanism Maps 208 4.7 Parametric Relations: Extrapolation Procedures for Creep Rupture Data 215 4.8 Materials for Elevated Temperature Use 220 4.9 Viscoelastic Response of Polymers and the Role of Structure 227 Section Two Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials 249 Chapter 5 Fracture: An Overview 251 5.1 Introduction 251 5.2 Theoretical Cohesive Strength 253 5.3 Defect Population in Solids 254 5.4 The Stress-Concentration Factor 260 5.5 Notch Strengthening 264 5.6 External Variables Affecting Fracture 265 5.7 Characterizing the Fracture Process 266 5.8 Macroscopic Fracture Characteristics 269 5.9 Microscopic Fracture Mechanisms 278 Chapter 6 Elements of Fracture Mechanics 299 6.1 Griffith Crack Theory 299 6.2 Charpy Impact Fracture Testing 307 6.3 Related Polymer Fracture Test Methods 311 6.4 Limitations of the Transition Temperature Philosophy 312 6.5 Stress Analysis of Cracks 315 FAILURE ANALYSIS CASE STUDY 6.1: Fracture Toughness of Manatee Bones in Impact 327 6.6 Design Philosophy 328 6.7 Relation Between Energy Rate and Stress Field Approaches 330 6.8 Crack-Tip Plastic-Zone Size Estimation 332 6.9 Fracture-Mode Transition: Plane Stress Versus Plane Strain 336 FAILURE ANALYSIS CASE STUDY 6.2: Analysis of Crack Development during Structural Fatigue Test 339 6.10 Plane-Strain Fracture-Toughness Testing of Metals and Ceramics 341 6.11 Fracture Toughness of Engineering Alloys 344 6.12 Plane-Stress Fracture-Toughness Testing 355 6.13 Toughness Determination from Crack-Opening Displacement Measurement 358 6.14 Fracture-Toughness Determination and Elastic-Plastic Analysis with the J Integral 360 6.14.1 Determination of JIC 362 6.15 Other Fracture Models 368 6.16 Fracture Mechanics and Adhesion Measurements 371 Chapter 7 Fracture Toughness 383 7.1 Some Useful Generalities 383 7.2 Intrinsic Toughness of Metals and Alloys 389 7.3 Toughening of Metals and Alloys Through Microstructural Anisotropy 402 7.4 Optimizing Toughness of Specific Alloy Systems 411 7.5 Toughness of Ceramics, Glasses, and Their Composites 416 7.6 Toughness of Polymers and Polymer-Matrix Composites 426 7.7 Natural and Biomimetic Materials 434 7.8 Metallurgical Embrittlement of Ferrous Alloys 440 7.9 Additional Data 449 Chapter 8 Environment-Assisted Cracking 463 8.1 Embrittlement Models 465 8.2 Fracture Mechanics Test Methods 472 8.3 Life and Crack-Length Calculations 492 Chapter 9 Cyclic Stress and Strain Fatigue 499 9.1 Macrofractography of Fatigue Failures 499 9.2 Cyclic Stress-Controlled Fatigue 503 9.3 Cyclic Strain-Controlled Fatigue 529 9.4 Fatigue Life Estimations for Notched Components 541 9.5 Fatigue Crack Initiation Mechanisms 545 9.6 Avoidance of Fatigue Damage 547 Chapter 10 Fatigue Crack Propagation 559 10.1 Stress and Crack Length Correlations with FCP 559 10.2 Macroscopic Fracture Modes in Fatigue 568 FATIGUE FAILURE ANALYSIS CASE STUDY 10.1: Stress Intensity Factor Estimate Based on Fatigue Growth Bands 571 10.3 Microscopic Fracture Mechanisms 572 10.4 Crack Growth Behavior at ΔK Extremes 578 10.5 Influence of Load Interactions 592 10.6 Environmentally Enhanced FCP (Corrosion Fatigue) 600 10.7 Microstructural Aspects of FCP in Metal Alloys 606 10.8 Fatigue Crack Propagation in Engineering Plastics 618 10.9 Fatigue Crack Propagation in Ceramics 628 10.10 Fatigue Crack Propagation in Composites 632 Chapter 11 Analyses of Engineering Failures 645 11.1 Typical Defects 647 11.2 Macroscopic Fracture Surface Examination 647 11.3 Metallographic and Fractographic Examination 651 11.4 Component Failure Analysis Data 652 11.5 Case Histories 652 CASE 1: Shotgun Barrel Failures 653 CASE 2: Analysis of Aileron Power Control Cylinder Service Failure 658 CASE 3: Failure of Pittsburgh Station Generator Rotor Forging 660 CASE 4: Stress Corrosion Cracking Failure of the Point Pleasant Bridge 661 CASE 5: Weld Cold Crack-Induced Failure of Kings Bridge, Melbourne, Australia 664 CASE 6: Failure Analysis of 175-mm Gun Tube 665 CASE 7: Hydrotest Failure of a 660-cm-Diameter Rocket Motor Casing 670 CASE 8: Premature Fracture of Powder-Pressing Die 673 CASE 9: A Laboratory Analysis of a Lavatory Failure 674 11.6 Additional Comments Regarding Welded Bridges 676 Chapter 12 Consequences of Product Failure 683 12.1 Introduction to Product Liability 683 12.2 History of Product Liability 684 12.3 Product Recall 697 RECALL CASE STUDY: The "Unstable" Ladder 708 Chapter 13 Final Thoughts 713 13.1 Funding Highway and Bridge Repairs 713 13.2 Nonredundant Bridges 715 13.3 Dee Bridge Collapse, Chester, England (1847) 716 13.4 A Final Reflection 718 Appendix A Fracture Surface Preservation, Cleaning and Replication Techniques, and Image Interpretation 721 A.1 Fracture Surface Preservation 721 A.2 Fracture Surface Cleaning 721 A.3 Replica Preparation and Image Interpretation 723 Appendix B K Calibrations for Typical Fracture Toughness and Fatigue Crack Propagation Test Specimens 727 Appendix C Y Calibration Factors for Elliptical and Semicircular Surface Flaws 731 Appendix D Suggested Checklist of Data Desirable for Complete Failure Analysis 733 Author Index 737 Materials Index 749 Subject Index 755

Read more less

Book SynopsisMechanics of Materials providesan in-depth yet accessible introduction to the behavior of solid materials under various stresses and strains. Emphasizing the three key concepts of deformable-body mechanicsequilibrium, material behavior, and geometry of deformationthis popular textbook covers the fundamental concepts of the subject while helping students strengthen their problem-solving skills. Throughout the text, students are taught to apply an effective four-step methodology to solve numerous example problems and understand the underlying principles of each application. Focusing primarily on the behavior of solids under static-loading conditions, the text thoroughly prepares students for subsequent courses in solids and structures involving more complex engineering analyses and Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE). The text provides ample, fully solved practice problems, real-world engineering examples, the equations that correspond to each concept, chapter summaries, procedureTable of Contents1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 What Is Mechanics of Materials? 1.2 The Fundamental Equations of Deformable-Body Mechanics 1.3 Problem-Solving Procedures 1.4 Review of Static Equilibrium; Equilibrium of Deformable Bodies Chapter 1 Review Problems 2 STRESS AND STRAIN 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Normal Stress 2.3 Extensional Strain; Thermal Strain 2.4 Stress-Strain Diagrams; Mechanical Properties of Materials 2.5 Elasticity and Plasticity; Temperature Effects 2.6 Linear Elasticity; Hooke's Law and Poisson's Ratio 2.7 Shear Stress and Shear Strain; Shear Modulus 2.8 Introduction to Design-Axial Loads and Direct Shear 2.9 Stresses on an Inclined Plane in an Axially Loaded Member 2.10 Saint-Venant's Principle 2.11 Hooke's Law for Plane Stress; the Relationship Between E and G 2.12 General Definitions of Stress and Strain *2.13 Cartesian Components of Stress; Generalized Hooke's Law for Isotropic Materials Chapter 2 Review Problems 3 AXIAL DEFORMATION 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Basic Theory of Axial Deformation 3.3 Examples of Nonuniform Axial Deformation 3.4 Statically Determinate Structures 3.5 Statically Indeterminate Structures 3.6 Thermal Effects on Axial Deformation 3.7 Geometric "Misfits" 3.8 Displacement-Method Solution of Axial-Deformation Problems *3.9 Force-Method Solution of Axial-Deformation Problems *3.10 Introduction to the Analysis of Planar Trusses Chapter 3 Review Problems 4 TORSION 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Torsional Deformation of Circular Bars 4.3 Torsion of Linearly Elastic Circular Bars 4.4 Stress Distribution in Circular Torsion Bars; Torsion Testing 4.5 Statically Determinate Assemblages of Uniform Torsion Members 4.6 Statically Indeterminate Assemblages of Uniform Torsion Members *4.7 Displacement-Method Solution of Torsion Problems 4.8 Power-Transmission Shafts *4.9 Thin-Wall Torsion Members *4.10 Torsion of Noncircular Prismatic Bars Chapter 4 Review Problems 5 TRANSFORMATION OF STRESS AND STRAIN 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Plane Stress 5.3 Stress Transformation for Plane Stress 5.4 Principal Stresses and Maximum Shear Stress 5.5 Mohr's Circle for Plane Stress 5.6 Triaxial Stress; Absolute Maximum Shear Stress 5.7 Plane Strain 5.8 Transformation of Strains in a Plane 5.9 Mohr's Circle for Strain 5.10 Measurement of Strain; Strain Rosettes Chapter 5 Review Problems 6 EQUILIBRIUM OF BEAMS 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Equilibrium of Beams Using Finite Free-Body Diagrams 6.3 Equilibrium Relationships Among Loads, Shear Force, and Bending Moment 6.4 Shear-Force and Bending-Moment Diagrams: Equilibrium Method 6.5 Shear-Force and Bending-Moment Diagrams: Graphical Method *6.6 Discontinuity Functions to Represent Loads, Shear, and Moment Chapter 6 Review Problems 7 STRESSES IN BEAMS 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Strain-Displacement Analysis 7.3 Flexural Stress in Linearly Elastic Beams 7.4 Design of Beams for Strength 7.5 Flexural Stress in Nonhomogeneous Beams *7.6 Unsymmetric Bending *7.7 Inelastic Bending of Beams 7.8 Shear Stress and Shear Flow in Beams 7.9 Limitations on the Shear-Stress Formula 7.10 Shear Stress in Thin-Wall Beams 7.11 Shear in Built-up Beams *7.12 Shear Center Chapter 7 Review Problems 8 DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Differential Equations of the Deflection Curve 8.3 Slope and Deflection by Integration-Statically Determinate Beams 8.4 Slope and Deflection by Integration-Statically Indeterminate Beams *8.5 Use of Discontinuity Functions to Determine Beam Deflections 8.6 Slope and Deflection of Beams: Superposition Method *8.7 Slope and Deflection of Beams: Displacement Method Chapter 8 Review Problems 9 PRESSURE VESSELS; STRESSES DUE TO COMBINED LOADING 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Thin-Wall Pressure Vessels 9.3 Thick-Wall Pressure Vessels 9.4 Stress Distribution in Beams 9.5 Stresses Due to Combined Loads Chapter 9 Review Problems 10 BUCKLING OF COLUMNS 10.1 Introduction 10.2 The Ideal Pin-Ended Column; Euler Buckling Load 10.3 The Effect of End Conditions on Column Buckling *10.4 Eccentric Loading; the Secant Formula *10.5 Imperfections in Columns *10.6 Inelastic Buckling of Ideal Columns 10.7 Design of Centrally Loaded Columns Chapter 10 Review Problems 11 ENERGY METHODS 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Work and Strain Energy 11.3 Elastic Strain Energy for Various Types of Loading 11.4 Work-Energy Principle for Calculating Deflections 11.5 Castigliano's Second Theorem; the Unit-Load Method *11.6 Virtual Work *11.7 Strain-Energy Methods *11.8 Complementary-Energy Methods Chapter 11 Review Problems 12 SPECIAL TOPICS RELATED TO DESIGN 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Stress Concentrations *12.3 Failure Theories *12.4 Fatigue and Fracture Chapter 12 Review Problems A NUMERICAL ACCURACY; APPROXIMATIONS A.1 Numerical Accuracy; Significant Digits A.2 Approximations B SYSTEMS OF UNITS B.1 Introduction B.2 SI Units B.4 Useful Physical Properties C GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES OF PLANE AREAS C.1 First Moments of Area; Centroid C.2 Moments of Inertia of an Area C.3 Product of Inertia of an Area C.4 Area Moments of Inertia about Inclined Axes; Principal Moments of Inertia C.5 Geometric Properties of Plane Areas D SECTION PROPERTIES OF SELECTED STRUCTURAL SHAPES E DEFLECTIONS AND SLOPES OF BEAMS; FIXED-END ACTIONS F MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SELECTED ENGINEERING MATERIALS G MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS H POISSON'S RATIO VALUES FOR VARIOUS MATERIALS ANSWERS TO SELECTED ODD-NUMBERED PROBLEMS REFERENCES INDEX

Read more less

Book SynopsisAnalysis of ASME Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Nuclear Components in the Creep Range Second Edition The latest edition of the leading resource on elevated temperature design In the newly revised Second Edition of Analysis of ASME Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Nuclear Components in the Creep Range, a team of distinguished engineers delivers an authoritative introduction to the principles of design at elevated temperatures. The authors draw on over 50 years of experience, explaining the methodology for accomplishing a safe and economical design for boiler and pressure vessel components operating at high temperatures. The text includes extensive references, offering the reader the opportunity to further their understanding of the subject. In this latest edition, each chapter has been updated and two brand-new chapters addedthe first is Creep Analysis Using the Remaining Life Method, and the second is Requirements for Nuclear Components. Numerous examples are included to illustrate the prTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgement for the Original Edition xxi Acknowledgement for this Edition xxiii Abbreviations for Organizations xxv 1 Basic Concepts 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Creep in Metals 3 1.2.1 Description and Measurement 3 1.2.2 Elevated Temperature Material Behavior 5 1.2.3 Creep Characteristics 7 1.3 Allowable Stress 12 1.3.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 12 1.3.2 European Standard EN 13445 14 1.4 Creep Properties 17 1.4.1 ASME Code Methodology 17 1.4.2 Larson-Miller Parameter 18 1.4.3 Omega Method 20 1.4.4 Negligible Creep Criteria 20 1.4.5 Environmental Effects 22 1.4.6 Monkman-Grant Strain 23 1.5 Required Pressure-Retaining Wall Thickness 23 1.5.1 Design by Rule 23 1.5.2 Design by Analysis 24 1.5.3 Approximate Methods 24 1.5.3.1 Stationary Creep – Elastic Analog 24 1.5.3.2 Reference Stress 25 1.6 Effects of Structural Discontinuities and Cyclic Loading 30 1.6.1 Elastic Follow-Up 30 1.6.2 Pressure-Induced Discontinuity Stresses 33 1.6.3 Shakedown and Ratcheting 35 1.6.4 Fatigue and Creep-Fatigue 41 1.6.4.1 Linear Life Fraction – Time Fraction 44 1.6.4.2 Ductility Exhaustion 44 1.7 Buckling and Instability 45 Problems 46 2 Axially Loaded Structural Members 47 2.1 Introduction 48 2.2 Stress Analysis 53 2.3 Design of Structural Components Using ASME I and VIII-1 as a Guide 60 2.4 Temperature Effect 62 2.5 Design of Structural Components Using ASME I, III-5, and VIII as a Guide – Creep Life and Deformation Limits 64 2.6 Reference Stress Method 71 2.7 Elastic Follow-up 72 Problems 77 3 Structural Members in Bending 79 3.1 Introduction 80 3.2 Bending of Beams 80 3.2.1 Rectangular Cross Sections 82 3.2.2 Circular Cross Sections 82 3.3 Shape Factors 85 3.3.1 Rectangular Cross Sections 86 3.3.2 Circular Cross Sections 88 3.4 Deflection of Beams 89 3.5 Stress Analysis 92 3.5.1 Commercial Programs 99 3.6 Reference Stress Method 100 3.7 Piping Analysis – ASME B31.1 and B31.3 102 3.7.1 Introduction 102 3.7.2 Design Categories and Allowable Stresses 102 3.7.2.1 Pressure Design 103 3.7.2.2 Sustained and Occasional Loading 103 3.7.2.3 Thermal Expansion 103 3.7.3 Creep Effects 105 3.7.3.1 Weld Strength Reduction Factors 105 3.7.3.2 Elastic Follow-Up 105 3.7.3.3 Cyclic Life Degradation 106 3.8 Circular Plates 106 Problem 108 4 Analysis of ASME Pressure Vessel Components: Load-Controlled Limits 109 4.1 Introduction 109 4.2 Design Thickness 111 4.2.1 Asme I 112 4.2.2 Asme VIII 113 4.3 Stress Categories 117 4.3.1 Primary Stress 118 4.3.1.1 General Primary Membrane Stress (P m) 118 4.3.1.2 Local Primary Membrane Stress (P L) 119 4.3.1.3 Primary Bending Stress (P b) 119 4.3.2 Secondary Stress, Q 119 4.3.3 Peak Stress, F 120 4.3.4 Separation of Stresses 120 4.3.5 Thermal Stress 126 4.4 Equivalent Stress Limits for Design and Operating Conditions 126 4.5 Load-Controlled Limits for Components Operating in the Creep Range 133 4.6 Reference Stress Method 143 4.6.1 Cylindrical Shells 143 4.6.2 Spherical Shells 152 Problems 153 5 Analysis of Components: Strain and Deformation-Controlled Limits 155 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Strain and Deformation-Controlled Limits 156 5.3 Elastic Analysis 157 5.3.1 Test A- 1 157 5.3.2 Test A- 2 161 5.3.3 Test A- 3 161 5.4 Simplified Inelastic Analysis 169 5.4.1 Tests B-1 and B- 2 173 5.4.2 Test B- 1 173 5.4.3 Test B- 2 174 Problems 179 6 Creep-Fatigue Analysis 181 6.1 Introduction 181 6.2 Creep-Fatigue Evaluation Using Elastic Analysis 182 6.3 Welded Components 211 6.4 Variable Cyclic Loads 211 6.5 Equivalent Stress Range Determination 213 6.5.1 Equivalent Strain Range Determination – Applicable to Rotating Principal Strains 213 6.5.2 Equivalent Strain Range Determination – Applicable When Principal Strains Do Not Rotate 214 6.5.3 Equivalent Strain Range Determination – Acceptable Alternate When Performing Elastic Analysis 215 6.5.3.1 Constant Principal Stress Direction 215 6.5.3.2 Rotating Principal Stress Direction 215 6.5.3.3 Variable Cycles 215 Problems 221 7 Creep-Fatigue Analysis Using the Remaining Life Method 223 7.1 Basic Equations 223 7.2 Equations for Creep-Fatigue Interaction 225 7.3 Equations for Constructing Ishochronous Stress-Strain Curves 232 8 Nuclear Components Operating in the Creep Regime 237 8.1 Introduction 237 8.2 High Temperature Reactor Characteristics 239 8.3 Materials and Design of Class A Components 241 8.3.1 Materials 241 8.3.1.1 Thermal Aging Effects 242 8.3.1.2 Creep-Fatigue Acceptance Test 242 8.3.1.3 Restricted Material Specifications to Improve Performance 242 8.3.2 Design by Analysis 243 8.3.2.1 Equivalent Stress Definition 243 8.3.2.2 Rules for Bolting 245 8.3.2.3 Weldment Strength Reduction Factors 246 8.3.2.4 Constitutive Models for Inelastic Analysis 246 8.3.2.5 A-1, A-2, and A-3 Test Order 246 8.3.2.6 Determination of Relaxation Stress, S r 246 8.3.2.7 Buckling and Instability 247 8.3.2.8 d diagram differences 248 8.3.2.9 Isochronous Stress-Strain Curve Differences 248 8.3.3 Component Design Rules 248 8.4 Class B Components 249 8.4.1 Materials 249 8.4.2 Design 250 8.5 Core Support Structures 251 9 Members in Compression 253 9.1 Introduction 253 9.2 Construction of External Pressure Charts (EPC) Using Isochronous Stress-Strain Curves 254 9.3 Cylindrical Shells Under Axial Compression 259 9.4 Cylindrical Shells Under External Pressure 263 9.5 Spherical Shells Under External Pressure 266 9.6 Design of Structural Columns 269 9.7 Construction of External Pressure Charts (EPC) Using the Remaining Life Method 273 Appendix A: ASME VIII-2 Supplemental Rules for Creep Analysis 279 Case 2843-2 279 Analysis of Class 2 Components in the Time-Dependent Regime 279 Section VIII, Division 2 279 1 Scope 279 2 Strain Deformation Method 281 3 Materials and other Properties 281 3.1 Materials 281 3.2 Weld Materials 282 3.3 Design Fatigue Strain Range 282 3.4 Stress Values 283 3.5 Stress Terms 284 4 Design Criteria 284 4.1 Short-Term Loads 284 5 Load-Controlled Limits 285 5.1 Design Load Limits 285 5.2 Operating Load Limits 286 6 Strain Limits 288 6.1 Test A-1 Alternative Rules if Creep Effects are Negligible 288 6.2 Strain Limits – Elastic Analysis 291 6.2.1 General Requirements 291 6.2.2 Test A- 2 293 6.2.3 Test A- 3 293 6.3 Strain Limits – Simplified Inelastic Analysis 293 6.3.1 General Requirements 293 6.3.2 General Requirements for Tests B-1 and B- 2 293 6.3.3 Applicability of Tests B-1 and B- 2 296 6.3.3.1 Test B- 1 296 6.3.3.2 Test B- 2 297 6.4 Strain Limits – Inelastic Analysis 297 7 Creep Fatigue Evaluation 297 7.1 General Requirements 297 7.2 Creep Fatigue Procedure 298 7.2.1 Creep Procedure 298 7.2.2 Fatigue Procedure 302 7.2.3 Creep-Fatigue Interaction 303 8 Nomenclature 304 Appendix B: Equations for Average Isochronous Stress-Strain Curves 307 B. 1 Type 304 Stainless Steel Material 307 B.1. 1 304 Customary Units 307 B.1. 2 304 SI Units 310 B. 2 Type 316 Stainless Steel Material 313 B.2. 1 316 Customary Units 313 B.2. 2 316 SI Units 316 B. 3 Low Alloy 2.25Cr–1Mo Annealed Steel 321 B.3. 1 2.25Cr–1Mo Customary Units 321 B.3. 2 2.25 Cr–1Mo Steel SI Units 324 B. 4 Low Alloy 9Cr–1Mo-V Steel 328 B.4. 1 9Cr–1Mo-V Customary Units 328 B.4. 2 9Cr–1Mo-V SI Units 330 B. 5 Nickel Alloy 800H 332 B.5. 1 Alloy 800H Customary Units 332 B.5. 2 Alloy 800H SI Units 334 Appendix C: Equations for Tangent Modulus, E t 337 C.1 Tangent Modulus, E t 337 C.2 Type 304 Stainless Steel Material 337 Appendix D: Background of the Bree Diagram 343 D. 1 Basic Bree Diagram Derivation 343 Zone E 343 Zone S 1 347 Zone S 2 350 Zone P 351 Zone R 1 352 Zone R 2 355 Appendix E: Factors for the Remaining Life Method 357 Appendix F: Conversion Factors 363 References 365 Bibliography of Some Publications Related to Creep in Addition to Those Cited in the References 369 Index 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 IoT-Based Battery Management System for Hybrid Electric Vehicle 1P. Sivaraman and C. Sharmeela 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Battery Configurations 3 1.3 Types of Batteries for HEV and EV 5 1.4 Functional Blocks of BMS 6 1.4.1 Components of BMS System 7 1.5 IoT-Based Battery Monitoring System 11 References 14 2 A Noble Control Approach for Brushless Direct Current Motor Drive Using Artificial Intelligence for Optimum Operation of the Electric Vehicle 17Upama Das, Pabitra Kumar Biswas and Chiranjit Sain 2.1 Introduction 18 2.2 Introduction of Electric Vehicle 19 2.2.1 Historical Background of Electric Vehicle 19 2.2.2 Advantages of Electric Vehicle 20 2.2.2.1 Environmental 20 2.2.2.2 Mechanical 20 2.2.2.3 Energy Efficiency 20 2.2.2.4 Cost of Charging Electric Vehicles 21 2.2.2.5 The Grid Stabilization 21 2.2.2.6 Range 21 2.2.2.7 Heating of EVs 22 2.2.3 Artificial Intelligence 22 2.2.4 Basics of Artificial Intelligence 23 2.2.5 Advantages of Artificial Intelligence in Electric Vehicle 24 2.3 Brushless DC Motor 24 2.4 Mathematical Representation Brushless DC Motor 25 2.5 Closed-Loop Model of BLDC Motor Drive 30 2.5.1 P-I Controller & I-P Controller 31 2.6 PID Controller 32 2.7 Fuzzy Control 33 2.8 Auto-Tuning Type Fuzzy PID Controller 34 2.9 Genetic Algorithm 35 2.10 Artificial Neural Network-Based Controller 36 2.11 BLDC Motor Speed Controller With ANN-Based PID Controller 37 2.11.1 PID Controller-Based on Neuro Action 38 2.11.2 ANN-Based on PID Controller 38 2.12 Analysis of Different Speed Controllers 39 2.13 Conclusion 41 References 42 3 Optimization Techniques Used in Active Magnetic Bearing System for Electric Vehicles 49Suraj Gupta, Pabitra Kumar Biswas, Sukanta Debnath and Jonathan Laldingliana 3.1 Introduction 50 3.2 Basic Components of an Active Magnetic Bearing (AMB) 54 3.2.1 Electromagnet Actuator 54 3.2.2 Rotor 54 3.2.3 Controller 55 3.2.3.1 Position Controller 56 3.2.3.2 Current Controller 56 3.2.4 Sensors 56 3.2.4.1 Position Sensor 56 3.2.4.2 Current Sensor 57 3.2.5 Power Amplifier 57 3.3 Active Magnetic Bearing in Electric Vehicles System 58 3.4 Control Strategies of Active Magnetic Bearing for Electric Vehicles System 59 3.4.1 Fuzzy Logic Controller (FLC) 59 3.4.1.1 Designing of Fuzzy Logic Controller (FLC) Using MATLAB 60 3.4.2 Artificial Neural Network (ANN) 63 3.4.2.1 Artificial Neural Network Using MATLAB 63 3.4.3 Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) 67 3.4.4 Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) Algorithm 68 3.4.4.1 Implementation of Particle Swarm Optimization for Electric Vehicles System 70 3.5 Conclusion 71 References 72 4 Small-Signal Modelling Analysis of Three-Phase Power Converters for EV Applications 77Mohamed G. Hussien, Sanjeevikumar Padmanaban, Abd El-Wahab Hassan and Jens Bo Holm-Nielsen 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 Overall System Modelling 79 4.2.1 PMSM Dynamic Model 79 4.2.2 VSI-Fed SPMSM Mathematical Model 80 4.3 Mathematical Analysis and Derivation of the Small-Signal Model 86 4.3.1 The Small-Signal Model of the System 86 4.3.2 Small-Signal Model Transfer Functions 87 4.3.3 Bode Diagram Verification 96 4.4 Conclusion 100 References 100 5 Energy Management of Hybrid Energy Storage System in PHEV With Various Driving Mode 103S. Arun Mozhi, S. Charles Raja, M. Saravanan and J. Jeslin Drusila Nesamalar 5.1 Introduction 104 5.1.1 Architecture of PHEV 104 5.1.2 Energy Storage System 105 5.2 Problem Description and Formulation 106 5.2.1 Problem Description 106 5.2.2 Objective 106 5.2.3 Problem Formulation 106 5.3 Modeling of HESS 107 5.4 Results and Discussion 108 5.4.1 Case 1: Gradual Acceleration of Vehicle 108 5.4.2 Case 2: Gradual Deceleration of Vehicle 109 5.4.3 Case 3: Unsystematic Acceleration and Deceleration of Vehicle 110 5.5 Conclusion 111 References 112 6 Reliability Approach for the Power Semiconductor Devices in EV Applications 115Krishnachaitanya, D., Chitra, A. and Biswas, S.S. 6.1 Introduction 115 6.2 Conventional Methods for Prediction of Reliability for Power Converters 116 6.3 Calculation Process of the Electronic Component 118 6.4 Reliability Prediction for MOSFETs 119 6.5 Example: Reliability Prediction for Power Semiconductor Device 121 6.6 Example: Reliability Prediction for Resistor 122 6.7 Conclusions 123 References 123 7 Modeling, Simulation and Analysis of Drive Cycles for PMSM-Based HEV With Optimal Battery Type 125Chitra, A., Srivastava, Shivam, Gupta, Anish, Sinha, Rishu, Biswas, S.S. and Vanishree, J. 7.1 Introduction 126 7.2 Modeling of Hybrid Electric Vehicle 127 7.2.1 Architectures Available for HEV 128 7.3 Series—Parallel Hybrid Architecture 129 7.4 Analysis With Different Drive Cycles 129 7.4.1 Acceleration Drive Cycle 130 7.4.1.1 For 30% State of Charge 130 7.4.1.2 For 60% State of Charge 131 7.4.1.3 For 90% State of Charge 131 7.5 Cruising Drive Cycle 132 7.6 Deceleration Drive Cycle 132 7.6.1 For 30% State of Charge 134 7.6.2 For 60% State of Charge 136 7.6.3 For 90% State of Charge 137 7.7 Analysis of Battery Types 139 7.8 Conclusion 140 References 141 8 Modified Firefly-Based Maximum Power Point Tracking Algorithm for PV Systems Under Partial Shading Conditions 143Chitra, A., Yogitha, G., Karthik Sivaramakrishnan, Razia Sultana, W. and Sanjeevikumar, P. 8.1 Introduction 143 8.2 System Block Diagram Specifications 146 8.3 Photovoltaic System Modeling 148 8.4 Boost Converter Design 150 8.5 Incremental Conductance Algorithm 152 8.6 Under Partial Shading Conditions 153 8.7 Firefly Algorithm 154 8.8 Implementation Procedure 156 8.9 Modified Firefly Logic 157 8.10 Results and Discussions 159 8.11 Conclusion 162 References 162 9 Induction Motor Control Schemes for Hybrid Electric Vehicles/Electric Vehicles 165Sarin, M.V., Chitra, A., Sanjeevikumar, P. and Venkadesan, A. 9.1 Introduction 166 9.2 Control Schemes of IM 167 9.2.1 Scalar Control 167 9.3 Vector Control 168 9.4 Modeling of Induction Machine 169 9.5 Controller Design 174 9.6 Simulations and Results 175 9.7 Conclusions 176 References 177 10 Intelligent Hybrid Battery Management System for Electric Vehicle 179Rajalakshmi, M. and Razia Sultana, W. 10.1 Introduction 179 10.2 Energy Storage System (ESS) 181 10.2.1 Lithium-Ion Batteries 183 10.2.1.1 Lithium Battery Challenges 183 10.2.2 Lithium–Ion Cell Modeling 184 10.2.3 Nickel-Metal Hydride Batteries 186 10.2.4 Lead-Acid Batteries 187 10.2.5 Ultracapacitors (UC) 187 10.2.5.1 Ultracapacitor Equivalent Circuit 187 10.2.6 Other Battery Technologies 189 10.3 Battery Management System 190 10.3.1 Need for BMS 191 10.3.2 BMS Components 192 10.3.3 BMS Architecture/Topology 193 10.3.4 SOC/SOH Determination 193 10.3.5 Cell Balancing Algorithms 197 10.3.6 Data Communication 197 10.3.7 The Logic and Safety Control 198 10.3.7.1 Power Up/Down Control 198 10.3.7.2 Charging and Discharging Control 199 10.4 Intelligent Battery Management System 199 10.4.1 Rule-Based Control 201 10.4.2 Optimization-Based Control 201 10.4.3 AI-Based Control 202 10.4.4 Traffic (Look Ahead Method)-Based Control 203 10.5 Conclusion 203 References 203 11 A Comprehensive Study on Various Topologies of Permanent Magnet Motor Drives for Electric Vehicles Application 207Chiranjit Sain, Atanu Banerjee and Pabitra Kumar Biswas 11.1 Introduction 208 11.2 Proposed Design Considerations of PMSM for Electric Vehicle 209 11.3 Impact of Digital Controllers 211 11.3.1 DSP-Based Digital Controller 212 11.3.2 FPGA-Based Digital Controller 212 11.4 Electric Vehicles Smart Infrastructure 212 11.5 Conclusion 214 References 215 12 A New Approach for Flux Computation Using Intelligent Technique for Direct Flux Oriented Control of Asynchronous Motor 219A. Venkadesan, K. Sedhuraman, S. Himavathi and A. Chitra 12.1 Introduction 220 12.2 Direct Field-Oriented Control of IM Drive 221 12.3 Conventional Flux Estimator 222 12.4 Rotor Flux Estimator Using CFBP-NN 223 12.5 Comparison of Proposed CFBP-NN With Existing CFBP-NN for Flux Estimation 224 12.6 Performance Study of Proposed CFBP-NN Using MATLAB/SIMULINK 225 12.7 Practical Implementation Aspects of CFBP-NN-Based Flux Estimator 229 12.8 Conclusion 231 References 231 13 A Review on Isolated DC–DC Converters Used in Renewable Power Generation Applications 233Ingilala Jagadeesh and V. Indragandhi 13.1 Introduction 233 13.2 Isolated DC–DC Converter for Electric Vehicle Applications 234 13.3 Three-Phase DC–DC Converter 238 13.4 Conclusion 238 References 239 14 Basics of Vector Control of Asynchronous Induction Motor and Introduction to Fuzzy Controller 241S.S. Biswas 14.1 Introduction 241 14.2 Dynamics of Separately Excited DC Machine 243 14.3 Clarke and Park Transforms 244 14.4 Model Explanation 251 14.5 Motor Parameters 252 14.6 PI Regulators Tuning 254 14.7 Future Scope to Include Fuzzy Control in Place of PI Controller 256 14.8 Conclusion 257 References 258 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplore the properties of a wide range of dental materials used in restorative dentistry with a brand-new resource The Manual of Laboratory Testing Methods for Dental Restorative Materials delivers a comprehensive and accessible review of the materials used in restorative dentistry. The book offers readers an evidence-based application of the materials and their mechanical, physical, and optical properties. Each chapter begins with key points and includes a glossary to aid in the learning and retention of the material contained within. The book also covers the methods used to study the properties and the advantages and disadvantages of various dental restorative materials as well as why they are selected. The Manual of Laboratory Testing Methods for Dental Restorative Materials will be a helpful addition to any institute library or personal collection and will cater to the needs of postgraduate dental students, researchers and academics in the fields of dentistry and material sciTable of ContentsAbout the Companion Website Acknowledgements Preface Glossary of Key Terms Introduction Chapter 1 - Assessment of Mechanical Properties of Dental Restorative Materials Chapter 2 - Assessment of Physical Properties of Dental Restorative Materials Chapter 3 - Isolation and Identification of Oral Microflora Chapter 4 - Assessment of Biocompatibility of Dental Materials Chapter 5 - Assessment of Optical Properties Chapter 6 - Simulation of Oral Environment Chapter 7 - Extra Mile: Biofilm Models and Assessment of Biofilms in Restorative Dentistry Conclusion Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisMASTER AND INTEGRATE THE GEOMETRY AND MECHANICS OF RAILROAD VEHICLE SYSTEM ENGINEERING WITH ONE PRACTICAL RESOURCEMathematical Foundation of Railroad Vehicle Systems: Geometry and Mechanics delivers a comprehensive treatment of the mathematical foundations of railroad vehicle systems. The book includes a strong emphasis on the integration of geometry and mechanics to create an accurate and accessible formulation of nonlinear dynamic equations and general computational algorithms that can be effectively used in the virtual prototyping, analysis, design, and performance evaluation of railroad vehicle systems. Using basic concepts, formulations, and computational algorithms, including mechanics-based approaches like the absolute nodal coordinate formulation (ANCF), readers will understand how to integrate the geometry and mechanics of railroad vehicle systems. The book also discusses new problems and issues in this area and describes how geometric and mechanical approaches can be used in derailment investigations. Mathematical Foundation of Railroad Vehicle Systems covers:The mathematical foundation of railroad vehicle systems through the integration of geometry and mechanics Basic concepts, formulations, and computational algorithms used in railroad vehicle system dynamics New mechanics-based approaches, like the ANCF, and their use to achieve an integration of geometry and mechanics Use of geometry and mechanics to study derailments New problems and issues in the area of railroad vehicle systemsDesigned for researchers and practicing engineers who work with railroad vehicle systems, Mathematical Foundation of Railroad Vehicle Systems: Geometry and Mechanics can also be used in senior undergraduate and graduate mechanical, civil, and electrical engineering programs and courses.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Differential Geometry 4 1.2 Integration of Geometry and Mechanics 9 1.3 Hunting Oscillations 14 1.4 Wheel and Track Geometries 17 1.5 Centrifugal Forces and Balance Speed 22 1.6 Contact Formulations 26 1.7 Computational MBS Approaches 28 1.8 Derailment Criteria 33 1.9 High-Speed Rail Systems 36 1.10 Linear Algebra and Book Notations 41 2 Differential Geometry 45 2.1 Curve Geometry 46 2.2 Surface Geometry 54 2.3 Application to Railroad Geometry 57 2.4 Surface Tangent Plane and Normal Vector 60 2.5 Surface Fundamental Forms 62 2.6 Normal Curvature 69 2.7 Principal Curvatures and Directions 72 2.8 Numerical Representation of the Profile Geometry 76 2.9 Numerical Representation of Surface Geometry 78 3 Motion and Geometry Descriptions 83 3.1 Rigid-Body Kinematics 84 3.2 Direction Cosines and Simple Rotations 86 3.3 Euler Angles 88 3.4 Euler Parameters 91 3.5 Velocity and Acceleration Equations 95 3.6 Generalized Coordinates 97 3.7 Kinematic Singularities 100 3.8 Euler Angles and Track Geometry 102 3.9 Angle Representation of the Curve Geometry 107 3.10 Euler Angles as Field Variables 108 3.11 Euler-Angle Description of the Track Geometry 111 3.12 Geometric Motion Constraints 114 3.13 Trajectory Coordinates 119 4 Railroad Geometry 125 4.1 Wheel Surface Geometry 126 4.2 Wheel Curvatures and Global Vectors 132 4.3 Semi-analytical Approach for Rail Geometry 135 4.4 ANCF Rail Geometry 142 4.5 ANCF Interpolation of Rail Geometry 145 4.6 ANCF Computation of Tangents and Normal 146 4.7 Track Geometry Equations 148 4.8 Numerical Representation of Track Geometry 152 4.9 Track Data 155 4.10 Irregularities and Measured Track Data 162 4.11 Comparison of the Semi-Analytical and ANCF Approaches 169 5 Contact Problem 175 5.1 Wheel/Rail Contact Mechanism 177 5.2 Constraint Contact Formulation (CCF) 183 5.3 Elastic Contact Formulation (ECF) 184 5.4 Normal Contact Forces 187 5.5 Contact Surface Geometry 188 5.6 Contact Ellipse and Normal Contact Force 194 5.7 Creepage Definitions 199 5.8 Creep Force Formulations 203 5.9 Creep Force and Wheel/Rail Contact Formulations 213 5.10 Maglev Forces 219 6 Equations of Motion 225 6.1 Newtonian and Lagrangian Approaches 226 6.2 Virtual Work Principle and Constrained Dynamics 227 6.3 Summary of Rigid-Body Kinematics 232 6.4 Inertia Forces 235 6.5 Applied Forces 239 6.6 Newton–Euler Equations 241 6.7 Augmented Formulation and Embedding Technique 244 6.8 Wheel/Rail Constraint Contact Forces 254 6.9 Wheel/Rail Elastic Contact Forces 259 6.10 Other Force Elements 261 6.11 Trajectory Coordinates 268 6.12 Longitudinal Train Dynamics (LTD) 274 6.13 Hunting Stability 280 6.14 MBS Modeling of Electromechanical Systems 288 7 Pantograph/Catenary Systems 291 7.1 Pantograph/Catenary Design 292 7.2 ANCF Catenary Kinematic Equations 298 7.3 Catenary Inertia and Elastic Forces 304 7.4 Catenary Equations of Motion 306 7.5 Pantograph/Catenary Contact Frame 308 7.6 Constraint Contact Formulation (CCF) 310 7.7 Elastic Contact Formulation (ECF) 314 7.8 Pantograph/Catenary Equations and MBS Algorithms 317 7.9 Pantograph/Catenary Contact Force Control 321 7.10 Aerodynamic Forces 322 7.11 Pantograph/Catenary Wear 324 Appendix Contact Equations and Elliptical Integrals 329 A.1 Derivation of the Contact Equations 329 A.2 Elliptical Integrals 332 Bibliography 335 Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisCONSTRUCTION RISK MANAGEMENT DECISION MAKING Explores the relevance of systems thinking and behavioral science in construction risk management Effective risk management is a vital component of all successful construction projects. Although quantitative tools for evaluating data and minimizing risk are readily available, construction managers commonly adopt a more innate, experience-based approach. In Construction Risk Management Decision Making, project manager and senior consultant Alex C. Arthur provides step-by-step advice on assessing and prioritizing risk using qualitative decision-making systems in the construction industry. Incorporating key theories and concepts from systems thinking and behavioral science, this highly practical guide focuses on the behavior patterns of real people in the industry, rather than complex quantitative techniques and data. Concise, easy-to-understand chapters highlight the current practices of construction risk managemTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgement xiii About the Author xv 1 Introduction – A Risk Management Approach to Construction Project Delivery 1 1.1 Risk Perception Categorisation 3 1.1.1 Differences in Personality Traits 3 1.1.2 Prospect Theory 3 1.1.3 Differences Between External Stakeholders and Project Team Members 4 1.1.4 Culture Theory 4 1.2 Construction Risk Data Presentation Formats 4 Part 1 Concepts 5 Overview of the Concept Chapters 7 2 Systems Analysis of the Construction Industry and Project Delivery 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 The Construction Industry 10 2.3 The Construction Industry System 10 2.3.1 Open and Closed Systems 11 2.3.2 Construction System Objective 12 2.3.3 Construction System’s Components and Decomposition 13 2.4 Construction Delivery System 14 2.5 The Construction Project Management System; Differentiation and Risk 17 2.5.1 Systems Differentiation 17 2.5.1.1 Evolution of Specialist Construction Disciplines 21 2.5.1.2 Isolated Training Programmes for the Different Specialist Disciplines 22 2.5.1.3 Project Team Members from Different Organisations and Internal Subgroups 22 2.5.1.4 Differences in Personal Objectives of Project Team Members 23 2.5.1.5 Environmental Changes 23 2.5.2 The Link Between Differentiation and Risk 24 2.5.2.1 Consolidated Differentiated Specialist Groupings 24 2.5.2.2 Failure to Integrate Objectives of Additional Differentiated Specialist Roles 24 2.5.2.3 Sudden and Prolonged Environmental Changes 24 2.6 Construction System’s Environment and Risk 25 2.6.1 Political Functional Subsystem 26 2.6.2 Economic Functional Subsystem 26 2.6.3 Socio-cultural Functional Subsystem 27 2.6.4 Technological Functional Subsystem 27 2.6.5 Ecological Functional Subsystem 27 2.6.6 Legal Functional Subsystem 28 2.7 Summary 28 3 The Concept of Risk 31 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Risk Conceptualisation 31 3.3 Risk Etymology 32 3.4 Risk Conceptual Interpretations 33 3.4.1 Realist Interpretation 33 3.4.2 Psychometric Viewpoint 34 3.4.3 Sociological Interpretation 35 3.4.4 Real and Socially Constructed Viewpoint 36 3.4.5 Edgework Viewpoint 36 3.5 Psychometric and Sociological Risk Perspective Application in This Book 36 3.6 Summary 38 4 Construction Risk Management 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Changing Perspectives on Organisational Risk Management Strategies 42 4.3 The Construction Risk Management Process 43 4.3.1 Risk Identification Subsystem 44 4.3.2 Risk Analysis Sub-system 44 4.3.3 Risk Response Sub-system 45 4.3.4 Risk Review Sub-system 45 4.4 Construction Risk Management Approaches 46 4.5 Summary 49 5 Construction Risk Management Decision-Making 51 5.1 Introduction 51 5.2 The Two Systems of Thinking and Decision-Making 52 5.2.1 Quick Decision-Making 53 5.2.2 Gradual Decision-Making 54 5.3 The Psychology of Perception 55 5.3.1 Risk Perception 56 5.3.2 Formation of Risk Perceptions 57 5.3.3 Impact of Affective Heuristics on Cognitive Reasoning 59 5.3.4 Construction Risk Data Presentation Formats and Affective Heuristics 60 5.4 Risk Management Decision Making Under Intuition 61 5.5 Differentiated Risk Perceptions and Intuitive Construction Risk Management Practices 64 5.6 Summary 68 Summary of the Part 1 71 Part 2 Case Studies 75 Overview of the Part 2 77 6 Research Proposal, Methodology, and Design 81 6.1 Introduction 81 6.2 Research Proposal 81 6.2.1 Research Propositions 84 6.2.1.1 Proposition 1 84 6.2.1.2 Proposition 2 84 6.2.1.3 Proposition 3 85 6.3 Research Philosophical Traditions, Axioms, and Methodology 85 6.3.1 Phase 1: The Researcher’s Philosophical Stance 86 6.3.2 Phase 2: Research Theoretical Perspectives 86 6.3.3 Phase 3: Research Investigative Strategies 86 6.3.4 Phase 4: Methods of Data Collection and Analysis 87 6.3.5 Phase 5: Demonstrating Quality of the Empirical Evidence 88 6.4 Summary 88 7 Data Presentation 89 7.1 Introduction 89 7.2 Case Study Project 1 89 7.2.1 Case Study 1 Participants 90 7.2.2 Case Study 1 Findings 91 7.2.2.1 Case 1– Research Proposition 1: Findings 91 7.2.2.2 Case 1– Research Proposition 2: Findings 102 7.2.2.3 Case 1– Research Proposition 3: Findings 124 7.2.2.4 Summary of Case 1 Findings 146 7.3 Case Study Project 2 147 7.3.1 Case Study 2 Participants 147 7.3.2 Case Study 2 Findings 147 7.4 Case Study Project 3 150 7.4.1 Case Study 3 Participants 151 7.4.2 Case Study 3 Findings 153 7.5 Case Study Project 4 154 7.5.1 Case Study 4 Participants 154 7.5.2 Case Study 4 Findings 155 7.6 Summary 158 8 Application 161 8.1 Introduction 161 8.2 Research Proposition 1: Discussions 161 8.2.1 Risk Perception Categorisation on the Typical Construction Project Risk Events at the Different Project Delivery Phases 162 8.2.1.1 Pre-construction Phase 162 8.2.1.2 Construction Phase 163 8.2.2 Risk Perception Categorisation on the Typical Construction Project Risk Events Under Different Project Settings 164 8.3 Research Proposition 2: Discussions 169 8.3.1 Intuitive Risk Management Decision Processing from ‘Grounded’ Heuristics 169 8.3.2 Susceptibility of Intuitive Decision Processing to Manipulation 173 8.3.3 Psychological Difficulties in Intuitive Risk Identification of Events Outside the Scope of a Specialist Role 173 8.4 Research Proposition 3: Findings 179 8.4.1 Two Strands of Intuitive Construction Risk Management Systems 180 8.4.2 Theoretically Incompatible Risk Management Practices 184 8.4.3 Intuitive Processing of Statistics and Probability Data 186 8.4.4 Comparative Analysis of Intuitive Processing of Quantitative Risk Assessment Versus Qualitative Risk Assessment 189 8.4.5 Intuitive Processing of Probability Predictions of Emotive Events 192 8.5 Summary 196 8.5.1 Research Proposition 1 196 8.5.2 Research Proposition 2 197 8.5.3 Research Proposition 3 198 9 Conclusions 201 9.1 Summary 201 9.1.1 Research Proposition 1 202 9.1.2 Research Proposition 2 203 9.1.3 Research Proposition 3 204 9.2 Rethinking Construction Risk Management Practices 205 Appendix A Research Design – Theory, Methodology, and Field Questions 207 Appendix B Case 2 Data Presentation 225 Appendix c Case 3 Data Presentation 279 Appendix d Case 4 Data Presentation 335 References 391 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisSTATE FEEDBACK CONTROL AND KALMAN FILTERING WITH MATLAB/SIMULINK TUTORIALS Discover the control engineering skills for state space control system design, simulation, and implementation State space control system design is one of the core courses covered in engineering programs around the world. Applications of control engineering include things like autonomous vehicles, renewable energy, unmanned aerial vehicles, electrical machine control, and robotics, and as a result the field may be considered cutting-edge. The majority of textbooks on the subject, however, lack the key link between the theory and the applications of design methodology. State Feedback Control and Kalman Filtering with MATLAB/Simulink Tutorials provides a unique perspective by linking state space control systems to engineering applications. The book comprehensively delivers introductory topics in state space control systems through to advanced topics like sensor fusion and repetitive control systems. More, it exploTable of ContentsAuthor Biography xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xxi List of Symbols and Acronyms xxiii About the Companion Website xxv Part I Continuous-time State Feedback Control 1 1 State Feedback Controller and Observer Design 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Motivation for Going Beyond PID Control 4 1.3 Basics in State Feedback Control 12 1.3.1 State Feedback Control 12 1.3.2 Controllability 18 1.3.3 Food for Thought 21 1.4 Pole-assignment Controller 21 1.4.1 The Design Method 21 1.4.2 Similarity Transformation for Controller Design 24 1.4.3 MATLAB Tutorial on Pole-assignment Controller 27 1.4.4 Food for Thought 29 1.5 Linear Quadratic Regulator (LQR) Design 29 1.5.1 Motivational Example 29 1.5.2 Linear Quadratic Regulator Design 32 1.5.3 Selection of Q and R Matrices 34 1.5.4 LQR with Prescribed Degree of Stability 39 1.5.5 Food for Thought 46 1.6 Observer Design 47 1.6.1 Motivational Example for Observer 47 1.6.2 Observer Design 50 1.6.3 Observability 53 1.6.4 Duality between Controller and Observer 55 1.6.5 Observer Implementation 56 1.6.6 Food for Thought 57 1.7 State Estimate Feedback Control System 58 1.7.1 State Estimate Feedback Control 58 1.7.2 Separation Principle 59 1.7.3 Food for Thought 60 1.8 Summary 61 1.9 Further Reading 62 Problems 63 2 Practical Multivariable Controllers in Continuous-time 67 2.1 Introduction 67 2.2 Practical Controller I: Integral Action via Controller Design 68 2.2.1 The Original Control Law 68 2.2.2 Integrator Windup Scenarios 69 2.2.3 Proposed Practical Multivariable Controller 71 2.2.4 Anti-windup Implementation 74 2.2.5 MATLAB Tutorial on Design and Implementation 77 2.2.6 Application to Drum Boiler Control 85 2.2.7 Food for Thought 91 2.3 Practical Controller II: Integral Action via Observer Design 92 2.3.1 Integral Control via Disturbance Estimation 92 2.3.2 Anti-windup Mechanism 95 2.3.3 MATLAB Tutorial on Design and Implementation 96 2.3.4 Application to Sugar Mill Control 102 2.3.5 Design for Systems with Known States 103 2.3.6 Food for Thought 106 2.4 Drive Train Control of aWind Turbine 107 2.4.1 Modelling of Wind Turbine’s Drive Train 107 2.4.2 Configuration of The Control System 110 2.4.3 Design Method I 111 2.4.4 Design Method II 115 2.4.5 MATLAB Tutorial on Design Method II 116 2.4.6 Food for Thought 121 2.5 Summary 121 2.6 Further Reading 122 Problems 122 Part II Discrete-time State Feedback Control 127 3 Introduction to Discrete-time Systems 129 3.1 Introduction 129 3.2 Discretization of Continuous-time Models 130 3.2.1 Sampling of a Continuous-time Model 130 3.2.2 Stability of Discrete-time System 133 3.2.3 Examples of Discrete-time Models from Sampling 134 3.2.4 Food for Thoughts 141 3.3 Input and Output Discrete-time Models 142 3.3.1 Input and Output Models 142 3.3.2 Finite Impulse Response and Step Response Models 144 3.3.3 Non-minimal State Space Realization 148 3.3.4 Food for Thought 148 3.4 z-Transforms 149 3.4.1 z-Transforms for Commonly Used Signals 149 3.4.2 z-Transfer Functions 152 3.4.3 Food for Thought 154 3.5 Summary 155 3.6 Further Reading 156 Problems 156 4 Discrete-time State Feedback Control 161 4.1 Introduction 161 4.2 Discrete-time State Feedback Control 161 4.2.1 Basic Ideas 161 4.2.2 Controllability in Discrete-time 165 4.2.3 Food for Thought 167 4.3 Discrete-time Observer Design 167 4.3.1 Basic Ideas about Discrete-time Observer 167 4.3.2 Observability in Discrete-time 171 4.3.3 Food for Thought 173 4.4 Discrete-time Linear Quadratic Regulator (DLQR) 173 4.4.1 Objective Function for DLQR 173 4.4.2 Optimal Solution 174 4.4.3 Observer Design using DLQR 176 4.4.4 Food for Thought 176 4.5 Discrete-time LQR with Prescribed Degree of Stability 177 4.5.1 Basic Ideas about a Prescribed Degree of Stability 177 4.5.2 Case Studies 180 4.5.3 Food for Thought 186 4.6 Summary 186 4.7 Further Reading 187 Problems 188 5 Disturbance Rejection and Reference Tracking via Observer Design 195 5.1 Introduction 195 5.2 Disturbance Models 195 5.2.1 Commonly Encountered Disturbance Signals 196 5.2.2 State Space Model with Input Disturbance 199 5.2.3 Food for Thought 200 5.3 Compensation of Input and Output Disturbances in Estimation 200 5.3.1 Motivational Example 200 5.3.2 Input Disturbance Observer Design 202 5.3.3 MATLAB Tutorial for Augmented State Space Model 206 5.3.4 The Observer Error System 207 5.3.5 Output Disturbance Observer Design 209 5.3.6 Food for Thought 213 5.4 Disturbance-Observer-based State Feedback Control 214 5.4.1 The Control Law 214 5.4.2 MATLAB Tutorial for Control Implementation 217 5.4.3 Food for Thought 222 5.5 Analysis of Disturbance-Observer-based Control System 223 5.5.1 Controller Transfer Function 223 5.5.2 Disturbance Rejection 225 5.5.3 Reference Tracking 227 5.5.4 A Case Study 228 5.5.5 Food for Thought 232 5.6 Anti-windup Implementation of the Control Law 233 5.6.1 Algorithm for Anti-windup Implementation 233 5.6.2 Heating Furnace Control 236 5.6.3 Example for Bandlimited Disturbance 239 5.6.4 Food for Thought 241 5.7 Summary 242 5.8 Further Reading 243 Problems 243 6 Disturbance Rejection and Reference Tracking via Control Design 253 6.1 Introduction 253 6.2 Embedding Disturbance Model into Controller Design 254 6.2.1 Formulation of Augmented State Space Model 254 6.2.2 MATLAB Tutorial 256 6.2.3 Controllability and Observability 258 6.2.4 Food for Thought 259 6.3 Controller and Observer Design 260 6.3.1 Controller Design and Control Signal Calculation 260 6.3.2 Adding Reference Signal 262 6.3.3 Observer Design and Implementation 262 6.3.4 MATLAB Tutorial for Control Implementation 264 6.3.5 Food for Thought 268 6.4 Practical Issues 269 6.4.1 Reducing Overshoot in Reference Tracking 269 6.4.2 Anti-windup Implementation 272 6.4.3 Control System using NMSS Realization 276 6.4.4 Food for Thought 282 6.5 Repetitive Control 283 6.5.1 Basic Ideas about Repetitive Control 283 6.5.2 Determining the Disturbance Model D(z) 285 6.5.3 Robotic Arm Control 290 6.5.4 Food for Thought 295 6.6 Summary 295 6.7 Further Reading 296 Problems 296 Part III Kalman Filtering 309 7 The Kalman Filter 311 7.1 Introduction 311 7.2 The Kalman Filter Algorithm 312 7.2.1 State Space Models in the Kalman Filter 312 7.2.2 An Intuitive Computational Procedure 313 7.2.3 Optimization of Kalman Filter Gain 315 7.2.4 Kalman Filter Examples with MATLAB Tutorials 317 7.2.5 Compensation of Sensor Bias and Load Disturbance 325 7.2.6 Food for Thought 330 7.3 The Kalman Filter in Multi-rate Sampling Environment 331 7.3.1 KF Algorithm for Missing Data Scenarios 331 7.3.2 Case Studies with MATLAB Tutorial 333 7.3.3 Food for Thought 344 7.4 The Extended Kalman Filter (EKF) 344 7.4.1 Linearization in Extended Kalman Filter 344 7.4.2 The Extended Kalman Filter Algorithm 348 7.4.3 Case Studies with MATLAB Tutorial 351 7.4.4 Food for Thought 359 7.5 The Kalman Filter with Fading Memory 359 7.5.1 The Algorithm for KF with Fading Memory 360 7.5.2 Food for Thought 363 7.6 Relationship between Kalman Filter and Observer 364 7.6.1 One-step Kalman Filter Algorithm 364 7.6.2 Kalman Filter and Observer 365 7.6.3 Food for Thought 370 7.7 Summary 371 7.8 Further Reading 372 Problems 372 8 Addressing Computational Issues in KF 377 8.1 Introduction 377 8.2 The Sequential Kalman Filter 377 8.2.1 Basic Ideas about Sequential Kalman Filter 377 8.2.2 Non-diagonal R 382 8.2.3 MATLAB Tutorial for Sequential Kalman Filter 383 8.2.4 Food for Thought 387 8.3 The Kalman Filter using UDUT Factorization 388 8.3.1 Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization Procedure 388 8.3.2 Basic Ideas 390 8.3.3 Sequential Kalman Filter with UDUT Decomposition 393 8.3.4 MATLAB Tutorial 395 8.3.5 Food for Thought 398 8.4 Summary 398 8.5 Further Reading 399 Problems 399 Bibliography 403 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides an interdisciplinary introduction to peptide science, covering their properties and synthesis, as well as many contemporary applications Peptides are biomolecules comprised of amino acids which play an important role in modulating many physiological processes in our body. This book presents an interdisciplinary approach and general introduction to peptide science, covering contemporary topics including their applicability in therapeutics, peptide hormones, amyloid structures, self-assembled structures, hydrogels, and peptide conjugates including lipopeptides and polymer-peptide conjugates. In addition, it discusses basic properties and synthesis clearly and concisely. Taking a logical approach to the subject, Introduction to Peptide Science gives readers the fundamental knowledge that is required to understand the cutting-edge material which comes later in the book. It offers readers in-depth chapter coverage of the basic properties of peptides; synthesis; amyloid and peptTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Basic Properties 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Properties of Amino Acids 2 1.3 The Peptide Bond 22 1.4 Secondary Structures 24 1.5 Peptide Structure and Conformation Characterization Methods 32 1.6 Peptide Databases and Web Software 39 Bibliography 43 2 Synthesis 45 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 Solid-Phase Peptide Synthesis 46 2.3 Solution-Phase Peptide Synthesis 58 2.4 Methods to Prepare Longer Peptides 59 2.5 Peptide Library Synthesis 62 2.6 Synthesis of Cyclic Peptides 65 2.7 Peptidomimetics 69 2.8 Post-Translational Modifications 70 2.9 Lipidation 71 2.10 Glycosylation 73 2.11 Polypeptide Polymers and Conjugates of Peptides and Polymers 74 2.12 Non-Ribosomal Peptide Synthesis 80 2.13 Purification and Analysis Methods 80 Bibliography 84 3 Amyloid and Other Peptide Aggregate Structures 87 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Amyloid 90 3.3 Amyloid β 93 3.4 Mechanisms and Kinetics of Amyloid Aggregation 100 3.5 Toxicity and Relevance to Disease 105 3.6 Fibrillization of Small Peptides 108 3.7 Biological Functional Amyloid and Bioengineering Applications of Amyloid Materials 110 3.8 Fibrils From α-Helices 111 3.9 Peptide Hydrogels and Tissue Scaffolds 112 3.10 Peptide Nanotubes 116 3.11 Peptide and Peptide Conjugate Assemblies 119 3.12 Characterization Methods for Peptide Assemblies 124 Bibliography 130 4 Antimicrobial and Cell-penetrating Peptides 133 4.1 Introduction 133 4.2 Bacterial Pathogens, Targets of Antibacterial Agents, and Antimicrobial Resistance Pathways 134 4.3 Testing Antimicrobial Activity 139 4.4 Bacterial Biofilms 140 4.5 Design of Antimicrobial Peptides 144 4.6 Classes of Antibacterial Peptides 146 4.7 Antifungal Peptides 155 4.8 Antiviral Peptides 159 4.9 Antiparasitic Peptides 160 4.10 Mechanisms of Activity 160 4.11 Cell-Penetrating Peptides 164 Bibliography 167 5 Peptide Hormones and Peptide Therapeutics 169 5.1 Introduction 169 5.2 General Principles of Peptide Therapeutics 170 5.3 Peptide Hormones 176 5.4 Neuropeptides and other Peptides In vivo 202 5.5 Venom-Derived Peptides 204 5.6 Anticancer Peptides 207 5.7 Miscellaneous Peptide Therapeutics 212 5.8 Cosmetic Peptides and Lipopeptides 214 Bibliography 216 Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover the latest advances in spintronic materials, devices, and applications In Spintronics: Materials, Devices and Applications, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a holistic introduction to spintronic effects within cutting-edge materials and applications. Containing the perfect balance of academic research and practical application, the book discusses the potentialand the key limitations and challengesof spintronic devices. The latest title in the Wiley Series in Materials for Electronic and Optoelectronic Applications, Spintronics: Materials, Devices and Applications explores giant magneto-resistance (GMR) and tunneling magnetic resistance (TMR) materials, spin-transfer torque and spin-orbit torque materials, spin oscillators, and spin materials for use in artificial neural networks. Applications in multi-ferroelectric and antiferromagnetic materials are presented as well. This book also includes: A thorough introduction to recent research developments in the fields of spintronic materials, devices, and applicationsComprehensive explorations of skymions, magnetic semiconductors, and antiferromagnetic materialsPractical discussions of spin-transfer torque materials and devices for magnetic random-access memoryIn-depth examinations of giant magneto-resistance materials and devices for magnetic sensors Perfect for advanced students and researchers in materials science, physics, electronics, and computer science, Spintronics: Materials, Devices and Applications will also earn a place in the libraries of professionals working in the manufacture of optics, photonics, and nanometrology equipment.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Series Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1Kaiyou Wang 2 Giant Magnetoresistance (GMR) Materials and Devices for Biomedical and Industrial Applications 3Kai Wu, Diqing Su, Renata Saha, and Jian-Ping Wang 2.1 Introduction 3 2.2 Giant Magnetoresistance (GMR) Effect 4 2.3 Different Types of GMR Sensors 7 2.3.1 Rigid GMR Sensors 7 2.3.1.1 Long-strip GMR Sensors 7 2.3.1.2 Large-area GMR Sensors 8 2.3.2 Flexible GMR Sensors 9 2.3.3 Printable GMR Sensors 11 2.3.4 Granular GMR Sensors (Thin Film- and Solution-based) 11 2.4 GMR Sensors: Surface Modification and Auxiliary Tools 12 2.4.1 GMR Sensor Surface Modification for Biomedical Applications 12 2.4.2 Integration of a Magnetic Flux Concentrator (MFC) 14 2.4.2.1 Superconducting MFC 14 2.4.2.2 Soft-ferromagnetic Material-based MFC 14 2.4.3 Integration of Microfluidic Channels 16 2.5 GMR-based Biomedical Applications 16 2.5.1 GMR-based Immunoassays 16 2.5.1.1 Wash-free and Non-wash-free Immunoassays 17 2.5.1.2 Different Immunoassay Methods 17 2.5.1.3 GMR for Disease Diagnosis 19 2.5.1.4 GMR-based Point-of-Care (POC) Devices 24 2.5.2 GMR-based Genotyping 25 2.5.3 GMR-based Bio-magnetic Field Recording 28 2.5.4 GMR-based Food and Drug Safety Supervision 32 2.6 GMR-based Industrial Applications 34 2.6.1 GMR for Position Sensing 34 2.6.2 GMR for Current Sensing 35 2.6.3 GMR for Material Defect Inspection 37 2.7 Conclusions and Outlook 39 References 40 3 Tunneling Magnetoresistance (TMR) Materials and Devices for Magnetic Sensors 51Zitong Zhou, Kun Zhang, and Qunwen Leng 3.1 Principle of Tunneling Magnetoresistance Effect 52 3.1.1 Tunneling Process 52 3.1.2 Spin-dependent Tunneling Process 53 3.1.3 The Julliére Model 54 3.1.4 Typical Structure of the Magnetic Sensing Unit 56 3.2 Material and Process 56 3.2.1 TMR Barrier Materials 56 3.2.2 Ferromagnetic Layers in TMR 59 3.2.3 TMR Film Stack 61 3.2.4 Perpendicular Magnetic Anisotropy (PMA) in TMR 65 3.2.5 Material Fabrication and Pattern Process 65 3.2.5.1 Magnetron Sputtering 66 3.2.5.2 Ion Beam Deposition (IBD) 67 3.2.5.3 Evaporation 67 3.2.5.4 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 67 3.2.5.5 Photolithography 69 3.2.5.6 Etching 69 3.3 The Noise of TMR Sensors 70 3.3.1 The Source of Noise from TMR Sensors 70 3.3.2 Methods to Suppress the Noise 72 3.3.2.1 Increase the Number of MTJs in TMR Device 72 3.3.2.2 Optimize Free Layer Volume 73 3.3.2.3 Flux Concentrator 73 3.3.2.4 Applying a Bias Magnetic Field 74 3.4 TMR Sensors and Applications 75 3.4.1 TMR Read Heads 75 3.4.2 The TMR Angle Sensors 76 3.4.3 Geomagnetic Measurement 79 3.4.4 Spin-MEMS Combined Application 80 3.4.5 Nondestructive Testing (NDT) 82 3.4.6 Ultra-low Magnetic Field Detection: Biosensor 83 3.5 Conclusion 85 References 86 4 Spin-Transfer Torque Materials and Devices for Magnetic Random-Access Memory (STT-MRAM) 93Yan Cui and Jun Luo 4.1 The Background and Mechanism of STT-MRAM 93 4.1.1 The Background of STT-MRAM 93 4.1.2 The Mechanism of STT-MRAM 93 4.1.2.1 LLGS Equation 93 4.1.2.2 The Write Mechanism of STT-MRAM 94 4.1.2.3 The Magnetism of STT-MTJ 97 4.1.2.4 The Switching Properties of STT-MTJ 99 4.2 The Integrated Process of STT-MRAM 102 4.2.1 CMP Technology 102 4.2.2 Magnetic Film Deposition Technology 103 4.2.3 Photolithography Technology 103 4.2.4 Etching Technology 103 4.2.5 Dielectric Isolation Technology 104 4.2.6 Contact Technology 104 4.2.7 Passivation Deposition 104 4.3 Testing of the STT-MTJ Device 105 4.4 The Development Status of STT-MRAM 105 References 107 5 Spin-Orbit Torque (SOT) Materials and Devices 113Yucai Li, Kevin William Edmonds, and Kaiyou Wang 5.1 Spin-Orbit Coupling in Materials 113 5.2 Manipulation of Magnetic Materials by SOT 116 5.2.1 The Mechanism of SOT in Ferromagnets 116 5.2.2 Measurement Techniques of SOT 117 5.2.3 Field-Free SOT Magnetization Switching in Ferromagnets 119 5.2.4 Domain Wall and Skyrmion Motion Driven by SOT 121 5.2.5 Manipulation of Antiferromagnets by SOT 122 5.3 SOT Materials 123 5.3.1 Traditional Materials 123 5.3.2 Interfacial Engineering 124 5.3.3 Oxide Heterostructures 125 5.3.4 The van der Waals Materials and Topological Materials 125 5.4 Devices and Application 128 5.4.1 SOT-MTJ and SOT-MRAM 128 5.4.2 In-memory Computing 129 5.4.3 SOT Artificial Intelligence Device 130 5.4.4 Internet of Things 131 5.5 Conclusion 131 References 132 6 Spin Oscillators 139Huayao Tu and Zhongming Zeng 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 Fundamental Physics 140 6.2.1 Spin Transfer Torque and Magnetization Dynamics 140 6.2.2 Spin Hall Effect (SHE) and Spin-Orbit Torque (SOT) 141 6.2.3 Operation Principle of SO 142 6.3 Device Classification 143 6.3.1 Geometries 143 6.3.2 Magnetic Equilibrium States 145 6.3.3 Material Structures 145 6.3.3.1 Spin Valves 145 6.3.3.2 Magnetic Tunnel Junctions 146 6.3.3.3 Bilayer 146 6.3.3.4 Single Layer 147 6.4 Emerging Spin-torque Oscillators Based on Magnetic Solitons 148 6.4.1 Vortex 148 6.4.2 Skyrmion 149 6.5 Functional Properties 150 6.5.1 Frequency 150 6.5.1.1 Modulation Properties 152 6.5.2 Output Power 152 6.5.3 Linewidth 155 6.5.4 Phase-locking and Synchronization 157 6.6 Applications 159 6.6.1 Microwave Source 159 6.6.2 Spin Wave Emitter 160 6.6.3 Microwave Detector and Energy Harvester 160 6.6.4 Magnetic Field Detector 163 6.6.5 Neuromorphic Computing 164 6.7 Summary and Outlook 166 References 167 7 Magnetic Tunnel Junctions for Artificial Neural Network 179Meiyin Yang, Tengzhi Yang, and Jun Luo 7.1 Introduction of Neural Computing 179 7.2 Hardware Requirements for an Artificial Intelligence Neural Network 182 7.3 Introduction to Magnetic Tunnel Junction Devices 183 7.4 Magnetic Tunnel Junction for Neuron Hardware 185 7.4.1 Introduction of STT-MTJ and SOT-MTJ 185 7.4.2 Different MTJ-Based Neuron Hardware 186 7.4.2.1 Step Function 187 7.4.2.2 Nonlinear Activation Function 188 7.4.2.3 Spike or Probability Based Neuron 189 7.5 Magnetic Tunnel Junctions for Synaptic Devices 192 7.6 Learning Methods Suitable for MTJs 194 7.7 Summary and Outlook 195 References 195 8 Three-Dimensional Magnetic Structures of B20 Chiral Magnets 203Kejing Ran, Dongsheng Song, Weiwei Wang, Haifeng Du, and Shilei Zhang 8.1 Theoretical Development 203 8.2 Observation Technique 206 8.2.1 Electron Holography 206 8.2.1.1 Historical Survey 206 8.2.1.2 Experimental Setup 207 8.2.2 Resonant Elastic X-ray Scattering 209 8.2.2.1 Historical Survey 209 8.2.2.2 Theoretical Treatment 210 8.2.2.3 Experimental Setup 212 8.3 Experimental Results 214 8.3.1 Magnetic Bobbers 214 8.3.2 Surface Twists 216 References 217 9 Multiferroelectric Materials 221Xiaobin Guo and Li Xi 9.1 Electric Field-driven Magnetization Switching 222 9.2 Electric Field-driven Exchange Bias Reversal and Antiferromagnetic Domain Wall Motion 229 9.3 Electric Field-driven Antiferromagnetic Vector Switching 237 Acknowledgements 239 References 240 10 Robust Manipulation of Magnetic Properties in (Ga,Mn)As 243Hailong Wang and Jianhua Zhao 10.1 Background and Introduction 243 10.2 Electric Field Effects on the Magnetic Properties of (Ga,Mn)As 245 10.3 Manipulation of the Magnetism in (Ga,Mn)As by Light and Strain 256 10.4 Giant Modulation of Magnetism via Organic Molecules 257 10.5 Conclusion and Outlook 260 Acknowledgements 262 References 262 11 Antiferromagnetic Materials and Their Manipulations 271Xionghua Liu and Kaiyou Wang 11.1 Introduction 271 11.2 Antiferromagnetic Materials 272 11.2.1 Metallic Antiferromagnets 272 11.2.2 Insulating Antiferromagnets 273 11.2.3 Semiconducting and Semimetallic Antiferromagnets 274 11.3 Manipulations of Antiferromagnetic States 275 11.3.1 Magnetic Control of Antiferromagnets 275 11.3.2 Strain Control of Antiferromagnets 277 11.3.3 Optical Control of Antiferromagnets 279 11.3.4 Electrical Control of Antiferromagnets 281 11.4 Topological Antiferromagnetic Spintronics 283 11.5 Summaries and Prospects 286 References 286 12 Prospects 295Meiyin Yang and Kaiyou Wang Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisThermal Energy Storage Systems and Applications Provides students and engineers with up-to-date information on methods, models, and approaches in thermal energy storage systems and their applications in thermal management and elsewhere Thermal energy storage (TES) systems have become a vital technology for renewable energy systems and are increasingly being used in commercial and industrial applications including space and water heating, cooling, and air conditioning. TES technology has the potential to be a sustainable, cost-effective, and eco-friendly approach for facilitating more effective use of thermal equipment and correcting the imbalance that can occur between the supply and demand of energy. The Third Edition of Thermal Energy Storage: Systems and Applications contains detailed coverage of new methodologies, models, experimental works, and methods in the rapidly growing field. Extensively revised and updated throughout, this comprehensive volume Table of ContentsPreface Acknowledgement 1 Basic Introductory Thermal Aspects 2 Energy Storage Systems 3 Thermal Energy Storage Methods 4 Energy and Exergy Analyses 5 Numerical Modeling and Simulation 6 Thermal Management with Phase Change Materials 7 Renewable Energy Systems with Thermal Energy Storage 8 Case Studies Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisConformational Analysis of Polymers Comprehensive resource focusing on theoretical methods and experimental techniques to analyze physical polymer chemistry Connecting varied issues to demonstrate the impact on areas like biodegradability, environmental friendliness, structure-property relationship, and molecular design, Conformational Analysis of Polymers introduces theoretical methods and experimental techniques to analyze physical polymer chemistry. Opening with a description of fundamental concepts and then describing the conformational characteristics of various polymers, including different heteroatoms and chemical species, the text continues onto the applications of density functional theory (DFT) to polymer crystals and structure-property relationships. The book concludes by bringing these issues together to demonstrate their practical impact on different areas of the field. Various methods and techniques, including DFT, statiTable of ContentsPreface xii Acknowledgments xvi About the Author xvii Acronyms xviii Part I Fundamentals of Polymer Physical Chemistry 1 1 Stereochemistry of Polymers 3 1.1 Configuration 3 1.2 Connection Type of Monomeric Units 5 1.3 Nitrogen Inversion 5 1.4 Conformation 8 1.5 Secondary Structure 9 1.6 Double Helix 11 2 Models for Polymeric Chains 13 2.1 Spatial Configuration of Polymeric Chain 13 2.2 Freely Jointed Chain 13 2.3 Freely Rotating Chain 15 2.4 Simple Chain with Rotational Barrier 16 2.5 Gaussian Chain 17 3 Lattice Model 21 3.1 Lattice Model of Small Molecules 21 3.2 Flory–Huggins Theory 22 3.2.1 Entropy of Polymeric Chain 22 3.2.2 Enthalpy of Mixing 25 3.2.3 Chemical Potential 26 3.2.4 Excluded-Volume Effect I 28 3.2.5 Excluded-volume Effect II 32 3.2.6 Phase Equilibrium 35 3.3 Intrinsic Viscosity 36 3.3.1 Stockmayer–Fixman Plot 37 Exercise 38 4 Rubber Elasticity 41 4.1 Thermodynamics of Rubber Elasticity 41 4.2 Adiabatic Stretching: Gough–Joule Effect 45 4.3 Phenomenological Theory: Affine Model 46 4.4 Temperature Dependence of Chain Dimension in Rubber 48 Part II Quantum Chemistry 51 5 Ab Initio Molecular Orbital Theory 55 5.1 Schrödinger Equation 55 5.2 Wave Function 56 5.3 Basis Set 57 5.4 Hartree–Fock Method 58 5.5 Roothaan–Hall Equation 59 5.6 Electron Correlation 60 6 Density Functional Theory 63 6.1 Exchange and Correlation Functionals 65 6.2 Dispersion-force Correction 67 7 Solvent Effect 69 8 Statistical Thermodynamics for Quantum Chemistry 75 8.1 Translational Motion 76 8.2 Rotational Motion 77 8.3 Vibrational Motion 78 8.4 Electronic Excitation 80 8.5 Thermochemistry 81 9 NMR Parameters 85 9.1 Chemical Shift 86 9.1.1 Example: Determination of Reaction Process from NMR Chemical Shifts 88 9.2 Indirect Spin–Spin Coupling Constant 92 9.2.1 Example 1: Calculation of Vicinal Coupling Constants of Cyclic Compound 93 9.2.2 Example 2: Derivation of Karplus Equation and Its Application 95 10 Periodic Quantum Chemistry 99 10.1 Direct Lattice and Reciprocal Lattice 99 10.2 Bloch Function 100 10.3 One-electron Crystal Orbital 101 10.4 Structural Optimization 102 10.5 Crystal Elasticity 104 10.6 Vibrational Calculation 108 10.7 Thermal Chemistry 110 10.8 Cohesive (Interchain Interaction) Energy 112 Part III Statistical Mechanics of Chain Molecules: Rotational Isomeric State Scheme 115 11 Conventional RIS Scheme 117 11.1 Chain Dimension 121 12 Refined RIS Scheme 125 12.1 RIS Scheme Including Middle-range Intramolecular Interactions 129 13 Inversional–Rotational Isomeric State (IRIS) Scheme 137 13.1 Pseudoasymmetry for Polyamines 137 13.2 Inversional–Rotational Isomerization 137 13.3 Statistical Weight Matrices of Meso and Racemo di-MEDA 138 13.4 Statistical Weight Matrices of PEI 139 13.5 Diad Probability and Bond Conformation 142 13.6 Characteristic Ratio 144 13.7 Orientational Correlation Between Bonds 145 13.8 Solubility of Polyamines 148 14 RIS Scheme Combined with Stochastic Process 151 14.1 Polymeric Chains with Internally Rotatable Side Chains 153 Part IV Experimental Methods 161 15 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) 163 15.1 Conformational Analysis of Isotactic Poly(propylene oxide) 163 15.1.1 1 H NMR Vicinal Coupling Constant 164 15.1.2 Ab initio MO Calculation 168 15.1.3 RIS Analysis of Bond Conformations 171 15.1.4 Configuration-dependent Properties 172 15.2 Carbon-13 NMR Chemical Shifts of Dimeric Propylene Oxides 173 15.2.1 Theoretical Basis 175 15.2.2 13 C NMR Spectra and Assignment 176 15.2.3 Calculation of Chemical Shift by RIS Scheme 179 15.3 Model Compound of Poly(ethylene terephthalate) 181 16 Scattering Methods 187 16.1 Static Light Scattering (SLS) 187 16.1.1 Instrumentation and Sample Preparation for SLS 189 16.1.2 Application of SLS: Chain Dimensions of Polysilanes in the Θ State 191 16.2 Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS) 195 16.2.1 Application of DLS: Size Distribution of Polystyrene Latex Particles 197 16.2.2 Application of SLS and DLS to Poly(N-methylethylene imine) Solutions 198 16.3 Small-angle Neutron Scattering (SANS) 201 16.3.1 Application of SANS to Amorphous PET 204 Part V Applications: Conformational Analysis and Elucidation of Structure–property Relationships of Polymers 207 17 Polyethers 215 17.1 Poly(methylene oxide) (PMO) 215 17.2 Poly(ethylene oxide) (PEO) 217 17.3 Poly(propylene oxide) (PPO) 226 17.4 Poly(trimethylene oxide) (PTrMO) 228 17.5 Poly(tetramethylene oxide) (PTetMO) 229 18 Polyamines 235 18.1 Poly(ethylene imine) (PEI) 236 18.2 Poly(N-methylethylene imine) (PMEI) 237 18.3 Poly(trimethylene imine) (PTMI) and Poly(N-methyltrimethylene imine) (pmtmi) 238 19 Polyphosphines 241 19.1 Possibility of Phosphorus Inversion 241 19.2 Intramolecular Interactions Related to Phosphorus 243 19.3 RIS Calculation 244 19.4 Functions and Stability 248 20 Polysulfides 249 20.1 Poly(methylene sulfide) (PMS) 249 20.1.1 Crystal Structure of PMS 253 20.2 Poly(ethylene sulfide) (PES) 253 20.3 Poly(propylene sulfide) (PPS) 260 20.4 Poly(trimethylene sulfide) (PTrMS) 265 21 Polyselenides 269 21.1 Poly(methylene selenide) (PMSe) 269 21.1.1 Crystal Structure of PMSe 270 21.2 Poly(ethylene selenide) (PESe) 274 21.3 Poly(trimethylene selenide) (PTrMSe) 276 21.4 Summary 277 22 Alternating Copolymers Including Ethylene-imine, Ethylene-oxide, and Ethylene-sulfide Units 279 22.1 Synthesis of P(EI-ES) 286 23 Aromatic Polyester (PET, PTT, and PBT) 289 23.1 Correction for MP2 Energy of π–π Interaction 290 23.2 Dipole Moment and Molar Kerr Constant 293 23.3 Configurational Properties 296 23.4 Crystal Structure 297 24 Aliphatic Polyesters 301 24.1 Poly(glycolic acid) (PGA) and Poly(2-hydroxybutyrate) (P2HB) 301 24.1.1 MO Calculation and NMR Experiment 302 24.1.2 RIS Calculation 305 24.1.3 Periodic DFT Calculation on PGA Crystal 309 24.2 Poly(lactic acid) (Poly(lactide), PLA) 312 24.2.1 MO Calculation and NMR Experiment 313 24.2.2 RIS Calculation 317 24.3 Poly((R)-3-hydroxybutyrate) (P3HB) 321 24.3.1 NMR Experiment 321 24.3.2 MO Calculation 323 24.3.3 RIS Calculation and Comparison with Experiment 325 24.3.4 Crystal Structure 326 24.4 Poly(ε-caprolactone) (PCL) 327 24.4.1 MO Calculation 328 24.4.2 NMR Experiment 330 24.4.3 RIS Calculation 330 24.4.4 Crystal Structure 332 24.4.5 Crystal Elasticity 333 24.5 Poly(ethylene succinate) (PES) and Poly(butylene succinate) (PBS) 336 24.5.1 NMR Experiment 337 24.5.2 MO Calculation 338 24.5.3 RIS Calculation 339 24.5.4 Crystal Structure 340 24.6 Biodegradability of Polyesters 342 25 Polycarbonates 347 25.1 Poly(ethylene carbonate) (PEC) and Poly(propylene carbonate) (ppc) 348 25.1.1 NMR Experiment 351 25.1.2 MO Calculation 351 25.1.3 RIS Calculation 353 25.2 Poly(cyclohexene carbonate) (PCHC) 357 25.2.1 MO Calculation 358 25.2.2 NMR Experiment 360 25.2.3 RIS Calculation 361 25.2.4 Coherence Number 364 26 Nylon 4 367 26.1 MO Calculation 368 26.2 NMR Experiment 370 27 Aromatic Polyester, Polythionoester, Polythioester, Polydithioester, Polyamide, and Polythioamide 373 27.1 MO Calculation 375 27.2 Bond Conformation 377 27.3 RIS Calculation, Thermal Properties, and Solubility 380 28 Polysilanes 383 28.1 Molecular Dynamics 384 28.1.1 General Procedures 384 28.1.2 PDBS and PDHS 384 28.1.3 PMPrS 387 28.2 RIS Calculation 387 28.3 Physical Properties 388 29 Polyethylene (PE) 391 A FORTRAN Computer Program for Refined RIS Calculations on Polyethylene 399 B Answers of Problems 423 Bibliography 431 Index 465

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplore a comprehensive and illuminating introductory text to the science of solid materials from a leading voice in the field The newly revised Third Edition of Understanding Solids: The Science of Materials delivers a complete yet concise treatment of the basic properties and chemical and physical behaviors of solid materials. Following a completely revised opening set of chapters in which the basic properties of solidsincluding atomic structure, chemical bonding, crystallography, and phase relationshipsare discussed, the book goes on to describe new developments in the areas of batteries and fuel cells, perovskite solar cells, lighting and displays, nanoparticles, whiskers, and sheets. The distinguished author has also added sections about organic framework structures, superionic conductors, mechanochemistry, bi-layer graphene, hologram formation and recording, and the optics of nanoparticle arrays and thermochromic materials. Each chapter includes a Further Reading section to help students accumulate additional knowledge on the topic within and new problems have been added throughout the book. Readers will also enjoy the inclusion of: A thorough introduction to the states of aggregation, including atoms and bonding, microstructures and phase relationships, and crystal structures and defectsA comprehensive overview of different categories of solids, including metals, crystalline silicates, inorganic ceramics, and silicate glassesAn exploration of reactions and transformations, including diffusion and ionic conductivity, phase transformations, and phase reactionsA treatment of oxidation and reduction, including galvanic cells and chemical analysis Perfect for undergraduate students in sciences, engineering, and technology, Understanding Solids: The Science of Materials will also earn a place in the libraries of anyone seeking a thoroughly up to date, one-stop reference to the science of solid materials.Table of ContentsPreface xix Part I States of Aggregation 1 1 Atoms and Bonding 3 1.1 The Electron Structure of Atoms 3 1.1.1 Hydrogen 3 1.1.2 Many Electron Atoms 4 1.1.3 Orbital Shapes 6 1.1.4 Electron Spin and Electron Configuration 8 1.1.5 Atomic Energy Levels 9 1.2 Ionic Bonding 12 1.2.1 Ionic Size and Bonding 12 1.2.2 Lattice Energies 13 1.2.3 Atomistic Simulation 14 1.3 Covalent Bonding 15 1.3.1 Bond Geometry 15 1.3.2 Bond Energies 18 1.4 Metallic Bonding 21 1.4.1 Molecular Orbitals and Energy Bands 21 1.4.2 The Free Electron Gas 22 1.4.3 Energy Bands 24 1.4.4 Bands in Ionic and Covalent Solids 27 1.5 Weak Chemical Bonds 28 1.6 Computation of Material Properties 31 Further Reading 31 The Following References Expand the Material in this Chapter 31 A Dictionary of Quantum Mechanical Language and Expressions is 32 Ionic Radii are Discussed and Tabulated by 32 The Computation of Properties is Described in 32 Problems and Exercises 32 Calculations and Questions 34 2 Microstructures and Phase Relationships 37 2.1 Macrostructure, Microstructure, and Nanostructure 37 2.1.1 Crystalline Solids 37 2.1.2 Non-crystalline Solids 37 2.1.3 Partly Crystalline Solids 40 2.1.4 Nanoparticles and Nanostructures 40 2.2 The Development of Microstructures 43 2.2.1 Solidification 43 2.2.2 Processing 44 2.3 Phase Diagrams 45 2.3.1 One-Component (Unary) Systems 45 2.3.2 Two-Component (Binary) Systems 48 2.3.2.1 Simple Binary Diagrams: Nickel–Copper as an Example 48 2.3.2.2 Binary Systems Containing a Eutectic Point: Tin–Lead as an Example 49 2.3.2.3 Intermediate Phases 52 2.3.2.4 The Iron–Carbon System Close to Iron 52 2.4 Ternary Systems 54 References 57 Further Reading 58 Problems and Exercises 58 Calculations and Questions 60 3 Crystal Structures and Defects 65 3.1 Crystal Geometry 65 3.1.1 Crystal Systems 65 3.1.2 Crystal Lattices 66 3.1.3 Symmetry and Crystal Classes 68 3.2 Crystal Structures 69 3.2.1 Unit Cells and Atomic Coordinates 69 3.2.2 Crystal Structures 70 3.2.2.1 The Face-Centred Cubic (fcc, A1) Structure 70 3.2.2.2 The Body-Centred Cubic (bcc, A2) Structure 70 3.2.2.3 The Hexagonal Close-Packed (hcp, A3) Structure 70 3.2.2.4 The Diamond Structure 71 3.2.2.5 The Graphite Structure 71 3.2.2.6 The Halite (Rock Salt, Sodium Chloride) Structure 71 3.2.2.7 The Perovskite Structure 72 3.2.2.8 The Spinel Structure 72 3.2.2.9 Lattice Parameters and Vegard’s Law 74 3.3 Crystal Planes and Directions 74 3.3.1 Miller Indices 74 3.3.2 Hexagonal Crystals and Miller–Bravais Indices 76 3.3.3 Directions 78 3.3.4 Interplanar Spacings 79 3.4 Crystal Density 80 3.4.1 Density Estimation 80 3.4.2 The Density of NaCl 81 3.4.3 The Density of Crystals with a Variable Composition 81 3.5 Structural Relationships 82 3.5.1 Sphere Packing 82 3.5.2 Ionic Structures in Terms of Anion Packing 84 3.5.3 Polyhedral Representations 86 3.6 Point Defects 87 3.6.1 Point Defects in Crystals of the Elements 88 3.6.2 Solid Solutions 89 3.6.3 The Schottky and Frenkel Defects 90 3.6.4 Non-stoichiometric Compounds 91 3.6.5 Point Defect Notation 93 3.7 Linear, Planar, and Volume defects 95 3.7.1 Dislocations 95 3.7.2 Planar Defects 96 3.7.3 Volume Defects: Precipitates 99 Reference 99 Further Reading 100 Crystal Structures 100 Defects 100 Problems and Exercises 100 Calculations and Questions 102 4 Solids: Overview 109 4.1 Metals 109 4.1.1 Structures 109 4.1.2 Metallic Radii 110 4.1.3 Alloy Solid Solutions 112 4.1.4 Metallic Glasses and Quasicrystals 115 4.1.5 The Principal Properties of Metals 116 4.2 Crystalline Silicates and Inorganic Ceramic Materials 118 4.2.1 Silicate Structures 119 4.2.2 Some Non-silicate Ceramics 122 4.2.3 The Preparation and Processing of Ceramics 125 4.2.4 The Principal Properties of Ceramics 126 4.3 Silicate Glasses 126 4.3.1 Bonding and Structure of Silicate Glasses 127 4.3.2 Glass Deformation 129 4.3.3 Strengthened Glass 131 4.3.4 Glass-Ceramics 132 4.4 Polymers and Organic Materials 133 4.4.1 Polymers 133 4.4.2 Polymer Formation 134 4.4.3 Microstructures of Polymers 138 4.4.4 Elastomers 143 4.4.5 Production of Polymers 145 4.4.6 Organic Framework Structures: MOFs and COFs 148 4.4.7 The Principal Properties of Polymers 151 4.5 Composite Materials 152 4.5.1 Fibre-Reinforced Materials 152 4.5.2 Cement and Concrete 154 Reference 157 Further Reading 157 Metals 157 Bulk Metallic Glasses 157 Ceramics and Glass 157 Zeolites 157 Polymers 157 Metal-organic Frameworks 158 Covalent Organic Frameworks 158 Composites 158 Problems and Exercises 158 Calculations and Questions 160 Part II Reactions and Transformations 165 5 Diffusion and Ionic Conductivity 167 5.1 Self-Diffusion and Tracer Diffusion 167 5.2 Non-steady-state and Steady-State Diffusion 169 5.3 Temperature Variation of Diffusion Coefficient 171 5.4 The Effect of Impurities 171 5.5 RandomWalk Diffusion 171 5.6 Diffusion in Solids 175 5.7 Self-Diffusion in One Dimension 176 5.8 Self-Diffusion in Crystals 178 5.9 The Arrhenius Equation and Point Defects 178 5.10 Correlation Factors for Self-Diffusion 180 5.11 Ionic Conductivity 181 5.12 The Relationship Between Ionic Conductivity and Diffusion Coefficient 183 5.13 Superionic Conductors 184 5.13.1 Disordered Cation Compounds 184 5.13.2 β-Alumina Oxides 185 5.13.3 Stabilised Zirconia Oxides 188 5.13.4 NASICON-Related Crystals 188 References 189 Further Reading 189 Superionic Conductors: See Also References Therein 190 Problems and Exercises 190 Calculations and Questions 191 6 Phase Transformations and Reactions 195 6.1 Sintering 195 6.1.1 Sintering and Reaction 195 6.1.2 The Driving Force for Sintering 197 6.1.3 The Kinetics of Neck Growth and Grain Growth 198 6.1.4 Rapid Sintering 198 6.2 Phase Transitions 199 6.2.1 First-Order Phase Transitions 200 6.2.2 Second-Order Transitions 201 6.3 Displacive and Reconstructive Transitions 201 6.3.1 Displacive Transitions 201 6.3.2 Reconstructive Transitions 203 6.4 Order–Disorder Transitions 204 6.4.1 Positional Ordering 205 6.4.2 Orientational Ordering 205 6.5 Martensitic Transformations 206 6.5.1 The Austenite–Martensite Transition 207 6.5.2 Martensitic Transformations in Zirconia 210 6.5.3 Martensitic Transitions in Ni–Ti Alloys 211 6.5.4 Shape-Memory Alloys 212 6.6 Phase Diagrams and Microstructures 214 6.6.1 Equilibrium Solidification of Simple Binary Alloys 214 6.6.2 Non-equilibrium Solidification and Coring 214 6.6.3 Solidification in Systems Containing a Eutectic Point 216 6.6.4 Equilibrium Heat Treatment of Steel in the Fe–C Phase Diagram 218 6.7 High Temperature Oxidation of Metals 220 6.7.1 Direct Corrosion 220 6.7.2 The Rate of Oxidation 222 6.7.3 Oxide Film Microstructure 222 6.7.4 Film Growth via Diffusion 223 6.7.5 Alloys 225 6.8 Solid-State Reactions 225 6.8.1 Spinel Formation 225 6.8.2 Photoresists 227 6.8.3 Mechanochemistry 229 Further Reading 230 Sintering and 3D Printing 230 High Temperature Oxidation and Solid-State Reactions 230 For Mechanochemistry See 231 Problems and Exercises 231 Calculations and Questions 233 7 Oxidation and Reduction 239 7.1 Galvanic Cells 239 7.1.1 Cell Basics 239 7.1.2 Standard Electrode Potentials 241 7.1.3 Cell Potential, Gibbs Energy, and Concentration Dependence 243 7.2 Chemical Analysis Using Galvanic Cells 243 7.2.1 pH Meters 243 7.2.2 Ion Selective Electrodes 245 7.2.3 Oxygen Sensors 246 7.3 Batteries 247 7.3.1 Primary Batteries 248 7.3.1.1 ‘Dry’ and Alkaline Primary Batteries 248 7.3.1.2 Lithium-Ion Primary Batteries 249 7.3.1.3 Lithium–Air Batteries 249 7.3.2 Fuel Cells 250 7.3.3 Secondary Batteries 252 7.3.3.1 The Lead-Acid Battery 252 7.3.3.2 Lithium-Ion Batteries 253 7.3.3.3 Dual-Ion Batteries 254 7.4 Corrosion 255 7.4.1 The Reaction of Metals withWater and Aqueous Acids 256 7.4.2 Dissimilar Metal Corrosion 257 7.4.3 Single Metal Electrochemical Corrosion 259 7.5 Electrolysis 260 7.5.1 Electrolytic Cells 260 7.5.2 Electroplating 261 7.5.3 The Amount of Product Produced During Electrolysis 262 7.5.4 The Electrolytic Preparation of Titanium by the FFC Cambridge Process 263 7.6 Pourbaix Diagrams 264 7.6.1 Passivation, Corrosion, and Leaching 264 7.6.2 The Stability Field ofWater 265 7.6.3 Pourbaix Diagrams for a Metal Showing Two Valence States 265 7.6.4 Pourbaix Diagram Displaying Tendency for Corrosion 268 Reference 268 Further Reading 269 For a General Introduction to Electrochemistry See 269 Structure-property Relations and Defects in Electrode and Electrolyte Solids is Described in 269 Batteries 269 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 269 Corrosion 270 Electroplating 270 Problems and Exercises 270 Calculations and Questions 271 Part III Physical Properties 275 8 Mechanical Properties of Solids 277 8.1 Strength and Hardness 277 8.1.1 Strength 277 8.1.2 Stress and Strain 278 8.1.3 Toughness and Stiffness 280 8.1.4 Superelasticity 282 8.1.5 Hardness 283 8.2 Elastic Moduli 285 8.2.1 Young’s Modulus (The Modulus of Elasticity) (E or Y) 286 8.2.2 Poisson’s Ratio (𝜈) 288 8.2.3 The Longitudinal or Axial Modulus (L or M) 289 8.2.4 The Shear Modulus (G or 𝜇), Bulk Modulus (K or B), and Lamé Modulus (𝜆) 289 8.2.5 Relationships Between the Elastic Moduli 290 8.2.6 UltrasonicWaves in Elastic Solids 290 8.3 Deformation and Fracture 291 8.3.1 Brittle Fracture 291 8.3.2 Plastic Deformation of Metals 294 8.3.3 Brittle and Ductile Materials 297 8.3.4 Plastic Deformation of Polymers 299 8.3.5 Fracture Following Plastic Deformation 299 8.3.6 Strengthening 301 8.3.7 Computation of Deformation and Fracture 303 8.4 Time-Dependent Properties 304 8.4.1 Fatigue 304 8.4.2 Creep 305 8.5 Nanoscale Properties 309 8.5.1 Solid Lubricants 309 8.5.2 Auxetic Materials 310 8.5.3 Thin Films and Nanowires 312 8.6 Composite Materials 315 8.6.1 Elastic Modulus of Fibre Reinforced Composites 315 8.6.2 Elastic Modulus of a Two-Phase System 316 Further Reading 318 Ductility and Fracture 318 Mechanical Properties of Biological Materials 318 Hall–Petch Effect 318 Computation of Properties 318 Finite Element Methods 319 Nanoscale Methods 319 Composites 319 Problems and Exercises 319 Calculations and Questions 321 9 Insulating Solids 327 9.1 Dielectrics 327 9.1.1 Relative Permittivity and Polarisation 327 9.1.2 Polarisability 330 9.1.3 The Relative Permittivity of Crystals 332 9.2 Piezoelectrics, Pyroelectrics, and Ferroelectrics 334 9.2.1 The Piezoelectric and Pyroelectric Effects 334 9.2.2 Crystal Symmetry and the Piezoelectric and Pyroelectric Effects 335 9.2.3 Piezoelectric Mechanisms 337 9.2.4 Quartz Oscillators 338 9.2.5 Piezoelectric Polymers and Biomolecular Materials 339 9.3 Ferroelectrics 342 9.3.1 Ferroelectric and Antiferroelectric Crystals 343 9.3.2 Hysteresis and Domain Growth in Ferroelectric Crystals 345 9.3.3 The Temperature Dependence of Ferroelectricity and Antiferroelectricity 347 9.3.4 Ferroelectricity Due to Hydrogen Bonds 347 9.3.5 Ferroelectricity Due to Polar Groups 349 9.3.6 Ferroelectricity Due to Medium-Sized Transition-Metal Cations 350 9.3.7 Modification of Properties 352 9.3.8 Relaxor Ferroelectrics 354 9.3.9 Ferroelectric Nanoparticles, Thin Films, and Superlattices 354 9.3.10 Flexoelectricity in Ferroelectrics 356 Reference 358 Flexoelectric Effect 358 Further Reading 358 General 358 Introductory Crystallography with Respect to the Dielectric Properties 358 The Dielectric, Piezoelectric and Ferroelectric Properties of Perovskite Structures are Detailed in 358 Biomolecular Materials are Described in 358 Nanoparticle, Thin Films and Superlattices 358 Problems and Exercises 359 Calculations and Questions 360 10 Magnetic Solids 365 10.1 Magnetic Materials 365 10.1.1 Characterisation of Magnetic Materials 365 10.1.2 Magnetic Dipoles and Magnetic Flux 366 10.1.3 Atomic Magnetism 368 10.1.4 Overview of Magnetic Materials 369 10.2 Paramagnetic Materials 372 10.2.1 The Magnetic Moment of Paramagnetic Atoms and Ions 372 10.2.2 High and Low Spin: Crystal Field Effects 373 10.2.3 Temperature Dependence of Paramagnetic Susceptibility 376 10.2.4 Pauli Paramagnetism 378 10.3 Ferromagnetic Materials 379 10.3.1 Ferromagnetism 379 10.3.2 Exchange Energy 380 10.3.3 Domains 382 10.3.4 Hysteresis 384 10.3.5 Hard and Soft Magnetic Materials 385 10.4 Antiferromagnetic Materials and Superexchange 386 10.5 Ferrimagnetic Materials 387 10.5.1 Cubic Spinel Ferrites 387 10.5.2 Garnet Structure Ferrites 388 10.5.3 Hexagonal Ferrites 389 10.5.4 Double Exchange 390 10.6 Nanostructures 391 10.6.1 Small Particles and Data Recording 391 10.6.2 Superparamagnetism and Thin Films 391 10.6.3 Perovskite Superlattices 392 10.6.4 Photoinduced Magnetism 393 10.7 Magnetic Defects 395 10.7.1 Magnetic Defects in Semiconductors 395 10.7.2 Charge and Spin States in Cobaltites and Manganites 396 Further Reading 399 General 399 Magnetic States 399 A Starting Point for the Detection of Magnetic Fields by Animals 400 Density Functional Theory Calculations of Magnetic Properties is Outlined by 400 Magnetic Superlattices 400 A Starting Point for Studies on Photomagnetism 400 Problems and Exercises 400 Calculations and Questions 402 11 Electronic Conductivity in Solids 405 11.1 Metals 405 11.1.1 Metals, Semiconductors, and Insulators 405 11.1.2 Electronic Conductivity 407 11.1.3 Resistivity 410 11.2 Semiconductors 411 11.2.1 Intrinsic Semiconductors 411 11.2.2 Band Gap Measurement 412 11.2.3 Extrinsic Semiconductors 413 11.2.4 Carrier Concentrations in Extrinsic Semiconductors 415 11.2.5 Characterisation 416 11.2.6 The p–n Junction Diode 419 11.3 Metal–Insulator Transitions 422 11.3.1 Metals and Insulators 422 11.3.2 Electron–Electron Repulsion 423 11.3.3 Modification of Insulators 425 11.3.4 Transparent Conducting Oxides 426 11.4 Conducting Polymers 427 11.5 Superconductivity 431 11.5.1 Superconductors 431 11.5.2 The Effect of Magnetic Fields and Current 432 11.5.3 The BCS Theory of Superconductivity 434 11.5.4 Josephson Junctions 435 11.5.5 Cuprate High Temperature Superconductors 437 11.5.5.1 Lanthanum Cuprate, La2CuO4 437 11.5.5.2 Neodymium Cuprate, Nd2CuO4 438 11.5.5.3 Yttrium Barium Copper Oxide, YBa2Cu3O7 439 11.5.5.4 Perovskite-Related Structures and Series 440 11.5.6 Bi-layer Graphene 444 11.6 Nanostructures and Quantum Confinement of Electrons 445 Further Reading 447 The Band Theory Definition of a Semiconductor is Due to A.H. Wilson 447 Conductivity of (Mainly) Inorganic Solids Due to Defects is Covered In 447 The Metal-Insulator Transition in VO2 447 Polymers 447 Superconductivity 447 The Following Articles in Scientific American Give a Good Overview of the Early Years of High Temperature Superconductivity 448 Graphene Bilayers 448 Quantum Hall Effect 448 Problems and Exercises 448 Calculations and Questions 450 12 Optical Aspects of Solids 455 12.1 Light 455 12.1.1 LightWaves 455 12.1.2 Photons 457 12.1.3 Colour and Appearance 459 12.2 Sources of Light 460 12.2.1 Incandescence 460 12.2.2 Luminescence 461 12.2.3 Fluorescent Lamps 463 12.2.4 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 464 12.2.5 Organic Light Emitting Devices/Diodes (OLEDs) 467 12.2.6 Solid-State Lasers 469 12.2.6.1 The Ruby Laser: Three-Level Lasers 471 12.2.6.2 The Neodymium (Nd3+) Solid State Laser: Four-Level Lasers 473 12.2.6.3 Semiconductor Lasers 474 12.3 Refraction 474 12.3.1 The Refractive Index 474 12.3.2 Refractive Index and Structure 477 12.4 Reflection 477 12.4.1 Reflection from a Surface 477 12.4.2 Reflection from a Transparent Thin Film 478 12.4.3 Low-Reflectivity (Antireflection) and High-Reflectivity Coatings 482 12.4.4 Multiple Thin Films and Dielectric Mirrors 483 12.5 Scattering and Attenuation 483 12.5.1 Scattering 483 12.5.2 Attenuation 485 12.6 Diffraction 486 12.6.1 Diffraction by an Aperture 486 12.6.2 Diffraction Gratings 487 12.6.3 Diffraction from Crystal-like Structures 488 12.6.4 Holograms 490 12.6.4.1 Hologram Formation 490 12.6.4.2 Hologram Recording Media 492 12.7 Fibre Optics 493 12.7.1 Attenuation in Glass Fibres 493 12.7.2 Dispersion and Optical Fibre Design 494 12.7.3 Optical Amplification 496 12.8 Energy Conversion 496 12.8.1 Photoconductivity and Photovoltaic Solar Cells 496 12.8.2 Dye-Sensitised Solar Cells 497 12.8.3 Perovskite Solar Cells 499 12.9 Nanostructures 501 12.9.1 The Optical Properties of QuantumWells 502 12.9.2 The Optical Properties of Nanoparticles 502 12.9.3 Nanoparticle Arrays 504 Further Reading 506 General 506 Much of the Material in this Chapter is Covered in Greater Detail in 506 The Properties of Light with Respect to Colour are Found in 506 The Engineering Aspects of Optical Fibres are Described by 506 Perovskite Solar Cells are Described in 506 For Nanostructures and Surfaces See the Following Review Articles and References Therein 506 Problems and Exercises 507 Calculations and Questions 509 13 Thermal Properties of Solids 515 13.1 Heat Capacity 515 13.1.1 The Heat Capacity of a Solid 515 13.1.2 Theories of Heat Capacity 515 13.1.3 Heat Capacity at Phase Transitions 517 13.2 Thermal Conductivity 518 13.2.1 Heat Transfer 518 13.2.2 Thermal Conductivity and Microstructure 520 13.3 Expansion and Contraction 522 13.3.1 Thermal Expansion 522 13.3.2 Thermal Expansion and Interatomic Potentials 523 13.3.3 Thermal Contraction 524 13.3.4 Zero Thermal Contraction Materials 526 13.4 Thermoelectric Effects 527 13.4.1 Thermoelectric Coefficients 527 13.4.2 Thermoelectric Effects and Charge Carriers 529 13.4.3 The Seebeck Coefficient of Solids Containing Point Defect Populations 530 13.4.4 Thermocouples, Power Generation, and Refrigeration 531 13.5 The Magnetocaloric Effect 533 13.5.1 The Magnetocaloric Effect and Adiabatic Cooling 533 13.5.2 The Giant Magnetocaloric Effect 534 13.6 Thermochromic Effects 535 13.6.1 Liquid Crystal Display Thermometers 535 13.6.2 Vanadium Dioxide 537 References 537 Further Reading 538 General 538 An Interactive Demonstration of the Debye Formula for the Heat Capacity of Solids Is 538 Thermal Conductivity 538 Negative and Zero Thermal Expansion 538 The Magnetocaloric Effect in Alloys 538 Thermoelectric Materials 538 Problems and Exercises 539 Calculations and Questions 540 Part IV Nuclear Properties of Solids 543 14 Radioactivity and Nuclear Reactions 545 14.1 Radioactivity 545 14.1.1 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Elements 545 14.1.2 Isotopes and Nuclides 546 14.1.3 Nuclear Equations 546 14.1.4 Radioactive Series 547 14.1.4.1 The Uranium Series 547 14.1.4.2 The Thorium Series 548 14.1.4.3 The Actinium Series 548 14.1.4.4 The Neptunium/Plutonium Series 550 14.1.5 Nuclear Stability 550 14.2 Artificial Radioactive Atoms 551 14.2.1 Heavy Elements 551 14.2.2 Artificial Radioactivity in Light Elements 553 14.3 Nuclear Decay 554 14.3.1 The Rate of Nuclear Decay 554 14.3.2 Radioactive Dating 555 14.4 Nuclear Energy 557 14.4.1 The Binding Energy of Nuclides 557 14.4.2 Nuclear Fission 558 14.4.3 Thermal Reactors for Power Generation 560 14.4.4 Fuel for Space Exploration 561 14.4.5 Fast Breeder Reactors 561 14.4.6 Fusion and Solar Cycles 562 14.5 NuclearWaste 563 14.5.1 Nuclear Accidents 563 14.5.2 The Storage of NuclearWaste 564 Further Reading 565 The Search for New Heavy Elements 565 Radioactive Dating 565 Nuclear Reactors 566 NuclearWaste 566 Problems and Exercises 566 Calculations and Questions 568 Appendix A 571 Appendix B Energy Levels and Terms of Many-Electron Atoms 573 B.1 Derivation of Atomic Terms 573 B.2 The Ground State Term of an Atom 574 B.3 Energy Levels of Many Electron Atoms 575 Index 577

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPREFACE TO THE FIFTH EDITION PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION CONVERSION FACTORS LIST OF SYMBOLS ACRONYMS INTRODUCTION 1 MECHANICS OF PNEUMATIC TIRES 1.1 Tire Forces and Moments 1.2 Rolling Resistance of Tires 1.3 Tractive (Braking) Effort and Longitudinal Slip (Skid) 1.3.1 Tractive Effort and Longitudinal Slip 1.3.2 Braking Effort and Longitudinal Skid 1.4 Cornering Properties of Tires 1.4.1 Slip Angle and Cornering Force 1.4.2 Slip Angle and Aligning Torque 1.4.3 Camber and Camber Thrust 1.4.4 Characterization of Cornering Behavior of Tires 1.4.5 The Magic Formula 1.5 Performance of Tires on Wet Surfaces 1.6 Ride Properties of Tires 1.7 Tire/Road Noise References Problems 2 MECHANICS OF VEHICLE–TERRAIN INTERACTION–TERRAMECHANICS 2.1 Applications of the Theory of Elasticity to Predicting Stress Distributions in the Terrain under Vehicular Loads 2.2 Applications of the Theory of Plastic Equilibrium to the Mechanics of Vehicle–Terrain Interaction 2.3 Empirically Based Models for Predicting Off-Road Vehicle Mobility 2.3.1 NATO Reference Mobility Model (NRMM) 2.3.2 Empirical Models for Predicting Single Wheel Performance 2.3.3 Empirical Models Based on the Mean Maximum Pressure 2.3.4 Limitations and Prospects for Empirically Based Models 2.4 Measurement and Characterization of Terrain Response 2.4.1 Characterization of Pressure–Sinkage Relationships 2.4.2 Characterization of the Response to Repetitive Normal Loading 2.4.3 Characterization of Shear Stress–Shear Displacement Relationships 2.4.4 Characterization of the Response to Repetitive Shear Loading 2.4.5 Bekker-Wong Terrain Parameters 2.5 A Simplified Physics-Based Model for the Performance of Tracked Vehicles 2.5.1 Motion Resistance of a Track 2.5.2 Tractive Effort and Slip of a Track 2.6 An Advanced Physics-Based Model for the Performance of Vehicles with Flexible Tracks 2.6.1 Approach to the Prediction of Normal Pressure Distribution under a Track 2.6.2 Approach to the Prediction of Shear Stress Distribution under a Track 2.6.3 Prediction of Motion Resistance and Drawbar Pull as Functions of Track Slip 2.6.4 Experimental Substantiation 2.6.5 Applications to Parametric Analysis and Design Optimization 2.7 An Advanced Physics-Based Model for the Performance of Vehicles with Long-Pitch Link Tracks 2.7.1 Basic Approach 2.7.2 Experimental Substantiation 2.7.3 Applications to Parametric Analysis and Design Optimization 2.8 Physics-Based Models for the Cross-Country Performance of Wheels (Tires) 2.8.1 Motion Resistance of a Rigid Wheel 2.8.2 Motion Resistance of a Pneumatic Tire 2.8.3 Tractive Effort and Slip of a Wheel (Tire) 2.9 A Physics-Based Model for the Performance of Off-Road Wheeled Vehicles 2.9.1 Basic Approach 2.9.2 Experimental Substantiation 2.9.3 Applications to Parametric Analysis 2.10 Slip Sinkage 2.10.1 Physical Nature of Slip Sinkage 2.10.2 Simplified Methods for Predicting Slip Sinkage 2.11 Applications of Terramechanics to the Study of Mobility of Extraterrestrial Rovers and Their Running Gears 2.11.1 Predicting the Performance of Rigid Rover Wheels on Extraterrestrial Surfaces Based on Test Results Obtained on Earth 2.11.2 Performances of Lunar Roving Vehicle Flexible Wheels Predicted Using the Model NWVPM and Correlations with Test Data 2.12 Finite Element and Discrete Element Methods for the Study of Vehicle–Terrain Interaction 2.12.1 The Finite Element Method 2.12.2 The Discrete (Distinct) Element Method References Problems 3 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF ROAD VEHICLES 3.1 Equation of Motion and Maximum Tractive Effort 3.2 Aerodynamic Forces and Moments 3.3 Internal Combustion Engines 3.3.1 Performance Characteristics of Internal Combustion Engines 3.3.2 Emissions of Internal Combustion Engines 3.4 Electric Drives 3.4.1 Elements of an Electric Drive 3.4.2 Characteristics of Battery Electric Vehicles 3.5 Hybrid Electric Drives 3.5.1 Types of Hybrid Electric Drive 3.5.2 Characteristics of Energy Consumption and Emissions of Hybrid Electric Vehicles 3.6 Fuel Cells 3.6.1 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells 3.6.2 Characteristics of Fuel Cell Vehicles 3.7 Transmissions for Vehicles with Internal Combustion Engines 3.7.1 Manual Gear Transmissions 3.7.2 Automatic Transmissions 3.7.3 Continuous Variable Transmissions 3.7.4 Hydrostatic Transmissions 3.8 Prediction of Vehicle Performance 3.8.1 Acceleration Time and Distance 3.8.2 Gradeability 3.9 Operating Fuel Economy of Vehicles with Internal Combustion Engines 3.10 Internal Combustion Engine and Transmission Matching 3.11 Braking Performance 3.11.1 Braking Characteristics of a Two-Axle Vehicle 3.11.2 Braking Efficiency and Stopping Distance 3.11.3 Braking Characteristics of a Tractor–Semitrailer 3.11.4 Antilock Brake Systems 3.11.5 Traction Control Systems References Problems 4 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF OFF-ROAD VEHICLES 4.1 Drawbar Performance 4.1.1 Drawbar Pull and Drawbar Power 4.1.2 Drawbar (Tractive) Efficiency 4.1.3 All–Wheel Drive 4.1.4 Coefficient of Traction 4.1.5 Weight-to-Power Ratio for Off-Road Vehicles 4.2 Fuel Economy of Cross-Country Operations 4.3 Transport Productivity and Transport Efficiency 4.4 Mobility Map and Mobility Profile 4.5 Selection of Vehicle Configurations for Off-Road Operations References Problems 5 HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS OF ROAD VEHICLES 5.1 Steering Geometry 5.2 Steady-State Handling Characteristics of a Two-Axle Vehicle / 367 5.2.1 Neutral Steer 5.2.2 Understeer 5.2.3 Oversteer 5.3 Steady-State Response to Steering Input 5.3.1 Yaw Velocity Response 5.3.2 Lateral Acceleration Response 5.3.3 Curvature Response 5.4 Testing of Handling Characteristics 5.4.1 Constant Radius Test 5.4.2 Constant Speed Test 5.4.3 Constant Steer Angle Test 5.5 Transient Response Characteristics 5.6 Directional Stability 5.6.1 Criteria for Directional Stability 5.6.2 Vehicle Stability Control 5.7 Driving Automation 5.7.1 Classification of Levels of Driving Automation 5.7.2 Automated Driving Systems and Cooperative Driving Automation 5.8 Steady-State Handling Characteristics of a Tractor–Semitrailer 5.9 Simulation Models for the Directional Behavior of Articulated Road Vehicles References Problems 6 STEERING OF TRACKED VEHICLES 6.1 Simplified Analysis of the Kinetics of Skid-Steering 6.2 Kinematics of Skid-Steering 6.3 Skid-Steering at High Speeds 6.4 A General Theory for Skid-Steering on Firm Ground 6.4.1 Shear Displacement on the Track–Ground Interface 6.4.2 Kinetics in a Steady-State Turning Maneuver 6.4.3 Experimental Substantiation 6.4.4 Coefficient of Lateral Resistance 6.5 Power Consumption of Skid-Steering 6.6 Skid Steering Systems for Tracked Vehicles 6.6.1 Clutch/Brake Steering System 6.6.2 Controlled Differential Steering System 6.6.3 Planetary Gear Steering System 6.7 Articulated Steering References Problems 7 VEHICLE RIDE CHARACTERISTICS 7.1 Human Response to Vibration 7.1.1 International Standard ISO 2631/1-1985 7.1.2 International Standard ISO 2631–1:1997/Amd.1:2010 7.1.3 Absorbed Power 7.2 Vehicle Ride Models 7.2.1 Two-Degrees-of-Freedom Vehicle Model for Vertical Vibrations of Sprung and Unsprung Mass 7.2.2 Numerical Methods for Determining the Response of a Quarter-Car Model to Irregular Surface Profile Excitation 7.2.3 Two-Degrees-of-Freedom Vehicle Model for Pitch and Bounce 7.3 Introduction to Random Vibration 7.3.1 Surface Elevation Profile as a Random Function 7.3.2 Frequency Response Function 7.3.3 Evaluation of Vehicle Vibration in Relation to Ride Comfort Criteria 7.4 Active and Semiactive Suspensions 7.4.1 Active Suspensions 7.4.2 Semi-Active Suspensions References Problems 8 INTRODUCTION TO AIR-CUSHION VEHICLES 8.1 Air-Cushion Systems and Their Performances 8.1.1 Plenum Chambers 8.1.2 Peripheral Jets 8.2 Resistances of Air-Cushion Vehicles 8.3 Suspension Characteristics of Air-Cushion Systems 8.3.1 Heave (or Bounce) Stiffness 8.3.2 Roll Stiffness 8.4 Directional Control of Air-Cushion Vehicles References Problems INDEX

Read more less

Book SynopsisENGINEERING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AN AUTHORITATIVE AND COMPLETE GUIDE TO SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT ENGINEERING In Engineering for Sustainable Development: Theory and Practice, a team of distinguished academics deliver a comprehensive, education-focused discussion on sustainable engineering, bridging the gap between theory and practice by drawing upon illuminating case studies and the latest cutting-edge research. In the book, readers will find an introduction to the sustainable development agenda and sustainable technology development, as well as practical methods and tools for the development and implementation of sustainable engineering solutions. The book highlights the critical role of engineers and the engineering profession in providing sustainability leadership as well as important future-focused solutions to support engineering global sustainable development. The book offers a wide range of civil, mechanical, electrical, and chemTable of ContentsPreface xv Part I Challenges in Sustainable Engineering 1 1 Sustainability Challenges 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Weak Sustainability vs Strong Sustainability 6 1.3 Utility vs Throughput 8 1.4 Relative Scarcity vs Absolute Scarcity 10 1.5 Global/International Sustainability Agenda 10 1.6 Engineering Sustainability 12 1.7 IPAT 19 1.8 Environmental Kuznets Curves 20 1.9 Impact of Engineering Innovation on Earth’s Carrying Capacity 21 1.10 Engineering Challenges in Reducing Ecological Footprint 22 1.11 Sustainability Implications of Engineering Design 24 1.12 Engineering Catastrophes 27 1.13 Existential Risks from Engineering Activities in the Twenty-First Century 30 1.13.1 Artificial Intelligence (AI) 30 1.13.2 Green Technologies 32 1.14 TheWay Forward 34 References 35 Part II Sustainability Assessment Tools 41 2 Quantifying Sustainability – Triple Bottom Line Assessment 43 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Triple Bottom Line 44 2.2.1 The Economic Bottom Line 44 2.2.2 Environmental Bottom Line 44 2.2.3 The Social Bottom Line 45 2.3 Characteristics of Indicators 46 2.4 How Do You Develop an Indicator? 47 2.5 Selection of Indicators 48 2.6 Participatory Approaches in Indicator Development 48 2.7 Description of Steps for Indicator Development 49 2.7.1 Step 1: Preliminary Selection of Indicators 49 2.7.2 Step 2: Questionnaire Design and Development 49 2.7.3 Step 3: Online Survey Development 49 2.7.4 Step 4: Participant Selection 49 2.7.5 Step 5: Final Selection of Indicators and Calculation of Their Weights 50 2.8 Sustainability Assessment Framework 53 2.8.1 Expert Survey 54 2.8.2 Stakeholders Survey 58 2.9 TBL Assessment for Bench Marking Purposes 60 2.10 Conclusions 61 References 62 3 Life Cycle Assessment for TBL Assessment – I 63 3.1 Life Cycle Thinking 63 3.2 Life Cycle Assessment 64 3.3 Environmental Life Cycle Assessment 65 3.3.1 Application of ELCA 66 3.3.2 ISO 14040-44 for Life Cycle Assessment 68 3.3.2.1 Step 1: Goal and Scope Definition 68 3.3.2.2 Step 2: Inventory Analysis 71 3.3.2.3 Step 3: Life Cycle Impact Assessment (LCIA) 72 3.3.2.4 Step 4: Interpretation 87 3.4 Allocation Method 87 3.5 Type of LCA 91 3.6 Uncertainty Analysis in LCA 92 3.7 Environmental Product Declaration 95 References 103 4 Economic and Social Life Cycle Assessment 107 4.1 Economic and Social Life Cycle Assessment 107 4.2 Life Cycle Costing 108 4.2.1 Discounted Cash Flow Analysis 110 4.2.2 Internalisation of External Costs 117 4.3 Social Life Cycle Assessment 120 4.3.1 Step 1: Goal and Scope Definition 121 4.3.2 Step 2: Life Cycle Inventory 123 4.3.3 Step 3: Life Cycle Social Impact 123 4.3.4 Step 4: Interpretation 124 4.4 Life Cycle Sustainability Assessment 128 References 130 Part III Sustainable Engineering Solutions 131 5 Sustainable Engineering Strategies 133 5.1 Engineering Strategies for Sustainable Development 133 5.2 Cleaner Production Strategies 134 5.2.1 Good Housekeeping 135 5.2.2 Input Substitution 136 5.2.3 Technology Modification 137 5.2.4 Product Modification 138 5.2.5 On Site Recovery/Recycling 138 5.3 Fuji Xerox Case Study – Integration of Five CPS 139 5.4 Business Case Benefits of Cleaner Production 140 5.5 Cleaner Production Assessment 140 5.5.1 Planning and Organisation 140 5.5.2 Assessment 141 5.5.3 Feasibility Studies 144 5.5.4 Implementation and Continuation 148 5.6 Eco-efficiency 150 5.6.1 Key Outcomes of Eco-efficiency 152 5.6.2 Eco-efficiency Portfolio Analysis in Choosing Eco-efficient Options 152 5.7 Environmental Management Systems 157 5.7.1 Aims of an EMS 160 5.7.2 A Basic EMS Framework: Plan, Do Check, Review 161 5.7.3 Interested Parties 161 5.7.4 Benefits of an EMS 162 5.8 Conclusions 164 References 165 6 Industrial Ecology 167 6.1 What Is Industrial Ecology? 167 6.2 Application of Industrial Ecology 168 6.3 Regional Synergies/Industrial Symbiosis 169 6.4 How Does It Happen? 172 6.5 Types of Industrial Symbiosis 173 6.6 Challenges in By-Product Reuse 179 6.7 What Is an Eco Industrial Park? 180 6.8 Practice Examples 185 6.8.1 Development of an EIP 185 6.8.2 Industrial Symbiosis in an Industrial Area 186 6.9 Industrial Symbiosis in Kwinana Industrial Area 187 6.9.1 Conclusions 187 References 189 7 Green Engineering 191 7.1 What Is Green Engineering? 191 7.1.1 Minimise 192 7.1.2 Substitute 192 7.1.3 Moderate 193 7.1.4 Simplify 193 7.2 Principles of Green Engineering 194 7.2.1 Inherent Rather than Circumstantial 194 7.2.2 Prevention Rather than Treatment 194 7.2.3 Design for Separation 194 7.2.4 Maximise Mass, Energy, Space, and Time Efficiency 195 7.2.5 Output-Pulled vs Input-Pushed 195 7.2.6 Conserve Complexity 196 7.2.7 Durability Rather than Immortality 196 7.2.8 Meet Need, Minimise Excess 197 7.2.9 Minimise Material Diversity 197 7.2.10 Integration and Interconnectivity 197 7.2.11 Material and Energy Inputs Should Be Renewable Rather than Depleting 198 7.2.12 Products, Processes, and Systems Should Be Designed for Performance in a Commercial ‘After Life’ 198 7.3 Application of Green Engineering 198 7.3.1 Chemical 199 7.3.1.1 PreventWaste 199 7.3.1.2 Maximise Atom Economy 200 7.3.1.3 Design Safer Chemicals and Products 201 7.3.1.4 Use Safer Solvents and Reaction Conditions 201 7.3.1.5 Use Renewable Feedstocks 202 7.3.1.6 Avoid Chemical Derivatives 203 7.3.1.7 Use Catalysts 203 7.3.1.8 Increase Energy Efficiency 203 7.3.1.9 Design Less Hazardous Chemical Syntheses 203 7.3.1.10 Design Chemicals and Products to Degrade After Use 204 7.3.1.11 Analyse in Real Time to Prevent Pollution 204 7.3.1.12 Minimise the Potential for Accidents 204 7.3.2 Sustainable Materials 206 7.3.2.1 Applications of Composite Materials 208 7.3.2.2 The Positives and Negatives of Composite Materials 209 7.3.2.3 Bio-Bricks 209 7.3.3 Heat Recovery 210 7.3.3.1 Temperature Classification 211 7.3.3.2 Heat Recovery Technologies 213 7.3.3.3 The Positives and Negatives ofWaste Heat Recovery 217 References 217 8 Design for the Environment 221 8.1 Introduction 221 8.2 Design for the Environment 221 8.3 Benefits of Design for the Environment 223 8.3.1 Economic Benefits 223 8.3.2 Operational Benefits 224 8.3.3 Marketing Benefits 225 8.4 Challenges Associated with Design for the Environment 225 8.5 Life Cycle Design Guidelines 228 8.6 Practice Examples 233 8.6.1 Design for Disassembly 233 8.6.2 The Life Cycle Benefits of Remanufacturing Strategies 236 8.7 ZeroWaste 240 8.7.1 Waste Diversion Rate 240 8.7.2 ZeroWaste Index 241 8.8 Circular Economy 243 8.8.1 Material Flow Analysis 245 8.8.2 Practice Example 247 8.9 Extended Producer Responsibilities 252 References 254 9 Sustainable Energy 257 9.1 Introduction 257 9.2 Energy, Environment, Economy, and Society 258 9.2.1 Energy and the Economy 258 9.2.2 Energy and the Environment 260 9.3 Sustainable Energy 261 9.4 Pathways Forward 265 9.4.1 Deployment of Renewable Energy 265 9.4.2 Improvements to Fossil Fuel Based Power Generation 266 9.4.3 Plug in Electric Vehicles 269 9.4.4 Green Hydrogen Economy 271 9.4.5 Smart Grid 273 9.4.6 Development of Efficient Energy Storage Technologies 274 9.4.7 Energy Storage and the Californian “Duck Curve” 279 9.4.8 Sustainability in Small-Scale Power Generation 280 9.4.8.1 Types of Decentralised Electricity Generation System 281 9.4.9 Blockchain for Sustainable Energy Solutions 284 9.4.10 Waste Heat Recovery 285 9.4.11 Carbon Capture Technologies 286 9.4.11.1 Post Combustion Capture 286 9.4.11.2 Pre-combustion Carbon Capture 287 9.4.12 Demand-side Management 288 9.4.12.1 National Perspective 289 9.4.12.2 User Perspective 290 9.4.12.3 CO2 Mitigation per Unit of Incremental Cost 290 9.5 Practice Example 291 9.5.1 Step 1 291 9.5.2 Step 2 294 9.5.3 Step 3 294 9.5.4 Step 4 295 9.5.5 Step 5 296 9.5.6 Step 6 296 9.5.7 Step 7 297 9.6 Life Cycle Energy Assessment 297 9.7 Reference Energy System 298 9.8 Conclusions 301 References 301 Part IV Outcomes 307 10 Engineering for Sustainable Development 309 10.1 Introduction 309 10.2 Sustainable Production and Consumption 309 10.3 Factor X 311 10.4 Climate Change Challenges 314 10.5 Water Challenges 320 10.6 Energy Challenges 321 10.7 Circular Economy and Dematerialisation 322 10.8 Engineering Ethics 324 10.8.1 Engineers Australia’s Sustainability Policy – Practices 326 References 327 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisMetrology and Instrumentation: Practical Applications for Engineering and Manufacturingprovides students and professionals with an accessible foundation in the metrology techniques, instruments, and governing standards used in mechanical engineering and manufacturing. The book opens with an overview of metrology units and scale, then moves on to explain topics such as sources of error, calibration systems, uncertainty, and dimensional, mechanical, and thermodynamic measurement systems. A chapter on tolerance stack-ups covers GD&T, ASME Y14.5-2018, and the ISO standard for general tolerances, while a chapter on digital measurements connects metrology to newer, Industry 4.0 applications.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv About the Author xvii 1 Fundamental Units and Constants in Metrology 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Current Definitions of the Main SI Units 6 1.3 New Definition of Seven Base Units of the SI 6 1.4 Derived International System (SI) Units 7 1.5 SI Conversion 7 1.6 Fundamental Constants 8 1.7 Common Measurements 9 1.8 Principles and Practices of Traceability 10 1.8.1 Definition of Traceability 10 1.8.2 Accreditation and Conformity Assessment 11 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 12 References 12 2 Scales of Metrology 13 2.1 Introduction to Practical Metrology across All Scales 13 2.2 Nanometrology 14 2.2.1 Introduction and Need in Industry 14 2.2.2 Definition of Nanometrology 15 2.2.3 Importance of Nanometrology in Science and Technology 15 2.3 Standards 18 2.4 Micrometrology 22 2.4.1 Introduction and Need in Industry 22 2.4.2 Definition of Micrometrology 22 2.4.3 Examples of Micrometrology of Microparts 22 2.5 Macroscale Metrology 23 2.5.1 Standards 25 2.6 Large-Scale Metrology and Large-Volume Metrology 29 2.6.1 Introduction and Need in Industry 29 2.6.2 Definition 30 2.6.3 Verification Standards 32 2.7 Instruments Techniques 34 2.7.1 Large Coordinate Measuring Machines 35 2.7.2 Laser Trackers 35 2.7.3 Theodolite 35 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 37 References 37 3 Applied Math and Statistics 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Scientific and Engineering Notation 39 3.3 Imperial/Metric Conversions 40 3.4 Ratio 41 3.5 Linear Interpolation 42 3.6 Number Bases 42 3.7 Significant Figures, Rounding, and Truncation 43 3.8 Geometry and Volumes 44 3.8.1 Perimeter 44 3.8.2 Volume and Area 44 3.9 Angular Conversions 44 3.10 Graphs and Plots 45 3.11 Statistical Analysis and Common Distributions 47 3.11.1 Definition of Measurement Data 47 3.11.2 Statistical Measurements 47 3.11.3 Statistical Analysis of Measurements 47 3.11.4 Probability 48 3.11.5 Sample and Population 49 3.11.6 Formulation of Mean and Variance for Direct Measurements 49 3.11.7 Mean and Variance Based on Samples 50 3.11.8 The Standard Deviation of the Mean 51 3.12 Formulation of the Standard Uncertainty and Average of Indirect Measurements 52 3.12.1 How to Determine the Measured Value and Random Error? 52 3.12.2 Repeated Measurements of One Single Quantity 52 3.12.3 Normal Distribution 53 3.12.4 Student’s t-distribution 55 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 60 4 Errors and their Sources 61 Introduction 61 4.1 Definition of the Error and Their Types 61 4.1.1 Systematic Errors 62 4.1.2 Random Errors 63 4.1.3 Components of Motion Error Assessment 63 4.2 Measurement Characteristics 63 4.2.1 Characterization of the Measurement 63 4.2.2 Resolution, Error Uncertainty, and Repeatability 64 4.2.3 Model of Measurement 67 4.3 Propagation of Errors 69 4.4 Sources of Errors 73 4.4.1 Static Errors and Dynamic Errors 73 4.5 Error Budget 77 4.5.1 Components of the Error Budget 77 4.5.2 Example of Error-Budget Table 78 4.6 Error Elimination Techniques 79 4.6.1 Methods 79 4.7 Model of Errors in CNC Using HTM 81 4.8 Case Study of Errors Budget 87 4.8.1 Description of the Designed System 87 4.8.2 Error Modeling and Experimental Testing 88 4.9 Solved Problems 96 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 97 References 97 5 Measurement and Measurement Systems 99 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 What Can Be Standard in a Measurement? 101 5.3 Definitions of Key Measurement Components 102 5.3.1 Measurement System 102 5.3.2 Measurement System Analysis 103 5.3.3 Measurement Process 103 5.4 Physical Measurement Process (PMP) 103 5.5 Difference between Number and an Analysis Model 104 5.6 Measurement Methods 105 5.6.1 Metrology and Measurement 105 5.6.2 Metrological Characteristics of Measuring Instruments 108 5.7 Instrumentation for Measurement 109 5.7.1 Background 109 5.7.2 Measurement Instrumentations 109 5.7.3 Digital Measuring Device Fundamentals 109 5.8 Non-Portable Dimensional Measuring Devices 110 5.8.1 Laser Interferometry, Application to CNC Machines 110 5.8.2 Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) 118 5.9 Metrology Laboratory Test for Students 140 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 146 References 146 6 Tolerance Stack-Up Analysis 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.1.1 Importance of Tolerance Stack-Up Analysis 149 6.1.2 Need for Tolerance Stack-Up Analysis in Assemblies 151 6.1.3 Manufacturing Considerations in Engineering Design 151 6.1.4 Technical Drawing 152 6.1.5 Definitions, Format, andWorkflow of Tolerance Stack-Up 153 6.2 Brief Introduction to Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) 156 6.2.1 Notation and Problem Formulation 156 6.2.2 Dimension Types 157 6.2.3 Coordinate Dimensioning 158 6.2.4 Tolerance Types 160 6.2.5 Characteristics of Features and Their Tolerances 162 6.3 Tolerance Format and Decimal Places 164 6.4 Converting Plus/Minus Dimensions and Tolerances into Equal-Bilaterally Toleranced Dimensions 165 6.5 Tolerance Stack Analysis 167 6.5.1 Worst-Case Tolerance Analysis 169 6.5.2 Rules for Assembly Shift 169 6.5.3 Worst-Case Tolerance Stack-Up in Symmetric Dimensional Tolerance 171 6.5.4 Worst-Case Tolerance Stack-Up in Asymmetric Dimensional Tolerance 173 6.6 Statistical Tolerance Analysis 173 6.6.1 Definition of Statistical Tolerance Analysis 173 6.6.2 Worst-Case Analysis vs RSS (Root-Sum Squared) Statistical Analysis 175 6.6.3 Second-Order Tolerance Analysis 176 6.6.4 Cases Discussions 176 6.6.5 Understanding Material Condition Modifiers 178 Appendix A from ISO and ASME Y14 Symbols 188 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 189 References 189 7 Instrument Calibration Methods 191 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 Definition of Calibration 191 7.3 Need for Calibration 192 7.4 Characteristics of Calibration 193 7.5 Calibration Overall Requirements and Procedures 195 7.5.1 Calibration Methods/Procedures 195 7.6 Calibration Laboratory Requirements 197 7.7 Industry Practices and Regulations 198 7.8 Calibration and Limitations of a Digital System 199 7.9 Verification and Calibration of CNC Machine Tool 201 7.10 Inspection of the Positioning Accuracy of CNC Machine Tools 202 7.11 CNC Machine Error Assessment and Calibration 207 7.12 Assessment of the Contouring in the CNC Machine Using a Kinematic Ballbar System 219 7.13 Calibration of 3-axis CNC Machine Tool 221 7.14 Calibration of a Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) 225 7.14.1 CMM Performance Verification 225 7.14.2 Accreditation of Calibration Laboratories 226 Section 1: Scope and Description 231 Section 2: Calibration Requirements 232 Section 3: Preliminary Operations 232 Section 4: Calibration Process 233 Section 5: Data Analysis 234 Section 6: Calibration Report 234 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 235 References 235 8 Uncertainty in Measurements 237 8.1 Introduction and Background 237 8.2 Uncertainty of Measurement 238 8.3 Measurement Error 238 8.4 Why Is Uncertainty of Measurement Important? 239 8.5 Components and Sources of Uncertainty 239 8.5.1 What Causes Uncertainty? 239 8.5.2 Uncertainty Budget Components 240 8.5.3 The Errors Affecting Accuracy 240 8.6 Static Errors and Dynamic Errors 241 8.7 Types of Uncertainty 241 8.8 Uncertainty Evaluations and Analysis 242 8.9 Uncertainty Reporting 243 8.10 How to Report Uncertainty 245 8.11 Fractional Uncertainty Revisited 247 8.12 Propagation of Uncertainty 247 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 252 References 252 9 Dimensional Measurements and Calibration 255 9.1 Length Measurement 255 9.2 Displacement Measurement 255 9.3 Manual Instruments 260 9.3.1 Caliper 260 9.3.2 Vernier Caliper 261 9.3.3 Micrometer 262 9.3.4 Feeler Gauge 262 9.3.5 Liner Measurement Tool 263 9.3.6 American Wire Gauge 263 9.3.7 Bore Gauge 263 9.3.8 Telescopic Feeler Gauge 264 9.3.9 Depth Gauge 265 9.3.10 Angle Plate or Tool 265 9.3.11 Flat Plate 266 9.3.12 Dial Gauge 266 9.3.13 Oil Gauging Tapes 267 9.3.14 Thread Measurement 267 9.3.15 Planimeter 267 9.4 Diameter and Roundness 269 9.4.1 How to Measure a Diameter? 269 9.4.2 Roundness 270 9.5 Angular Measurements 276 9.5.1 Line Standard Angular Measuring Devices 277 9.5.2 Face Standard Angular Measuring Devices 277 9.5.3 Measurement of Inclines 279 9.5.4 Optical Instruments for Angular Measurement 280 9.6 Metrology for Complex Geometric Features 282 9.6.1 Edge Detection Techniques Using a CCD Camera 282 9.6.2 Full Laser Scanning for Reverse Engineering 283 9.7 Measurement Surface Texture 285 9.7.1 Geometry of Surface 285 9.7.2 Surface Integrity 286 9.7.3 Specification of Surfaces 286 9.7.4 Sampling Length 287 9.7.5 Instruments and Measurement of Roughness 290 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 291 References 291 10 Mechanical Measurements and Calibration 293 10.1 Importance of Mechanical Measurements 293 10.2 Mechanical Measurements and Calibration 293 10.3 Description of Mechanical Instruments 294 10.3.1 Mass Measurements 294 10.3.2 Force Measurements 295 10.3.3 Vibration Measurements 295 10.3.4 Volume and Density 296 10.3.5 Hydrometers 298 10.3.6 Acoustic Measurements 298 10.4 Calibration of Mechanical Instruments 300 10.4.1 When Is Equipment Calibration Needed? 300 10.4.2 When Is There No Need for Calibration? 301 10.4.3 Process of Equipment Calibration 301 10.5 Equipment Validation for Measurement 301 10.5.1 Is There a Need of Equipment Validation? 302 10.5.2 Features and Benefits of Validation 302 10.5.3 Process of Validation of Equipment 302 10.6 Difference between Calibration and Validation of Equipment 303 10.7 Difference between Calibration and Verification 303 10.8 Calibration of Each Instrument 304 10.8.1 Mass Calibration 304 10.8.2 Force Calibration 304 10.8.3 Pressure Calibration 304 10.8.4 Vibration Measurements 306 10.8.5 Volume and Density 307 10.8.6 Hydrometers 308 10.8.7 Acoustic Measurements 308 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 308 References 308 11 Thermodynamic Measurements 309 11.1 Background 309 11.2 Scale of Temperature 309 11.2.1 Ideal Gas Law 310 11.2.2 Vacuum 310 11.2.3 Gas Constants 310 11.3 Power 312 11.4 Enthalpy 312 11.5 Humidity Measurements 312 11.6 Methods of Measuring Temperature 313 11.7 Temperature Measured through Thermal Expansion Materials 314 11.7.1 Liquid-in-Glass Thermometer 314 11.7.2 Bimetallic Thermometer 314 11.7.3 Electrical Resistance Thermometry 315 11.7.4 Resistance Temperature Detectors 316 11.7.5 Examples for Discussion 318 11.7.6 Thermistors 320 11.8 Thermoelectric Temperature Measurement or Thermocouples 321 11.8.1 Basic Thermocouples 321 11.8.2 Fundamental Thermocouple Laws 322 11.9 Thermocouple Materials 323 11.9.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of Thermocouple Materials 324 11.9.2 Thermocouple Voltage Measurement 325 11.10 Multi-Junction Thermocouple Circuits 326 11.11 Thermopiles 327 11.12 Radiative Temperature Measurement 327 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 329 References 329 12 Quality Systems and Standards 331 12.1 Introduction to Quality Management 331 12.2 Quality Management 332 12.2.1 Total Quality Management (TQM) 332 12.2.2 Quality Management System (QMS) 333 12.2.3 TQM Is Essential to Complete TQS 333 12.2.4 ISO-Based QMS Certification 333 12.3 Components of Quality Management 334 12.3.1 Quality System (QS) 334 12.3.2 Quality Assurance (QA) 335 12.3.3 Quality Control (QC) 335 12.3.4 Quality Assessment 335 12.4 System Components 336 12.4.1 Quality Audits 336 12.4.2 Preventive and Corrective Action 336 12.4.3 Occupational Safety Requirements 337 12.4.4 Housekeeping Practices 338 12.5 Quality Standards and Guides 338 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 339 References 340 13 Digital Metrology Setups and Industry Revolution I4.0 341 13.1 Introduction 341 13.1.1 What Is a Digital Measurement? 341 13.1.2 Metrology and Digitalization 341 13.1.3 Implementation Strategy 343 13.2 Data Acquisition 343 13.3 Setup Fundamentals for Measurement and Data Acquisition 344 13.3.1 Length Measurement in Open Loop 344 13.3.2 Thermal Measurement and Data-Acquisition Considerations 345 13.3.3 Data Transfer to Cloud 349 13.3.4 Internet of Things (IoT) Metrology 349 13.3.5 Closed-Loop Data Analysis- (In-Process Inspection) 350 13.4 Digital Twin Metrology Inspection 352 Multiple Choice Questions of this Chapter 354 References 354 Index 357

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisBioactive Glasses and Glass-Ceramics Fundamentals and Applications A Comprehensive and Critical Overview of Bioactive Glasses and Glass-Ceramics Bioactive glasses and glass-ceramics are a versatile class of biocompatible materials that have an astonishing impact in biomedicine. Bioactive Glasses and Glass-Ceramics: Fundamentals and Applications presents topics on the functional properties, processing, and applications of bioactive glasses and glass-ceramics. The primary use of bioactive glasses and glass-ceramics is to repair bone and dental defects; however, their full potential is yet to be fulfilled. Many of today's achievements in regenerative medicine and soft tissue healing were unthinkable when research began. As a result, the research involving bioactive glasses and glass-ceramics is highly stimulating and continuously progresses across many different disciplines including chemistry, materials science, bioengineering, biology, and medicine. TopicsTable of ContentsPreface List of Contributors Chapter 1 Glass crystallisation and glass-ceramics – an overviewAraceli de Pablos Martín, Delia S. Brauer Chapter 2 Crystallisation of glasses and its impact on bioactivity and other propertiesAraceli de Pablos Martín, Delia S. Brauer Chapter 3 Bioactive glass S53P4 – from a statistically suggested composition to clinical successLeena Hupa and Nina C. Lindfors Chapter 4 Melt-Derived Bioactive Glasses: Beyond Silicate GlassesJonathan Massera Chapter 5 Borate bioactive glassSeiji Yamaguchi Chapter 6 Fabrication of bioactive structures from Sol-gel derived bioactive glass.D. Durgalakshmi and Anuj Kumar Chapter 7 Processing of Bioactive Glass Scaffolds for Bone Tissue EngineeringElisa Fiume, Carla Migneco, Saeid Kargozar, Enrica Verné, Francesco Baino Chapter 8 Strong, tough bioactive glasses and composite scaffoldsQiang Fu Chapter 9 Nano-Bioactive Glass: Advances and ApplicationsAhmed El-Fiqi Chapter 10 Tailoring the osteogenic properties of bioactive glasses by incorporation of therapeutic ions for orthopedic applicationsSebastian Wilkesmann, Fabian Westhauser Chapter 11 Bioactive glasses as carriers for the controlled release of therapeutic speciesMin Zhu, Yufang Zhu Chapter 12 Enhancing the biological performance of bioactive glasses by combination with phytotherapeutic compoundsKanwal Ilyas, Aldo R. Boccaccini Chapter 13 Bioactive Glass Based Coatings: Concepts for Improving the Biocompatibility of Implantable MaterialsJ. Fletcher, W. Alles, T.J. Keenan, A.W. Wren Chapter 14 Laser cladding and laser direct glass deposition of bioactive glass and glass-ceramicsR. Comesaña, J. del Val, F. Quintero, A. Riveiro, F. Arias-González, M. Boutinguiza, F. Lusquiños, J. Pou Chapter 15 Laser-assisted processing of CaSiO3‒Ca3(PO4)2 bioactive eutectic glasses and glass-ceramics for functional applicationsDaniel J. Sola Chapter 16 Molecular Dynamics (MD) Simulations of Bioactive Glasses and Glass-ceramicsMaziar Montazerian, Collin Wilkinson, John C. Mauro Chapter 17 In Vitro and In Vivo Studies of Bioactive GlassesSadaf Batool, Zakir Hussain, Usman Liaqat Chapter 18 Production of bioactive glass-ceramics for dental application through devitrification of glasses in the Na2O/K2O-CaO-MgO-SiO2-P2O5-CaF2 systemKonstantinos Dimitriadis, Dilshat U. Tulyaganov, Simeon Agathopoulos Chapter 19 Applications of bioactive glasses for implants in the earMario Milazzo, Glauco Cristofaro, Stefano Berrettini, and Serena Danti Chapter 20 Bioactive glass: soft tissue reparative and regenerative applicationsShreyasi Majumdar, Smriti Gupta, Sairam Krishnamurthy Chapter 21 Bioactive Glasses as Biologically Active Materials for Healing of Skin WoundsTina Mehrabi, Abdorreza S. Mesgar, Zahra Mohammadi Chapter 22 Biocompatible Glasses Applied in Cancer Treatment: Magnetic Hyperthermia and BrachytherapyRoger Borges, Ana Carolina S. Souza, Luis Antonio Genova, Joel Machado Jr., Giselle Zenker Justo, Juliana Marchi Chapter 23 Bioactive glasses with antibacterial properties: mechanisms, compositions, and applicationsMostafa Awaid and Ilaria Cacciotti Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis timely book on structural adhesives joints showcases all the pertinent topics and will be of immense value to scientists and engineers in many industries. Most structures are comprised of a number of individual parts or components which have to be connected to form a system with integral load transmission path. The structural adhesive bonding represents one of the most enabling technologies to fabricate most complex structural configurations involving advanced materials (e.g. composites) for load-bearing applications. Quite recently there has been a lot of activity in harnessing nanotechnology (use of nanomaterials) in ameliorating the existing or devising better performing structural adhesives. The 10 chapters by subject matter experts look at the following issues: Surface preparation for structural adhesive joints (SAJ)Use of nanoparticles in enhancing performance of SAJOptimization of SAJDurability aspects of SAJDebonding of SAJFracture mechanics of SAJFailure analysis ofTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1: General Topics 1 1 Surface Preparation for Structural Adhesive Joints 3Anushka Purabgola, Shivani Rastogi, Gaurav Sharma and Balasubramanian Kandasubramanian 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Theories of Adhesion 6 1.2.1 Mechanical Interlocking 6 1.2.2 Electrostatic (Electronic) Theory 7 1.2.3 Diffusion Theory 7 1.2.4 Wetting Theory 8 1.2.5 Chemical Bonding Theory 10 1.2.6 Weak Boundary Layer Theory 10 1.3 Surface Preparation Methods 11 1.3.1 Degreasing 12 1.3.1.1 Vapor Degreasing 12 1.3.1.2 Ultrasonic Vapor Degreasing 13 1.3.1.3 Other Degreasing Methods 14 1.3.2 Mechanical Abrasion 15 1.3.3 Chemical Treatment 17 1.3.3.1 Acid Etching 17 1.3.3.2 Anodization 17 1.3.4 Physical Methods 20 1.3.4.1 Corona Treatment 20 1.3.4.2 Flame Treatment 22 1.3.4.3 Plasma Treatment 22 1.4 Surface Preparation Evaluation Methods 23 1.4.1 Dyne Solutions 24 1.4.2 Water-Break Test 24 1.4.3 Contact Angle Test 24 1.5 Applications of Structural Adhesives 25 1.5.1 Adhesives for Aerospace 25 1.5.2 Adhesives for Marine Applications 26 1.5.3 Adhesives for Medical and Dental Applications 26 1.5.4 Adhesives for Construction 27 1.5.5 Adhesives for Automotive Industry 28 1.5.6 Adhesives for Electronics 28 1.6 Summary 29 Acknowledgment 29 References 30 2 Improvement of the Performance of Structural Adhesive Joints with Nanoparticles and Numerical Prediction of Their Response 35Farid Taheri 2.1 Introduction 36 2.1.1 Historical Perspective 36 2.1.2 Incorporation of Fillers in Adhesives 38 2.2 Use of Nanocarbon Nanoparticles for Improving the Response of Resins and Adhesives 41 2.3 Assessment of Performance of Adhesively Bonded Joints (ABJs) 54 2.3.1 Brief Introduction to the Procedures Used for Assessing Stresses in ABJs 54 2.3.2 Computational Approaches for Assessing Response of ABJs 56 2.4 Application of CZM for Simulating Crack Propagation in Adhesively Bonded Joints 60 2.4.1 Basis of the CZM 60 2.4.2 Applications of CZM to Bonded Joints 62 2.5 Application of xFEM for Simulating Crack Propagation in Adhesively Bonded Joints 66 2.6 Summary 69 Acknowledgement 70 References 70 3 Optimization of Structural Adhesive Joints 79P. K. Mallick 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Joint Configurations 80 3.3 Joint Design Parameters 83 3.4 Substrate Stiffness and Strength 88 3.5 Adhesive Selection 89 3.6 Hybrid Joints 92 3.7 Summary 93 References 94 4 Durability Aspects of Structural Adhesive Joints 97H. S. Panda, Rigved Samant, K. L. Mittal and S. K. Panigrahi Abbreviations Used 98 4.1 Introduction 99 4.2 Factors Affecting Durability 100 4.2.1 Materials 101 4.2.1.1 Adhesives 101 4.2.1.2 Adherends 111 4.2.2 Environment 123 4.2.2.1 Moisture 123 4.2.2.2 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (CTE) 124 4.2.3 Stress 125 4.3 Methods to Improve Durability 127 4.4 Summary 128 References 129 5 Debonding of Structural Adhesive Joints 135Mariana D. Banea 5.1 Introduction 135 5.2 Design of Structures with Debondable Adhesives (Design for Disassembly) 138 5.3 Techniques for Debonding of Structural Adhesive Joints 140 5.3.1 Electrically Induced Debonding of Adhesive Joints 140 5.3.2 Debonding on Demand of Adhesively Bonded Joints Using Reactive Fillers 141 5.3.2.1 Nanoparticles 141 5.3.2.2 Microparticles 145 5.4 Prospects 151 5.5 Summary 152 Acknowledgements 152 References 152 Part 2: Analysis and Testing 159 6 Fracture Mechanics-Based Design and Analysis of Structural Adhesive Joints 161Jinchen Ji and Quantian Luo Abbreviations and Nomenclature 161 6.1 Introduction 163 6.1.1 Analysis Methods of Adhesive Joints 164 6.1.2 Design Philosophy of Adhesive Joints and Fracture Mechanics Based Design 166 6.2 Stress Analysis and Fracture Modelling of Structural Adhesive Joints 167 6.2.1 Stress Analysis and Static Strength of Structural Adhesive Joints 168 6.2.1.1 Shear-Lag Model and Shear Stress 168 6.2.1.2 Beam-Adhesive Model, Shear and Peel Stresses 171 6.2.1.3 Load Update of a Single Lap Joint in Tension 177 6.2.2 Analytical Approaches of Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics 180 6.2.2.1 An Approach Based on Adhesive Stresses for the Joint Under General Loading 180 6.2.2.2 Methods Based on a Beam Theory and a Singular Field 184 6.2.3 Fracture Prediction Using Cohesive Zone Model 185 6.2.3.1 Cohesive Zone Model 186 6.2.3.2 Cohesive Traction Law 186 6.2.3.3 Design Criteria Based on Cohesive Zone Model 187 6.3 Finite Element Modelling and Simulation 187 6.3.1 Finite Element Modelling for Stress Analysis of Adhesive Joints 188 6.3.2 Virtual Crack Closure Technique 188 6.3.3 Cohesive Zone Modelling and Progressive Failure 189 6.4 Experimental Approach and Material Characterization 190 6.4.1 Specimen and Test Standard 191 6.4.2 Data Reduction and Fracture Toughness, Mixed Mode Fracture 192 6.4.3 Measurement of Fracture Parameters and Progressive Failure Using DIC 192 6.5 Prospects 193 6.5.1 Analytical Modelling and Formulation 193 6.5.2 Cohesive Zone Model and Progressive Fracture 193 6.5.3 Experimental Study on Fracture of Adhesive Joints 194 6.5.4 Optimal Design of Adhesive Joints and Use of Nanomaterials 194 6.6 Summary 195 References 195 7 Failure Analysis of Structural Adhesive Joints with Functionally Graded Tubular Adherends 205Rashmi Ranjan Das 7.1 Introduction and Background Literature 206 7.2 Material Property Gradation in the Structural Adhesive Joint Region 210 7.3 Stress Analysis 212 7.4 Summary and Conclusions 216 References 217 8 Damage Behaviour in Functionally Graded Structural Adhesive Joints with Double Lap Joint Configuration 221S. V. Nimje and S. K. Panigrahi List of Symbols 222 8.1 Introduction 222 8.2 FE Analysis of Functionally Graded Double Lap Joint 227 8.2.1 Modelling of Double Lap Joint 227 8.2.2 Loading and Boundary Conditions 229 8.2.3 Modeling of Functionally Graded Adhesive Layer 229 8.2.4 Meshing Scheme of Double Lap Joint 231 8.2.5 Error and Convergence Study 231 8.3 Damage Onset in a Double Lap Joint 233 8.4 Adhesion/Interfacial Failure Propagation Analysis 234 8.4.1 Evaluation of SERR 235 8.5 Interfacial Damage Propagation Analysis 237 8.5.1 Onset of Adhesion/Interfacial Failure 237 8.5.2 Interfacial Failure Propagation in Double Lap Joint with Mono-Modulus Adhesive 238 8.5.3 Interfacial Damage Propagation in Functionally Graded Double Lap Joint 240 8.6 Conclusions 242 References 243 9 Impact, Shock and Vibration Characteristics of Epoxy-Based Composites for Structural Adhesive Joints 247Bikash Chandra Chakraborty and Debdatta Ratna Descriptions of Abbreviations 248 Symbols with Units 249 9.1 Introduction 250 9.2 Dynamic Viscoelasticity 252 9.2.1 Example 255 9.3 Toughened Epoxy Resins 257 9.3.1 Toughening Agents for Epoxy 258 9.4 Flexible Epoxy System 263 9.4.1 Vibration Response for Joined Beams 265 9.4.2 Experimental Evaluation 268 9.4.3 Flexible Epoxy-Clay Nanocomposite 270 9.5 Shock Response of Metallic Joints with Epoxy Adhesives 274 9.5.1 Shock Pulse: Fourier Transform 275 9.5.2 Shock Response 277 9.6 Summary 283 References 284 10 Delamination Arrest Methods in Structural Adhesive Joints Used in Automobiles 289P. Ramesh Babu 10.1 Introduction 290 10.2 Delamination Growth Studies in Laminated FRP Composite Bonded Joints 290 10.2.1 Analysis of Embedded Delaminations 291 10.3 Laminated Curved Composite Skin-Stiffener Joint Geometry and Material Properties 292 10.3.1 Configurations of the Models with Pre-Embedded Delamination 293 10.3.2 Loads and Boundary Conditions of the Joint for the Delamination Analysis 295 10.4 Finite Element Modelling with Embedded Delamination 295 10.5 Numerical Method for the Delamination Analysis 296 10.6 Computations of SERRs for Hybrid Laminated Curved Composite Skin-Stiffener Joint 298 10.7 Studies of Crack Growth Arrest with Fasteners in Bonded Joints 304 10.7.1 Modelling and Analysis of Skin-Stiffener Joint with Fasteners at Embedded Delamination 304 10.8 Study of Crack Growth Arrest Mechanisms with Z-Fibre Pins in Composite Laminated Joints 307 10.9 Modelling and Analysis of Skin-Stiffener Joints with Z-Fiber Pins at Embedded Delamination 307 10.9.1 Estimation of Crack Growth Arrest (a) with Single Row of Z-Fiber Pins Reinforcement (b) with Multiple Rows of Z-Fiber Pins Reinforcement (c) Influence of Diameter and Space in between the Reinforced Pins on Fracture Toughness of the Composite Laminated Joint 308 10.10 Conclusions 312 10.11 Scope of Future Work 315 References 315 Index 319

Read more less

Book SynopsisVoltage-Enhanced Processing of Biomass and Biochar A detailed introduction to voltage-enhanced processing of carbonaceous materials While there are many well-established biomass processing techniques that are suitable for a variety of different situations, the utilization of voltage-driven techniques for the processing of biomass and biochar has been shown to have advantages for certain applications. Specifically, the field of thermal plasma gasificationwhere plasma provides the conversion energyis relied upon in certain commercial equipment that is already available on the market. Crucially, however, the field of non-thermal plasma pyrolysis and gasificationchemical reactions are intensified by the presence of the plasma dischargeis still a developing subject with a great scope for innovation in research and development. A timely book considering its potential applications in a greener market, Voltage-Enhanced Processing of Biomass and Biochar helpfully provides a detailed description of voltage-enhanced processing of carbonaceous materials. The book explains aspects of this processing method in thermal and non-thermal plasmas, as well as describing the effects of Joule heating as part of the temperature distribution and conversion rate. In many ways, this book presents a detailed description of different processes and plasma discharges currently available, with the provision of experimental and simulation results gathered over years of research and development. Importantly, it also offers many methods by which we can be environmentally friendly when working with biomass and biochar. Voltage-Enhanced Processing of Biomass and Biochar readers will also find: Simulation results of Joule heating of biomass, biochar, and pyrolytic graphite Descriptions of thermal plasma torches currently available in the marketAccounts of the experimental results of conversion utilizing steam plasmaComparison of results against provided numerical models that predict synthesis gas composition under the presence of thermal plasma discharge Voltage-Enhanced Processing of Biomass and Biochar is a useful reference for researchers and practitioners working on applications of plasma for the conversion of biomass and biochar, as well as graduate students studying mechanical, electrical, and chemical engineering.Table of ContentsContributors xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv Acronyms xvii Introduction xix 1 Carbonaceous Material Characterization 1 1.1 Material Characterization 2 1.1.1 Thermophysical properties 3 1.1.2 Moisture Content 3 1.1.3 Ultimate and Proximate analysis 4 1.1.4 Dielectric and electrical properties 4 1.2 Biomass 6 1.3 Biochar 7 1.3.1 Surface area, cation exchange capacity, and pH 9 1.4 Activated carbon 11 1.5 Pyrolytic graphite 11 Bibliography 12 2 Conventional Processing Methods 21 2.1 Biomass Processing 22 2.1.1 Biomass Pyrolysis 23 2.1.2 Biomass Gasification 26 2.2 Biochar production and post processing 28 2.2.1 Biochar Activation 34 Bibliography 44 3 Introduction to Plasmas 49 3.1 Thermal Plasmas 50 3.1.1 Mathematical model 53 3.2 Non-thermal Plasmas 56 3.2.1 DC non-thermal electrical discharges 59 3.2.2 Dielectric barrier discharge 64 3.2.3 Pulsed discharges 65 3.2.4 Gliding arc 66 3.2.5 Microwave-induced discharges 67 3.3 Impedance matching 68 3.4 Discharges in liquids 71 3.4.1 Contact glow discharge electrolysis 72 3.4.2 Plasma electrolysis with AC power 76 3.4.3 Gliding arc in glycerol for hydrogen generation 77 Bibliography 78 4 Voltage-Enhanced Processing of Biomass 85 4.1 Biomass gasification with thermal plasma 86 4.1.1 Plasma parameters 87 4.1.2 Syngas composition 88 4.1.3 Energy balance 92 4.1.4 Temperature decay in plasma/biomass discharge 95 4.2 Dielectric breakdown of biomass 97 4.2.1 Biomass-in-the-loop 98 4.3 Biomass gasification with non-thermal plasma 99 4.3.1 Tar breakdown 100 4.3.2 Circuit configuration 104 4.3.3 Scaling up of the technology 107 Bibliography 107 5 Voltage-Enhanced Processing of Biochar 113 5.1 DC Power Applied to Biochar 114 5.1.1 Joule heating of biochar 114 5.1.2 Joule heating of activated carbon 118 5.1.3 Recent Trends in Mathematical modelling 150 5.2 Physical activation of biochar with non-thermal plasma 159 5.2.1 Plasma-steam activation 160 Bibliography 162 6 Numerical simulations 167 6.1 Background 167 6.2 Modeling approaches 168 6.2.1 Kinetic approach 169 6.2.2 Fluid model approach 172 6.3 Examples of non-thermal plasma modeling 175 6.3.1 Cathode fall of a DC glow discharge 176 6.3.2 RF plasma discharge 179 6.3.3 Plasma chemistry 185 Bibliography 191 7 Control of plasma systems 195 7.1 Control of thermal plasma torches 196 7.1.1 Dynamics 198 7.1.2 Control 201 7.2 Control of nonthermal plasma discharges 207 7.2.1 Plasma diagnostics 208 7.2.2 AI-based control 209 Bibliography 214

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover the role of nanotechnology in promoting plant growth and protection through the management of microbial pathogens InNanotechnology in Plant Growth Promotion and Protection, distinguished researcher and author Dr.AvinashP. Ingle delivers a rigorous and insightful collection of some of the latest developments in nanotechnologyparticularly relatedto plant growthpromotionand protection. The book focuses broadly on the role played by nanotechnology in growth promotionof plantsandtheirprotectionthroughthe management of different microbial pathogens. You'll learn about a wide variety of topics, including the role of nanomaterials in sustainable agriculture, hownano-fertilizersbehave as soil feed, and the dual role of nanoparticles in plant growthpromotionand phytopathogen management.You'llalso discover why nanotechnology has the potential to revolutionize the current agricultural landscape through the development of nano-based products, like plant growtTable of ContentsList of Contributors xii Preface xvi 1 Nanotechnology as a Smart Way to Promote the Growth of Plants and Control Plant Diseases: Prospects and Impacts 1Heba Mahmoud Mohammad Abdel-Aziz and Mohammed Nagib Abdel-ghany Hasaneen 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Nanofertilizers 2 1.2.1 Methods for Application of Nanofertilizers 2 1.2.1.1 Seed Priming 2 1.2.1.2 In Soil 2 1.2.1.3 Foliar Application 3 1.2.2 Possible Ways for Uptake and Translocation of Nanofertilizers in Plants 3 1.2.3 Macronutrient Nanofertilizers 3 1.2.4 Micronutrient Nanofertilizers 5 1.2.5 Non-nutrient Nanofertilizers 6 1.2.6 Advantages of Nanofertilizers 6 1.2.7 Limitations of Nanofertilizers 7 1.3 Nanopesticides and Nanoantimicrobials 7 1.3.1 Nano-Insecticides 8 1.3.2 Nanobactericides 8 1.3.3 Nanofungicides 8 1.3.4 Nano-Antivirals 9 1.3.5 Advantages of Using Nanopesticides 9 1.3.6 Risks of Using Nano-based Agrochemicals 9 1.4 Conclusions 10 References 11 2 Effects of Titanium Dioxide Nanomaterials on Plants Growth 17Martin Šebesta, Illa Ramakanth, Ondřej Zvěřina, Martin Šeda, Pavel Diviš, and Marek Kolenčík 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Properties of TiO2NPs Important for Biological Interaction 18 2.3 Pathways and Interaction of TiO2NPs with Plants 20 2.3.1 Foliar Exposure 20 2.3.2 Root Exposure 21 2.3.3 Seed Exposure 22 2.3.4 Interaction of TiO2NPs with Plants 22 2.4 Effect of Different Concentrations of TiO2 NPs on Plants 23 2.5 Benefits of Using TiO2NPs Alone and in Complex Formulations on Plant Growth and Yield 31 2.6 Conclusion and Future Perspective 35 References 37 3 The Emerging Applications of Zinc-Based Nanoparticles in Plant Growth Promotion 45Anil Timilsina and Hao Chen 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Applications and Effects of Zn Based NPs on Plant Growth Promotion 46 3.2.1 Zn NPs in Seed Treatments and Its Effects 46 3.2.2 Effects of Zn NPs on Seed Germination 46 3.2.3 Effects of Seed Treatment on Plant Growth 50 3.2.4 Molecular Mechanisms Involved in Effects of Zn NPs on Seed 50 3.3 ZnO NPs in Enhanced Plant Growth 50 3.3.1 Application Methods 51 3.3.2 Effects of Zn NPs on Plant Growth Promotion 51 3.3.2.1 Effects of Zn NPs Via Foliar Application 51 3.3.2.2 Effects of Zn NPs Used in Agar Media and Hydroponic Application 55 3.3.2.3 Effects Zn NPs Through Soil Application 55 3.3.2.4 Effects of Zn NPs on Plant Physiological and Biochemical Changes 56 3.4 Zn NPs in Crop Protection 56 3.4.1 Improvement on Disease Resistance 56 3.4.2 Enhancement of Stress Tolerance 57 3.5 Conclusions 57 References 58 4 Nanofertilizer in Enhancing the Production Potentials of Crops 63C. Sharmila Rahale, K.S. Subramanian, and A. Lakshmanan 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Nanofertilizers 64 4.3 Synthesis of Nanofertilizer 64 4.4 Uptake, Translocation, and Fate of Nanofertilizers in Plants 66 4.5 Percolation Studies to Assess Nutrient Release Pattern 67 4.6 Application of Nanofertilizers in Plants 68 4.7 Specific Properties of Nanofertilizers 70 4.8 Biosafety Issues in Nanofertilizer Application 70 4.9 Nanofertilizer Studies at Tamil Nadu Agricultural University (TNAU) 71 4.10 Conclusion 74 References 75 5 Potential Applications of Nanobiotechnology in Plant Nutrition and Protection for Sustainable Agriculture 79Vishnu D. Rajput, Abhishek Singh, Tatiana M. Minkina, Sudhir S. Shende, Pradeep Kumar, Krishan K. Verma, Tatiana Bauer, Olga Gorobtsova, Svetlana Deneva, and Anna Sindireva 5.1 Introduction 79 5.2 Nanomaterial in Sustainable Crop Production 81 5.2.1 Nanomaterial in Soil Management 81 5.2.2 Nanomaterials in Nutrient Use Efficiency (NUE) 82 5.2.3 Nanomaterials in Plant Protection 82 5.2.3.1 Nanomaterials as Nano-Pesticides 83 5.2.3.2 Nanomaterials as Nano-Insecticides 83 5.2.3.3 Nanomaterials as Nano-Fungicides 84 5.2.3.4 Nanomaterials as Nano-Herbicides 84 5.3 Nanomaterials in Crop Improvement 85 5.3.1 Abiotic Stresses 85 5.3.1.1 Drought Stress 86 5.3.1.2 Salinity Stress 86 5.4 Nanomaterials in Plant Genetic Engineering 87 5.4.1 Nanoparticle’s Mediated Transformation 87 5.4.2 Non-vector Mediated Transformation 87 5.5 Future Perspectives and Challenges 88 5.6 Conclusions 89 References 89 6 Immunity in Early Life: Nanotechnology in Seed Science and Soil Feed 93Garima Shandilya and Kirtan Tarwadi 6.1 Introduction 93 6.2 Nano Frontiers in Agricultural Development 94 6.2.1 Nanoagronomics 94 6.2.2 Smart Systems for Agrochemicals Delivery 94 6.2.2.1 Nanocapsules 94 6.2.2.2 Liposomes 96 6.2.2.3 Nanoemulsions 96 6.2.2.4 Nanogels 96 6.2.2.5 Nanoclays 97 6.2.2.6 Nanodispersions 97 6.2.2.7 Nanobionics 97 6.3 Nanotechnology in Agriculture 99 6.3.1 Effects of Nanoparticles on Plants 99 6.3.2 Nanoparticle-Plant Hormones Interactions 99 6.3.3 Effect of Nanoparticles on Crop Quality 100 6.4 Immunity in Early Life 101 6.4.1 Seed 101 6.4.2 Pre-sowing Treatments and Priming as Tools for Better Seed Germination 102 6.4.3 Phenomenon of Seed Priming 102 6.4.4 Gene Therapy for Seed 103 6.4.5 Immuning Seeds Using Nanoparticles 104 6.5 Nanotechnology in Soil Feed and Waste Water Treatment 104 6.6 Conclusions 106 References 107 7 Effects of Natural Organic Matter on Bioavailability of Elements from Inorganic Nanomaterial 113Martin Urík, Marek Kolenčík, Nobuhide Fujitake, Pavel Diviš, Ondřej Zvěřina, Illa Ramakanth, and Martin Šeda 7.1 Introduction 113 7.2 Effect of Natural Organic Matter on Nanoparticles’ Aggregation and Agglomeration 114 7.3 Natural Organic Matter Effects on Nanoparticles’ Dissolution 116 7.4 Effect of Mutual Interactions of Natural Organic Matter and Nanoparticles on Their Bioavailability 117 7.5 Conclusions 120 References 120 8 Induction of Stress Tolerance in Crops by Applying Nanomaterials 129Yolanda González-García, Magín González-Moscoso, Hipólito Hernández-Hernández, Alonso Méndez-López, and Antonio Juárez-Maldonado 8.1 Introduction 129 8.2 Impact of Stress on Crops 130 8.2.1 Losses of Crops Due to the Main Stress Conditions 130 8.2.2 Plant Responses to Abiotic Stress 133 8.2.3 Plant Responses to Biotic Stress 135 8.3 Impact of Nanomaterials on Crops 137 8.3.1 Induction of Tolerance to Abiotic Stress by the Application of Nanomaterials 138 8.3.2 Induction of Tolerance to Biotic Stress by the Application of Nanomaterials 146 8.4 Conclusions 151 References 151 9 Nanoparticles as Elicitors of Biologically Active Ingredients in Plants 170Sumaira Anjum, Amna Komal, Bilal Haider Abbasi, and Christophe Hano 9.1 Introduction 170 9.2 Routes of Exposure, Uptake, and Interaction of NPs into Plant Cells 172 9.3 Elicitation of BAIs of Plants by Nanoelicitors 175 9.3.1 Elicitation of Polyphenols by Nanoelicitors 175 9.3.2 Elicitation of Alkaloids by Nanoelicitors 184 9.3.3 Elicitation of Terpenoids by Nanoelicitors 186 9.3.4 Elicitation of Essential Oils by Nanoelicitors 189 9.4 Mechanism of Action of Nanoelicitors 191 9.5 Conclusions 191 References 193 10 Dual Role of Nanoparticles in Plant Growth and Phytopathogen Management 203Tahsin Shoala 10.1 Introduction 203 10.2 Nanoparticles: Notion and Properties 206 10.3 Mode of Entry, Uptake, Translocation and Accumulation of Nanoparticles in Plant Tissues 207 10.4 Nanoparticle–Plant Interactions 208 10.5 Impact of Nanoparticles 209 10.5.1 Influence of Nanoparticles on Photosynthesis 209 10.5.2 Nanoparticles in Plant Growth 211 10.5.3 Nanoparticles in Enhancement of Root and Shoot Growth 212 10.5.4 Impact of Nanoparticles in Phytopathogen Suppression 213 10.6 Conclusions 214 References 215 11 Role of Metal-Based Nanoparticles in Plant Protection 220Avinash P. Ingle and Indarchand Gupta 11.1 Introduction 220 11.2 Nanotechnology in Agriculture 221 11.3 Metal-Based Nanoparticles in Plant Protection 222 11.3.1 Silver-Based Nanoparticles 222 11.3.2 Copper-Based Nanoparticles 224 11.3.3 Zinc-Based Nanoparticles 225 11.3.4 Magnesium Oxide Nanoparticles 226 11.3.5 Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles 227 11.3.6 Other Metal-Based Nanoparticles 228 11.4 Possible Antimicrobial Mechanisms for Metal-Based Nanoparticles 228 11.4.1 Cell Membrane Damage 229 11.4.2 ROS Generation 230 11.4.3 DNA Damage 230 11.5 Conclusions 230 References 231 12 Role of Zinc-Based Nanoparticles in the Management of Plant Diseases 239Anita Tanwar 12.1 Introduction 239 12.2 Plant Diseases and Their Symptoms 241 12.3 Importance of Zn for Plants 242 12.4 Distribution of Zn in Plants 242 12.5 Efficiency of Zn in Plants 243 12.6 Deficiency Symptoms 243 12.7 Effects of Zn on Microbial Activity 245 12.8 Nanotechnology and Agriculture 246 12.9 Zn-Based Nanoparticles in Plants 247 12.9.1 ZnONPs 249 12.9.1.1 Antimicrobial Activity 250 12.9.1.2 Seed Germination and Plant Growth 251 12.9.1.3 Mechanism of Action of ZnONPs 252 12.10 Conclusions 253 References 253 13 Effects of Different Metal Oxide Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 259Harris Panakkal, Indarchand Gupta, Rahul Bhagat, and Avinash P. Ingle 13.1 Introduction 259 13.2 Effects of Nanoparticles on Plant Growth and Development 261 13.2.1 Effect of Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 262 13.2.2 Effect of Copper Oxide Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 263 13.2.3 Effect of Iron Oxide Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 264 13.2.4 Effect of Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 264 13.2.5 Effect of Cerium Oxide Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 266 13.2.6 Effect of Other Nanoparticles on Plant Growth 268 13.3 Mechanisms of Nanoparticles and Plant Interactions 269 13.4 Conclusions 271 References 271 14 Biostimulation and Toxicity: Two Levels of Action of Nanomaterials in Plants 283Adalberto Benavides-Mendoza, Magín González-Moscoso, Dámaris Leopoldina Ojeda-Barrios, and Laura Olivia Fuentes-Lara 14.1 Introduction 283 14.2 Induction of Biostimulation or Toxicity in Plants Due to the Physical Properties of the NMs 285 14.3 Induction of Biostimulation or Toxicity in Plants Due to the Chemical Properties of NM Core and the Composition of Corona 290 14.4 Examples of Biphasic Phenotypic Responses of Plants to Nanomaterials Concentration 294 14.5 Conclusions 298 References 299 15 Toxicological Concerns of Nanomaterials in Agriculture 304Ryan Rienzie and Nadeesh Adassooriya 15.1 Introduction 304 15.2 Uptake and Translocation of Nanomaterials 305 15.3 Mechanisms and Factors Affecting Uptake and Translocation of Nanomaterials 305 15.4 Nature and Factors Affecting Nanomaterial Phytotoxicity 306 15.5 Non-Metallic Nanomaterials 307 15.5.1 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 307 15.5.1.1 Graphene Family Nanomaterials 308 15.5.1.2 Mesoporous Carbon Nanoparticles 308 15.5.1.3 Carbon Dots 308 15.5.2 Nanoclay-Based Systems 309 15.5.3 Nano-Hydroxyapatite (nHAP) 309 15.5.4 Nanoplastics 309 15.6 Metallic Nanoparticles 310 15.6.1 Silver Nanoparticles (AgNPs) 310 15.6.2 Mn-Based Nanoparticles 310 15.6.3 NiO Nanoparticles 311 15.6.4 ZnO Nanoparticles 311 15.6.5 TiO2 Nanoparticles 312 15.6.6 Au Nanoparticles 312 15.6.7 Cu-Based Nanoparticles 313 15.6.7.1 Cu Nanoparticles 313 15.6.7.2 CuO Nanoparticles 313 15.6.8 MgO Nanoparticles 314 15.6.9 CdS Nanoparticles 314 15.6.10 Fe-Based Nanoparticles 314 15.6.11 Al2O3 Nanoparticles 315 15.6.12 Rare Earth Element Nanoparticles 315 15.6.13 Multi-Metallic Nanoparticles 315 15.7 Alteration of Toxic Effects Caused by Nanomaterials; Co-Exposure Experiments 316 15.8 Effects of Nanomaterials on Enzymatic and Non-Enzymatic Defense Systems 318 15.9 Antioxidant-Mediated Removal of Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) 318 15.10 Effects of Nanomaterials on Micro and Macro Organismal Communities Associated with Soil in Agroecosystems 319 15.10.1 Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR) 319 15.10.2 Effects of Nanomaterials on Soil Dwelling Earthworms 320 15.10.3 Effects on Organisms Associated with Aquatic Ecosystems 321 15.11 Conclusions 321 References 322 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsStudent Solution Available in Interactive e-Text Preface iii About the Authors v 1 Experimental Design: Principles and Practices and Statistics Review 1 1.1 The Strategy of Experimentation 1 1.2 Basic Principles 8 1.3 Practical Guidelines for Designing an Experiment 10 1.3.1 Recognition of and Statement of the Problem 10 1.3.2 Selection of the Response Variable 11 1.3.3 Choice of Factors, Levels, and Ranges 11 1.3.4 Experimental Design Generation 13 1.3.5 Performing the Experiment 14 1.3.6 Statistical Analysis of the Data 14 1.3.7 Conclusions and Recommendations 15 1.4 A Brief History of Designed Experiments 15 1.5 A Review: Using Statistical Techniques in Experimentation 17 1.6 Review of Some Basic Statistical Concepts and Methods 18 1.6.1 Data Description 18 1.6.2 Random Samples, Statistics and Sampling Distributions 23 1.6.3 Statistical Intervals and Tests of Hypotheses 28 2 Simple Comparative Experiments 42 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Statistical Methods for Comparing Two Population Means 42 2.2.1 Parameter Estimation and Confidence Intervals 42 2.2.2 Statistical Hypothesis Testing on the Difference in Means 47 2.3 Comparison of Two Means, Variances Unknown 51 2.3.1 Confidence Intervals on the Difference in Means of Two Normal Distributions, Variances Unknown 52 2.3.2 Hypothesis Testing on the Difference in Means of Two Normal Distributions with Unknown Variances 54 2.3.3 Comparison of Means of Two Normal Distributions with Variances Unknown but Assumed Equal 56 2.3.4 Power and Sample Size Calculations 57 2.3.5 The Normality Assumption 57 3 Experiments With a Single Categorical Factor: Design Issues and the Analysis of Variance 59 3.1 Motivating Example 59 3.2 Statistical Model for the Data 61 3.3 Design Considerations 62 3.4 Statistical Analysis of the Data 62 3.4.1 Partitioning the Variance of the Response 63 3.4.2 The ANOVA 64 3.4.3 Post-ANOVA Comparison of Treatment Means 65 3.4.4 Comparing Treatment Means with a Control 68 3.4.5 The Effects Model 70 3.5 Model Adequacy Checking 71 3.5.1 Checking the Normality Assumption 71 3.5.2 Checking for Nonconstant Variance 73 3.6 Power and Sample Size 75 4 Experiments With a Single Continuous Factor: Design Issues and the Regression Analysis 77 4.1 Motivating Example 77 4.2 Statistical Models for the Data 77 4.3 Fitting a Statistical Model Using the Data 79 4.4 Design Considerations 82 4.5 Design Comparison 83 5 Two-Factor Factorial Experiments 87 5.1 Basic Concepts 87 5.2 Two Categorical Factors 89 5.3 The Analysis of Variance for a Two-factor Factorial 92 5.4 One Categorical Factor and One Continuous Factor 98 5.5 Two Continuous Factors 100 5.6 Design and Analysis When Some Factor Level Combinations Are Infeasible 105 6 Blocking 109 6.1 The Randomized Complete Block Design 109 6.2 Statistical Analysis of the RCBD 110 6.3 Blocking and Optimal Designs 113 7 The 2k Factorial Design 118 7.1 Introduction 118 7.2 The 22 Factorial Design 118 7.2.1 How Much Replication is Necessary? 119 7.3 The 23 Factorial Design 123 7.3.1 Replication of the 23 Design 128 7.4 A Single Replicate of the 2k Design 129 7.5 2k Designs are Optimal Designs 133 7.6 More About Replication of 2k Designs 135 7.6.1 Adding Center Runs to a 2k Design 137 7.7 Blocking in 2k Designs 138 8 Screening Experiments 140 8.1 Introduction 140 8.2 Regular Fractional Factorial Designs for Factor Screening 141 8.2.1 A General Method for Finding the Alias Relationships in Fractional Factorial Designs 144 8.2.2 Dealiasing Effects 148 8.3 Nonregular Orthogonal Designs 150 8.4 Nonorthogonal Screening Designs 153 8.5 Definitive Screening Designs 156 8.5.1 Statistical Properties of a DSD 158 8.5.2 Constructing DSDs Using Conference Matrices 158 8.5.3 Constructing DSDs with Additional Two-level Categorical Factors 159 8.5.4 Constructing Orthogonally Blocked DSDs 159 8.5.5 Situations When You Should Use a Screening Design Other Than a DSD 159 8.5.6 Recommendations 160 8.6 Screening Summary 160 9 Experiments With Random Blocks 163 9.1 Introduction 163 9.2 Motivating Example: Design and Analysis 164 9.3 Matrix Formulation of the Model for an Experiment with Random Blocks 165 9.4 Design Considerations 166 9.5 A Screening Design with a Random Blocking Factor 166 9.6 Recommendations for Use of Designs with Random Blocks 170 10 Split-Plot Experiments 172 10.1 Introduction 172 10.2 Motivating Example: Design and Analysis 173 10.3 Matrix Formulation of the Model for a Split-plot Experiment 174 10.4 Design Considerations 176 10.5 Split-plot Screening Design 176 10.6 Recommendations for Use of Split-plot Designs 177 11 Response Surface Methods 180 11.1 Introduction 180 11.2 Optimization Techniques in RSM 182 11.3 Response Surface Designs 196 11.3.1 Classical Response Surface Designs 196 11.3.2 Definitive Screening Designs 197 11.3.3 Optimal Designs in RSM 201 12 Design For Models That are Nonlinear in the Parameters 203 12.1 Introduction 203 12.2 Design and Analysis of Exponential Decay 204 12.3 Analysis and Locally Optimal Design of the Michaelis–Menten Model 206 12.4 Yield Optimization as a Function of Reaction Temperature and Time 207 12.5 Mathematical Details for Constructing Optimal Designs for Nonlinear Models 208 12.6 Optimal Design for Situations Where the Response is Binary 210 12.7 Multifactor Binomial Model Experiments 212 12.8 Mathematical Details for Constructing Optimal Designs for Generalized Linear Models 213 Problems P-1 A JMP Scripting Commands For Computing Distribution Probabilities and Quantiles A-1 References R-1 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamentals of Additive Manufacturing for the Practitioner Discover how to shift from traditional to additive manufacturing processes with this core resource from industry leadersFundamentals of Additive Manufacturing for the Practitioner delivers a vital examination of the methods and techniques needed to transition from traditional to additive manufacturing. The book explains how traditional manufacturing work roles change as various industries move into additive manufacturing and describes the flow of the typical production process in additive manufacturing. Detailed explorations of the processes, inputs, machine and build preparation, post-processing, and best practices are included, as well as real-world examples of the principles discussed within. Every chapter includes a problems and opportunities section that prompts readers to apply the book's techniques to their own work. Diagrams and tables are distributed liberally throughout the work to present concepts visually, and key options and decisions are highlighted to assist the reader in understanding how additive manufacturing changes traditional workflows. Readers will also benefit from the inclusion ofA thorough introduction on how to move into additive manufacturing, including the identification of a manufacturing opportunity and its characteristicsAn exploration of how to determine if additive manufacturing is the right solution, with descriptions of the origins of additive manufacturing and the current state of the technologyAn examination of the materials used in additive manufacturing, including polymers, composites, metals, plasters, and biomaterialsA discussion of choosing an additive manufacturing technology and processPerfect for mechanical engineers, manufacturing professionals, technicians, and designers new to additive manufacturing, Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing for the Practitioner will also earn a place in the libraries of technical, vocational, and continuing education audiences seeking to improve their skills with additive manufacturing workflows.Table of ContentsChapter 1 Introduction: Moving into Additive Manufacturing 1 Introduction 2 Manufacturing Processes 5 Traditional and AM Job Roles 8 Case Conclusion: Developing Knowledge and Skills in AM 15 How to Use This Book 16 References 19 Chapter 2 Is Additive Manufacturing the Right Solution? 21 Introduction 22 Additive Manufacturing Applications 23 AM Notable 1: 24 AM Notable 2: 33 A Brief History of AM 33 Selecting a Pilot AM Project 35 AM Notable 3: 38 Case Conclusion: Identifying AM Applications for a Pilot Project 39 References 41 Chapter 3 What Design and Inputs Does Additive Manufacturing Require? 43 Introduction 44 Design for AM 45 Design for DFAM 45 Component Design 47 AM Notable 3.1 50 Part Design 50AM Notable 3.2 54 Process Design 57 AM Notable 3.3 58 Sources of Input 58 AMF and STL File Formats 59 References 63 Chapter 4 What Materials Does Additive Manufacturing Use? 65 Introduction to AM Materials 66 Selecting AM Materials 67 Polymers 69 AM Notable 4.1 3D Printing a Ride to Mars 73 AM Notable 4.2 Chicken Feathers – Not Just for Pillows Anymore! 75 AM Notable 4.3 3D Print a House in 24 Hours for $10k (or less) 78 References 82 Chapter 5 Which Additive Manufacturing Technology and Process Are Right for My Solution? 85 Introduction 86 Binder Jetting 88 Directed Energy Deposition 90 Material Extrusion 92 Material Jetting 94 Powder Bed Fusion 96 Sheet Lamination 98 Vat Photopolymerization 99 Hybrid Systems 102 References 103 Chapter 6 What Machine and Build Preparation Occurs in Additive Manufacturing? 105 Introduction 106 AM Notable 6.1 106 General Machine and Build Preparation Tasks 107 AM Notable 6.2 111 AM Process-Specific Machine and Build Preparation 111 AM Notable 6.3 121 References 122 Chapter 7 What Occurs During the Additive Manufacturing Build Process? 123 Introduction 124 Quality in AM 124 Build Planning and the Build Process 128 Build Process 133 References 138 Chapter 8 What Happens after the Additive Manufacturing Build Process Is Complete? 141 Introduction 142 Part Removal 143 Material Removal 144 Support Removal 146 Treating 147 Finishing 147 Inspection 148 Summary of Post-Processing Methods 148 References 150 Chapter 9 What Do We Do to Move to Additive Manufacturing? 153 Introduction 153 AM Implementation Roadmap 154 Identify a Vision and Strategy 155 Prepare to Manage Change 157 Acquire AM Systems Access and Support 158 Develop AM Workflows 161 Develop Your AM Workforce 162 Monitor Results and Adjust 164 References 165 Chapter 10 Where Can I Learn More? 167 Introduction 167 AM Acronyms and Terminology 167 AM Job Postings and Employment Information 168 AM Education and Training 169 AM Professional Certification 170 AM Body of Knowledge (AMBOK) 170 AM University Consortia and Centers of Excellence 171 AM Service Bureaus and Vendors 171 AM Material Selection Guides 172 AM Technology Selection Guides 172 AM Design Guidelines 173 AM Professional Associations, Conferences, and Meetings 173 Index 175

Read more less

Book SynopsisMATERIALS FOR SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION This book provides professionals and students with a resource on the basic principles and applications of solar energy materials and processes, as well as practicing engineers who want to understand how functional materials operate in solar energy conversion systems. The demand for energy is increasing daily, and the development of sustainable power generation is a critical issue. In order to overcome the energy demand, power generation through solar energy is booming. Many research works have attempted to enhance the efficiency of collection and storage of solar energy and, as a result, numerous advanced functional materials have been developed for enhancing the performance of solar cells. This book has compiled and broadly explores the latest developments of materials, methods, and applications of solar energy. The book is divided into 2 parts, in which the first part deals with solar cell fundamentals and emerging categories, and the latter partTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Solar Cells - Fundamentals and Emerging Categories 1 1 Introduction to Solar Energy Conversion 3Manivannan Rajendran, Moganapriya Chinnasamy, Suresh Muthusamy and Manikandan Kumaran Nair 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Forms of Energy 5 1.3 Solar Radiation 6 1.4 Heat Transfer Principles 7 1.4.1 Conduction 7 1.4.2 Convection 7 1.4.3 Radiation 7 1.5 Basic Laws of Radiation 8 1.5.1 Stefan-Boltzmann Law 8 1.5.2 Planck’s Law 9 1.5.3 Wien’s Displacement Law 9 1.6 Solar Energy Conversion 9 1.6.1 Sources of Renewable and Non-Renewable Energy 10 1.6.2 Differentiate Between Renewable and Non-Renewable Energy Sources 10 1.7 Photo-Thermal Conversion System 11 1.7.1 Flat Plate Collector 11 1.7.2 Evacuated Solar Collector 15 1.8 Thermal Applications 15 1.8.1 Solar Water Heating Systems 17 1.8.2 Steam Generation 20 1.9 Solar Drying 21 1.9.1 Natural Circulation Methods 23 1.9.2 Forced Circulation Systems 25 1.10 Photovoltaic Conversion 25 1.10.1 Photovoltaic Effect 26 1.10.2 Applications 27 1.11 Photovoltaic Thermal Systems 27 1.12 Conclusion 28 References 28 2 Development of Solar Cells 33Mohan Kumar Anand Raj, Rajasekar Rathanasamy and Moganapriya Chinnasamy Abbreviations 33 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 First-Generation PV Cells 34 2.2.1 Single-Crystalline PV Cells 35 2.3 Second-Generation Solar PV Technology 36 2.3.1 Amorphous Silicon PV Cell 36 2.3.2 Cadmium Telluride PV Cell 37 2.3.3 Copper Indium Gallium Diselenide PV Cells 38 2.4 Third-Generation PV Cells 38 2.4.1 Copper Zinc Tin Sulfide PV Cell 40 2.4.2 Dye Sensitized PV Ccell 40 2.4.3 Organic PV Cell 42 2.4.4 Perovskite PV Solar Cells 43 2.4.5 Polymer Photovoltaic Cell 43 2.4.6 Quantum Dot Photovoltaic Cell 43 2.5 Conclusion 44 References 45 3 Recycling of Solar Panels 47Sathish Kumar Palaniappan, Moganapriya Chinnasamy, Rajasekar Rathanasamy and Samir Kumar Pal Abbreviations 48 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 PV and Recycling Development Worldwide 52 3.2.1 Causes of Inability in Solar PV Panel 54 3.3 Current Recycling and Recovery Techniques 55 3.3.1 Methods for Recycling 55 3.3.2 Physical Separation 55 3.3.3 Thermal and Chemical-Based Treatment 56 3.4 Strategies for Recycling Processes 63 3.5 Approaches for Recycling of Solar Panel 65 3.5.1 Component Repair 66 3.5.2 Module Separation 66 3.5.3 Decomposition of Silicon and Precious Industrial Minerals From Modules 68 3.6 Global Surveys in PV Recycling Technology 71 3.7 Ecological and Economic Impacts 76 3.7.1 Evolutionary Factors 77 3.7.2 Socio-Economic Concerns 77 3.8 Conclusion 78 References 79 4 Multi-Junction Solar Cells 87Mohanraj Thangamuthu, Tamilvanan Ayyasamy and Santhosh Sivaraj Abbreviation 87 4.1 Introduction 88 4.1.1 Theory of Multi-Junction Cells 89 4.2 Key Issues for Realizing the Efficiency of MJCs 91 4.2.1 Preference of Top Layer Materials and Enhancing the Quality 91 4.2.2 Low-Loss Tunneling Junction for Intercell Connection and Preventing Impurity Diffusion From Tunneling Junction 92 4.2.3 Lattice-Matching Between Cell Materials and Substrates 92 4.2.4 Effectiveness of Wide-Bandgap Back Surface Field (BSF) Layer 92 4.3 Structure of Multi-Junction Cell 93 4.3.1 Multi-Junction Cell With BSF Layer 96 4.3.2 Optimization of BSF Layers 98 4.4 Novel Materials for Multi-Junction Cells 98 4.5 Applications 100 4.6 Conclusions 102 References 102 5 Perovskite Solar Cells 107Santhosh Sivaraj, Rajasekar Rathanasamy, Gobinath Velu Kaliyannan and Mugilan Thanigachalam 5.1 Introduction 108 5.2 Structure and Working 112 5.3 Fabrication of Simple Perovskite Solar Cell 115 5.4 Fabrication Methods 117 5.4.1 Spin Coating 122 5.4.2 Blade Coating 122 5.4.3 Slot-Die Coating 122 5.4.4 Inkjet Printing 123 5.4.5 Screen Printing 123 5.4.6 Electrodeposition 123 5.4.7 Vapor-Phase Deposition 123 5.5 Stability of Perovskite Solar Cell 124 5.6 Losses in Solar Cells 124 5.7 Conclusion 126 References 127 6 Natural Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 133Viswapriya Shanmugam, Rajasekar Rathanasamy, Saratha Raman and Abbas Ganesan Abbreviations 134 6.1 Introduction 134 6.2 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (DSSCs) 135 6.2.1 The Structure and Operation Principle 136 6.2.2 Performance Parameters of DSSCs 137 6.2.2.1 Open Circuit Voltage 138 6.2.2.2 Short Circuit Current 138 6.2.2.3 Fill Factor 138 6.2.2.4 Efficiency 138 6.3 Dye (Photosensitizer) 138 6.3.1 Natural Dyes 139 6.3.2 Plant Pigments 146 6.3.2.1 Anthocyanin 146 6.3.2.2 Chlorophylls 147 6.3.2.3 Betalain 147 6.3.2.4 Carotenoids 147 6.3.3 Photoconversion Efficiency of Natural Dyes Employed as Dye Sensitizers—Notable Studies 148 6.4 Conclusion 162 References 162 Part 2: Materials, Methods and Applications 169 7 Organic Materials and Their Processing Techniques 171Raja Gunasekaran, Gobinath Velu Kaliyannan, Saravanakumar Jaganathan and Harikrishnakumar Mohan Kumar 7.1 Introduction 172 7.2 Organic Materials 173 7.2.1 Organic Solar Cell 174 7.2.2 Challenges in Organic Solar Cells 174 7.2.3 Focus Area to Overcome the Challenges 174 7.2.4 Operation of Organic Solar Cells 174 7.2.5 Organic Solar Cell Device Architecture 176 7.2.5.1 Single Active-Layer Device 176 7.2.5.2 Double Active-Layer Device 176 7.2.5.3 Bulk Heterojunction Photovoltaic Cell 177 7.3 Electrical Characteristics of OPVs 178 7.3.1 Open-Circuit Voltage 178 7.3.2 Short-Circuit Current 179 7.3.3 Maximum Power Point 179 7.3.4 Fill Factor 179 7.3.5 Power Conversion Efficiency 179 7.3.6 Quantum Efficiency 180 7.4 Potential Materials for OPV Applications 180 7.4.1 Electron-Donor Materials 180 7.4.2 Electron-Acceptor Materials 183 7.5 Conclusion 184 References 185 8 Inorganic Materials and Their Processing Techniques 189Manivasakan Palanisamy, Gobinath Velu Kaliyannan and Harikrishnakumar Mohan Kumar 8.1 Introduction 190 8.2 Functional Inorganic Materials 191 8.3 Comprehensive Processing Strategy 192 8.4 Solid-Phase Processing 194 8.4.1 Ceramic Method 194 8.4.2 Microwave Technique 195 8.4.3 Combustion Synthesis 196 8.4.4 Mechanochemical Synthesis 197 8.4.5 Carbothermal Reduction 198 8.4.6 Friction Consolidation 199 8.4.7 3D Printing Technique 200 8.4.8 Nanolithography Technique 201 8.5 Solution-Phase Processing 202 8.5.1 Sol-Gel Process 202 8.5.2 Hydrothermal and Solvothermal Process 203 8.5.3 Sonochemical Synthesis 204 8.5.4 Surface Coating Technique 206 8.5.5 Spray Pyrolysis Technique 207 8.5.6 Electroplating and Electrodeposition Process 208 8.5.7 Liquid Printing Technique 209 8.5.8 Liquid-Phase Laser Ablation Technique 210 8.5.9 Electrospinning and Electrospraying Technique 212 8.6 Gas-Phase Processing 213 8.6.1 Physical Vapor Deposition Technique 213 8.6.2 Chemical Vapor Deposition Technique 215 8.6.3 Inert Gas Condensation Technique 216 8.6.4 Molecular Beam Epitaxy Technique 218 8.6.5 Gas-Phase Flame Spray Pyrolysis 219 8.7 Challenges in Nanomaterial Production and Processing 221 8.8 Conclusion and Perspectives 222 References 222 9 2D Materials for Solar Cell Applications 227Shrabani De, Sourav Acharya, Sumanta Sahoo, Ashok Kumar Das and Ganesh Chandra Nayak 9.1 Introduction 228 9.2 Fundamental Principles of Solar Cell 231 9.3 Fabrication Methods for the Generation of Solar Cell 234 9.3.1 Spin Coating 234 9.3.2 Spray Coating 237 9.3.3 Doctor Blading 238 9.3.4 Slot-Die Coating 238 9.3.5 Vacuum Deposition/Chemical Vapor Deposition 240 9.3.6 Screen Printing 241 9.4 Introduction to 2D Materials 242 9.4.1 Graphene 242 9.4.2 Boron Nitride 244 9.4.3 Molybdenum Disulfide 244 9.4.4 MXenes 245 9.4.5 Other 2D Materials 246 9.5 Solar Cell Application of 2D Materials 246 9.5.1 2D Materials for Organic Solar Cells 246 9.5.2 2D Materials for Perovskite Solar Cells 249 9.5.3 2D Materials for Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (DSSCs) 251 9.5.4 2D Materials for Other Solar Cell 255 9.6 Conclusions 256 References 257 10 Nanostructured Materials and Their Processing Techniques 269Tamilvanan Ayyasamy, Abubakkar Abdul Jaffar, Selvakumar Pandiyaraj, Mohanraj Thangamuthu and Thangavel Palaniappan 10.1 Introduction 269 10.2 The Need for Solar Energy 270 10.2.1 Solar Photovoltaic Cell 271 10.2.2 Solar Thermal Heating 272 10.3 Nanoscience and Nanotechnology 273 10.4 Nanotechnology in Solar Energy 273 10.4.1 Nanomaterials 274 10.4.2 Properties of Nanomaterials 275 10.4.3 Nanofluids 275 10.5 The Outlook of Nanomaterials in the Performance of Solar Cells 276 10.6 Photovoltaic-Based Nanomaterials and Synthesis Techniques 277 10.6.1 Sol-Gel Method 278 10.6.2 Hydrothermal Method 280 10.6.3 Solvothermal Technique 281 10.6.4 Co-Precipitation Technique 283 10.6.5 Magnetron Sputtering 284 10.6.6 Spin Coating 286 10.6.7 Chemical Vapor Deposition Technique 287 10.6.7.1 Atmospheric Pressure Chemical Vapor Deposition Method 289 10.6.7.2 Plasma-Enhanced Vapor Deposition Method 290 10.7 Nanofluids in Solar Collectors 290 10.8 Nanofluids in Solar Stills 292 10.9 Conclusion 293 References 293 11 Coating Materials, Methods, and Techniques 299Gobinath Velu Kaliyannan, Raja Gunasekaran, Manju Sri Anbupalani and Sathish Kumar Palaniappan 11.1 Introduction 300 11.2 Thin Film Deposition Techniques 301 11.2.1 Advantages of Thin Films 301 11.3 Anti-Reflection Thin Films 302 11.4 Methods of Thin Film Growth 303 11.4.1 Physical Vapor Deposition 304 11.4.2 Thermal Evaporation Process 304 11.4.3 Pulsed Laser Deposition 304 11.4.4 Sputter Deposition 304 11.4.5 Chemical Vapor Deposition 305 11.4.6 Plasma-Enhanced CVD Method 305 11.4.7 Electrochemical Deposition 305 11.4.8 Sol-Gel Thin Film Formation 306 11.5 Thin Film Characterization 308 11.5.1 X-ray Diffraction 308 11.5.2 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy 309 11.5.3 Thermogravimetry and Differential Thermal Analysis 310 11.5.4 UV-Visible Spectroscopy 311 11.5.5 Field Emission Scanning Electron Microscope 312 11.5.6 High-Resolution Transmission Electron Microscope 314 11.5.7 Atomic Force Microscopy 314 11.5.8 Four-Probe Technique 317 11.6 Performance Analysis of ARC Coated Solar Cells 317 11.7 Conclusion 320 References 320 12 Anti-Reflection Coating 323Ragavendran Asokan, Rajasekar Rathanasamy, Saravanakumar Jaganathan and Mohan Kumar Anand Raj 12.1 Introduction 324 12.2 Anti-Reflection Coating 326 12.2.1 Types of Anti-Reflection Coating 329 12.2.2 Textured Coating 330 12.2.3 Anti-Reflection Coating With Self-Cleaning 331 12.3 Perspectives on ARC Materials 331 12.3.1 Silicon-Based Material 332 12.3.2 TiO2-Based Material 332 12.3.3 Carbon-Based Material 333 12.3.4 Gallium-Based Material 333 12.3.5 Polymer-Based Material 333 12.3.6 Organic-Based Material 334 12.4 Techniques for Coating ARC 334 12.4.1 Sol-Gel Technique 334 12.4.1.1 Spin Coating Technique 334 12.4.1.2 Dip Coating Technique 335 12.4.1.3 Meniscus Coating Technique 336 12.4.2 Physical Vapor Deposition 337 12.4.2.1 Thermal Evaporation Technique 337 12.4.2.2 Electron Beam Technique 338 12.4.3 RF and DC Magnetron Sputtering Technique 338 12.4.4 Chemical Vapor Deposition 339 12.4.5 Electrospinning Technique 339 12.4.6 Spray Pyrolysis Technique 341 12.4.7 Lithography 341 12.4.8 Comparison of Coating Techniques 342 12.5 Literature Studies: Impact of ARC on Performance of Solar Cell 343 12.6 Conclusion 345 References 346 13 Thermal Energy Storage and Its Applications 353Veerakumar Chinnasamy, Sathish Kumar Palaniappan, Mohan Kumar Anand Raj, Manivannan Rajendran and Honghyun Cho 13.1 Introduction 354 13.2 Types of ES 354 13.2.1 Mechanical ES 354 13.2.1.1 Flywheel Storage 355 13.2.1.2 Pumped Water Storage 355 13.2.1.3 Compressed Air Storage 355 13.2.2 Electrochemical ES 355 13.2.3 Thermal Energy Storage 356 13.2.4 Advantages of TES 356 13.3 Methods of TES 357 13.3.1 Sensible Heat Storage 357 13.3.1.1 Properties of SHS Materials 357 13.3.2 Latent Heat Storage 358 13.3.2.1 Properties of LHS Materials or PCMs 359 13.3.2.2 Classification of PCMs 359 13.3.3 Thermochemical ES 362 13.4 Applications of TES 362 13.4.1 SHS Applications 362 13.4.1.1 Solar Pond 362 13.4.1.2 Solar Water Heating 363 13.4.1.3 Packed Rock Bed Storage 363 13.4.2 Latent Heat Storage Applications 365 13.4.2.1 Encapsulation of PCM 365 13.4.2.2 Solar Water Heater With LHS 367 13.4.2.3 TES for Building Application 367 13.4.2.4 Numerical Studies on TES 370 13.5 Conclusion 374 References 375 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the chemistry and applications of flame retardants for polymers and other materials. It starts with a description and types of flame retardants, as well as their properties and chemical structures, to include chlorine- and bromine-containing flame retardants, phosphorus-based flame retardants, nitrogen-based flame retardants, and silicones. Inorganic materials that serve as flame retardants, such as boron-based additives, graphenes, and others are discussed in detail. In addition, the following subjects are discussed in detail: Flame retardant polymers The mechanisms of flame retardants, such as flame cooling, synergetic effects, degradation of flame retardants, and others Other flame retardant compositions, such as dripping inhibitors and smoke suppressants Testing methods for flame retardants, international standards, human health hazards, such as smoke toxicity and problems with wastes Synthesis and fabrTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Types of Flame Retardants 1 1.1 History of Organic Flame Retardants 1 1.2 Commercially Available Flame Retardants 3 1.3 Chlorine-Containing Materials 7 1.3.1 HET Acid 7 1.3.2 Dechlorane Plus 7 1.3.3 Chlordene 10 1.3.4 Tris(1,3-dichloroisopropyl) phosphate 10 1.3.5 Tris(2-chloroethyl) phosphate 11 1.4 Bromine-Containing Materials 11 1.4.1 Brominated Diphenyl Ethers 11 1.4.2 1,2-Bis(2,4,6-tribromophenoxy)ethane 13 1.4.3 Trioxohexahydrotriazine Compound 15 1.4.4 2,4,6-Tris(2,4,6-tribromophenoxy)-1,3,5-triazine 15 1.4.5 Pentabromodiphenyl ether 17 1.5 Phosphorus Flame Retardants 17 1.5.1 DOPO 18 1.5.2 Resorcinol bis(diphenyl phosphate) 19 1.5.3 Resorcinol bis(di-2,6-xylyl phosphate) 19 1.5.4 Phosphor Amides 20 1.5.5 Polyphosphate Ester Morpholides 20 1.5.6 Cyclic Phosphazenes 22 1.6 Boron Additives 23 1.6.1 Zinc Borate 23 1.6.2 Boron Compounds and Magnesium Hydroxide 28 1.6.3 Boron Compounds and Aluminum Trihydroxide 28 1.6.4 Boron/Phosphorus Polymer 29 1.6.5 Boron Phosphate 31 1.6.6 Boron-Containing Novolac Resins 32 1.6.7 Spirocyclic Boron Compounds 33 1.6.8 Boron Triazine 34 1.6.9 Boron Nitride 37 1.6.10 Azo-Boron Compounds 43 1.6.11 Isosorbide-Derived Boron and Phosphorus Materials 46 1.6.12 Boron Cyclophosphazene Derivatives 46 1.6.13 Cardanol DOPO and Boron-Doped Graphene 49 1.6.14 Boron Crosslinked Cellulose Nanofibrils 49 1.7 Silicones 51 1.7.1 Hydroxy Silicone Oil 51 1.7.2 Hydrogen-Containing Silicone Oil 54 1.7.3 Red Phosphorus and Alumina Trihydrate 55 1.7.4 Aluminum Hypophosphite and Expandable Graphite 55 1.7.5 Phosphaphenanthrene Compound 56 1.7.6 Phosphorus-Silicone-Nitrogen Ternary Flame Retardant 58 1.7.7 Calcium and Aluminium-Based Fillers 59 1.7.8 Macromolecular Charring Agent 60 1.7.9 Intumescent Flame Retardants 61 1.7.10 Chitosan-Based Nanocoatings 67 1.7.11 Lignin-Based Silicone 67 1.7.12 Silicone-Based Adhesive 68 1.7.13 Nanofillers 69 1.8 Molybdenum Compounds 69 1.9 Graphenes 70 1.9.1 Synergist for Intumescent Flame Retardants 70 1.9.2 Electrochemical Preparation 73 1.9.3 Phosphaphenanthrene Graphene Hybrid Flame Retardant 75 1.9.4 Phosphaphenanthrene Graphene Copolymer 75 1.9.5 Bio-Based Polyphosphonate and Modified Graphene Oxide 77 1.9.6 Black Phosphorene Graphene Composite 78 1.9.7 Waste Deoxyribonucleic Acid 78 1.9.8 Poly(ionic liquid) and Graphene 79 1.9.9 Copper Decorated Graphene 80 1.9.10 Lignin-Modified Carbon Nanotube Graphene 81 1.9.11 κ-Carrageenan Flame Retardant Microspheres 82 1.9.12 Phenethyl-Bridged DOPO and Graphene Nanosheets 83 1.9.13 Graphene Nanoplatelets 83 1.9.14 Aerogels 87 1.9.15 Poly(etherimide) Membranes 89 1.9.16 Chitosan-Graphene Coatings 89 1.9.17 Polymeric Flame Retardant Functionalized Graphene 90 1.9.18 Graphene Oxide Compositions 90 1.10 Flame Retardant Fillers 104 1.10.1 Mineral Fillers 104 1.10.2 Melamine Phosphate Compounds 104 1.11 Admixed Additives 105 1.11.1 Phosphorus-Based Flame Retardant Fillers 108 1.11.2 Thermal Conductive Fillers 109 1.11.3 Organo-Modified Bentonites 110 1.11.4 Nanofillers 110 1.12 Bound Additives 111 1.12.1 Vinyl Ester Resin Monomer 112 1.12.2 Flame Retardant and Ester Curing Agents 112 1.12.3 DOPO Dicyandiamide 114 1.12.4 Mixed Flame Retardants 114 References 118 2 Mechanisms of Flame Retardants 131 2.1 Flame Cooling of Halogens 131 2.1.1 Antimony Trioxide Synergism 131 2.2 Halogen-Free Flame Retardants 132 2.2.1 Poly(propylene)Wood Plastic Composites 132 2.2.2 Diphenolic Acid-Based Biphosphate 133 2.2.3 Degradation of Triphenyl Phosphate 135 2.2.4 Phosphite-Silica Synergism 136 2.3 Benzoxazine Resin with Triazine Structure 137 2.3.1 Flame Retardant Carrageenan Fiber 138 2.3.2 Modified Silica Sol 140 2.3.3 DOPO-Based Triazole 140 2.3.4 DOPO-Based Tetrazole 143 2.3.5 Phosphor Nitrogen-Containing Compound 144 2.3.6 Polyheptazine/PA6 Nanocomposites 144 References 145 3 Dripping Inhibitors 147 3.1 Measurement Methods 147 3.2 Materials 149 3.2.1 PTFE Powder 149 3.2.2 Support for Polyester 150 3.2.3 Support for Poly(lactic acid) 159 3.2.4 Support for Poly(urethane) Foams 160 References 161 4 Smoke Suppressants 165 4.1 Materials 166 4.1.1 Zinc Borate and Aluminum Trihydrate 166 4.1.2 Zinc Hydroxystannate 168 4.1.3 Low-Melting Sulfate Glasses 170 4.1.4 Iron Oxide 170 4.1.5 Zinc Oxide 172 4.1.6 Ferrites 173 4.1.7 Bromide-Intercalated Hydrotalcite 176 4.1.8 Borate-Intercalated Layered Double Hydroxide 176 4.1.9 Hot Melt Adhesive Composition 177 4.1.10 Functionalized Graphene Oxide 178 4.1.11 Expandable Graphene 179 4.1.12 Modified Ammonium Poly(phosphate) for Thermoplastic PU 180 4.1.13 Glass Microspheres with Ammonium Molybdophosphate for Thermoplastic PU 180 4.1.14 Phosphorus-Containing Polyol for PU Foam 181 4.1.15 Porous Silicon Dioxide PU Foams 183 4.1.16 Sepiolite-Based Nanocoating for PU Foam 184 4.1.17 Abandoned Molecular Sieve for PU 184 4.1.18 Melamine Octamolybdate 185 4.1.19 Cardanol-Derived Zirconium Phosphate 185 4.1.20 Montmorillonite Nanocomposites 187 4.1.21 Waste Printed Circuit Boards 188 4.2 Special Applications 189 4.2.1 Diesel Fuel Filters 189 4.2.2 Electrical Cables 190 References 192 5 Standards and Testing 195 5.1 Abbreviation Standard for Chemicals 195 5.2 Test Procedures 197 5.2.1 Bromine-Based Flame Retardant Determination 197 5.3 Hazard Assessment 200 5.3.1 Human Health Hazards 200 5.3.2 Tetrabromobisphenol A 206 5.3.3 Phosphorus Flame Retardants 207 5.4 Standards 209 5.4.1 Test for Flammability 209 5.4.2 Ignition Characteristics of Plastics 209 5.4.3 Heat Release Rate 212 5.4.4 Smoke Toxicity 213 5.4.5 Smoke Density 213 5.4.6 Electrical or Optical Fiber Cables 214 5.4.7 Textiles 214 5.5 Life Cycle Sustainability of Flame Retardants 215 5.5.1 Life Cycle Method 215 5.5.2 Electronic Applications 221 5.5.3 Textile Products 222 5.5.4 Phenolic Resin with Brominated Flame Retardant 222 References 223 6 Synthesis and Fabrication Methods 229 6.1 3D Printing 229 6.2 Mechanochemical Phosphorylation 230 6.3 Coating Methods 231 6.3.1 Reactive Coating 231 6.3.2 Bulk Addition 231 6.4 Recycling 232 6.4.1 Brominated Flame Retardants 232 6.4.2 Enzymatic Recycling 235 6.4.3 Waste Melamine Formaldehyde Foam 236 References 236 7 Examples of Polymers 239 7.1 Poly(amides) 239 7.2 Nylons 240 7.2.1 Halogen-Containing Products 241 7.3 Poly(phenylene ether) Resins 245 7.4 Brominated Poly(phenylene ether) 246 7.5 Unsaturated Poly(ester)s 247 7.6 Epoxide Resins 248 7.7 Poly(carbonate) 249 7.8 Halogen-Free Flame Retardant Polymers 250 7.8.1 Organophosphorus Monomers 251 7.8.2 Epoxy Compounds 251 7.8.3 Poly(vinyl alcohol) 253 7.8.4 Poly(4-hydroxystyrene) 254 7.8.5 Poly(phosphate ester)s 256 7.9 Silicones 257 7.9.1 Degradation Mechanism 257 7.9.2 Halogen-Free Flame Retardant Silicone Rubber 258 7.9.3 Silicone Thermoplastic Elastomer 259 7.10 Foams 260 7.10.1 Poly(styrene) Foams 260 7.10.2 Poly(urethane) Foams 264 7.11 Nanocomposites 287 7.11.1 Dispersion of Nanofillers 287 7.11.2 Clay Nanocomposites 288 7.11.3 Epoxy Nanocomposites 288 7.11.4 Poly(styrene) Nanocomposites 289 7.11.5 Poly(lactic acid)-Containing Nanomaterials 290 7.12 Cellulosic Materials 292 7.12.1 Silica Nanoparticles 292 7.12.2 Phytic Acid 293 7.12.3 Bio-Based Foams 294 References 295 8 Special Uses 303 8.1 Textiles 303 8.1.1 Environmental Issues of the End-of-Life Phase 303 8.1.2 Flame Retardant Poly(amide) 6 305 8.1.3 Flame Retardant Textile Finishes 306 8.1.4 Condensed Tannin 307 8.1.5 Reactive Phosphorus-Containing Flame Retardants 308 8.1.6 Textile Coatings 310 8.1.7 Flame Retardant Back Coating Layer for Historic Textile Fabrics 310 8.2 Flame RetardantWool 311 8.2.1 Flame Retardant Monomer 311 8.2.2 Phytic Acid Compositions 313 8.2.3 Sulfamic Acid 315 8.3 Compositions for Asphalt and Bitumen 316 8.3.1 Comprehensive Testing Program 316 8.3.2 Thermal Decomposition Rates 318 8.3.3 Mixed Flame Retardants 320 8.3.4 Nanoclays 321 8.3.5 Effects of Aging 322 8.3.6 Non-Flammable Grades of Asphalts 322 8.3.7 Composite Flame Retardant Asphalt 324 8.3.8 Layered Double Hydroxides 324 8.3.9 Warm-Mixed Flame Retardant Modified Asphalt Binder 325 8.3.10 Environmentally Friendly Flame Retardant 325 8.4 Batteries 327 8.4.1 Lithium-Ion Batteries 327 8.4.2 Lithium-Sulfur Batteries 336 8.4.3 Sodium-Ion Batteries 338 References 339 Index 345 Acronyms 345 Chemicals 350 General Index 358

Read more less

Book SynopsisMagnetic Nanoparticles in Human Health and Medicine Explores the application of magnetic nanoparticles in drug delivery, magnetic resonance imaging, and alternative cancer therapy Magnetic Nanoparticles in Human Health and Medicine addresses recent progress in improving diagnosis by magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) and using non-invasive and non-toxic magnetic nanoparticles for targeted drug delivery and magnetic hyperthermia. Focusing on cancer diagnosis and alternative therapy, the book covers both fundamental principles and advanced theoretical and experimental research on the magnetic properties, biocompatibilization, biofunctionalization, and application of magnetic nanoparticles in nanobiotechnology and nanomedicine. Chapters written by a panel of international specialists in the field of magnetic nanoparticles and their applications in biomedicine cover magnetic hyperthermia (MHT), MRI contrast agents, biomedical imaging, modeling and simulation, nanobiotechnology, toxicity issues, and more. Readers are provided with accurate information on the use of magnetic nanoparticles in diagnosis, drug delivery, and alternative cancer therapeuticsfeaturing discussion of current problems, proposed solutions, and future research directions. Topics include current applications ofmagneticiron oxide nanoparticles in nanomedicine and alternative cancer therapy: drug delivery, magnetic resonance imaging, superparamagnetic hyperthermia as alternative cancer therapy, magnetic hyperthermia in clinical trials, and simulating the physics of magnetic particle heating for cancer therapy. This comprehensive volume: Covers both general research on magnetic nanoparticles in medicine and specific applications in cancer therapeuticsDiscusses the use of magnetic nanoparticles in alternative cancer therapy by magnetic and superparamagnetic hyperthermiaExplores targeted medication delivery using magnetic nanoparticles as a future replacement of conventional techniquesReviews the use of MRI with magnetic nanoparticles to increase the diagnostic accuracy of medical imaging Magnetic Nanoparticles in Human Health and Medicine is a valuable resource for researchers in the fields of nanomagnetism, magnetic nanoparticles, nanobiomaterials, nanobioengineering, biopharmaceuticals nanobiotechnologies, nanomedicine, and biopharmaceuticals, particularly those focused on alternative cancer diagnosis and therapeutics.Table of ContentsList of Contributors 1. An introduction to magnetic nanoparticles: from bulk to nanoscale magnetism and their applicative potential in human health and medicine Costica Caizer1*, Shital Bonde2, and Mahendra Rai2 1West University of Timisoara, Department of Physics, Bd. V. Parvan no. 4, 300223 - Timisoara, Romania 2UGC-Basic Science Research Faculty, Department of Biotechnology, SGB Amravati University, Amravati - 444 602, Maharashtra, India Part I. Current Biomedical Applications of Magnetic Nanoparticles 2. Magnetic nanoparticles in nanomedicine Gabriela Fabiola Stiufiuc1, Cristian Iacovita2, Valentin Toma3, Rares Ionuț Stiufiuc2,3, Romulus Tetean1* and Constantin Mihai Lucaciu3 1 Faculty of Physics, "Babes-Bolyai" University, Cluj-Napoca, Romania 2MedFuture Research Center for Advanced Medicine, "Iuliu Hatieganu" University of Medicine and Pharmacy, Cluj-Napoca, Romania 3Faculty of Pharmacy, "Iuliu Hatieganu" University of Medicine and Pharmacy, Cluj-Napoca, Romania 3. Clustering of magnetic nanoparticles for nanomedicine Giacomo Mandriota1, Riccardo Di Corato2* 1Istituto Italiano di Tecnologia, via Morego 30, 16163 Genoa, Italy 2CNR-IMM, Institute for Microelectronics and Microsystems, Via Monteroni - Campus Ecotekne, 73100 Lecce, Italy 4. Multifunctional bioactive magnetic scaffolds with tailored features for bone tissue engineering Teresa Russo1*, Roberto De Santis1, Valentina Peluso2, Antonio Gloria1 1 Institute of Polymers, Composites and Biomaterials (IPCB) – National Research Council of Italy 2 Department of Neurosciences, Reproductive and Odontostomatological Sciences, University of Naples “Federico II”, Naples, Italy 5. Magnetic nanoparticles in the development of polymer scaffolds for medical applications Larissa Stieven Montagna, Ana Paula da Silva, Amanda de Sousa Martinez de Freitas, Ana Paula Lemes* Polymers and Biopolymers Technology Laboratory, (TecPBio), Department of Science and Technology, Federal University of Sao Paulo, São José dos Campos, SP, Brazil 6. Magnetic polymer colloids for ultrasensitive molecular imaging Sundas Riaz1, Sumera Khizar1, Nasir M. Ahmad1* Gul Shahnaz2 Noureddine Lebaz3 Abdelhamid Elaissari3* 1Polymer Research Lab, School of Chemical and Materials Engineering (SCME), National University of Sciences and Technology (NUST), H-12 Sector, Islamabad-44000, Pakistan 2Department of Pharmacy, Faculty of Biological Sciences, Quaid-i-Azam University, Islamabad-45320, Pakistan 3Univ Lyon, University Claude Bernard Lyon-1, CNRS, LAGEPP UMR-5007, 43 boulevard du 11 novembre 1918, F-69100, Villeurbanne, France 7. Iron oxide nanoparticles in anticancer drug delivery and imaging diagnostics Miroslava Nedyalkova1*, Boyan Todorov1, Haruna L. Barazorda-Ccahuanac2, Sergio Madurga3 1 Faculty of Chemistry and Pharmacy, Sofia University „St. Kliment Ohridski”, Sofia, Bulgaria 2 Centro de Investigación en Ingeniería Molecular-CIIM, Universidad Católica de Santa María, Arequipa, Perú 3 Faculty of Chemistry, Barcelona University, Barcelona, Spain 8. Functional addressable magnetic domains and their potential applications in theranostics Sihomara Patricia García-Zepeda1, Jaime Santoyo-Salazar2* 1Toxicology Department, Centro de Investigación y de Estudios Avanzados del Instituto Politécnico Nacional, CINVESTAV-IPN, 07360 Mexico City, Mexico 2*Physics Department, Centro de Investigación y de Estudios Avanzados del Instituto Politécnico Nacional, CINVESTAV-IPN, 07360 Mexico City, Mexico 9. Nuclear/MR magnetic nanoparticle-based probes for multimodal biomedical imaging Eirini Fragogeorgi1,2*, Sophia Sarpaki2, Maritina Rouchota2, Panagiotis Papadimitroulas2 and Maria Georgiou2 1Institute of Nuclear & Radiological Sciences, Technology, Energy & Safety (INRASTES), NCSR ‘‘Demokritos”, Ag. Paraskevi-Athens, Greece 2Bioemission Technology Solutions (BIOEMTECH), Lefkippos Attica Technology Park, NCSR “Demokritos”, Ag. Paraskevi-Athens, Greece Part II. Magnetic Nanoparticles in Alternative Cancer Therapy 10. Magnetic nanoparticles hyperthermia: the past, the present and the future Dawn Blazer, Yohannes Getahun, Ahmed A. El-Gendy*, University of Texas El Paso, Department of Physics, El Paso, TX 79968, USA 11. Drug delivery and magnetic hyperthermia based on surface engineering of magnetic nanoparticles Guilherme N. Lucena1,2, Caio C. dos Santos1, Gabriel C. Pinto1 Bruno E. Amantéa1, Rodolfo D. Piazza1, Miguel Jafelicci Jr1, Rodrigo Fernando C. Marques1,2,3* Laboratory of Magnetic Materials and Colloids, Department of Physical Chemistry, Institute of Chemistry, São Paulo State University (UNESP), BRAZIL 12. Improving magneto-thermal energy conversion efficiency of magnetic fluids through external DC magnetic field induced orientational ordering B. B. Lahiri, Surojit Ranoo, Fouzia Khan, John Philip Smart Materials Section, Corrosion Science and Techonlogy Division, Materials Characterization Group, Metallurgy amd Materials Group, Indira Gandhi Centre for Atomic Research, Kalpakkam, Tamil Nadu, PIN 603102, India 13. Classical Magnetoliposomes vs Current Magnetociclodextrins with Ferrimagnetic Nanoparticle for High Efficiency and Low Toxicity in Alternative Therapy of Cancer by Magnetic/ Superparamagnetic Hyperthermia Costica Caizer1*, Cristina Dehelean2, Codruta Soica2 1*West University of Timisoara, Faculty of Physics, Bv. V. Parvan no. 4, 300223 - Timisoara, Romania; e-mail: costica.caizer@e-uvt.ro 2“Victor Babes” University of Medicine and Pharmacy, Faculty of Pharmacy, P-zza. E. Murgu no. 2, 300041 – Timisoara, Romania 2“Victor Babes” University of Medicine and Pharmacy, Faculty of Pharmacy, P-zza. E. Murgu no. 2, 300041 – Timisoara, Romania 14. Efficiency of energy dissipation in nanomagnets: a theoretical study of AC susceptibility F. Vernay, J.-L. Déjardin, H. Kachkachi* Université de Perpignan via Domitia, Lab. PROMES CNRS UPR8521, Rambla de la Thermodynamique, Tecnosud, 66100 Perpignan, France 15. Magnetic Nanoparticle Relaxation in Biomedical Application: Focus on Simulating Nanoparticle Heating Ulrich M. Engelmann1,2*, Carolyn Shasha3, and Ioana Slabu2 1Department of MedicalEngineering and Applied Mathematics, FH Aachen University of Applied Sciences, Aachen, Germany 2Applied Medical Engineering, Helmholtz Institute, Medical Faculty, RWTH Aachen University,Aachen, Germany 3Department of Physics, University of Washington, Seattle, WA 98195, USA 16. Magnetic Nanoparticles in Alternative Tumors Therapy: Biocompatibility, Toxicity and Safety Compared with Classical Methods Costica Caizer1 and Mahendra Rai2 1West University of Timisoara, Department of Physics, Bd. V. Parvan no. 4, 300223 - Timisoara, Romania 2UGC-Basic Science Research Faculty, Department of Biotechnology, SGB Amravati University, Amravati - 444 602, Maharashtra, India 17. The size, shape and composition design of iron oxide nanoparticles to combine MRI, magnetic hyperthermia and photothermia Barbara Freis1, Geoffrey Cotin1, Francis Perton1 Damien Mertz1, Sylvie Begin-Colin1* Sophie Laurent2,3 Sebastien Boutry2,3 1Université de Strasbourg, CNRS, Institut de Physique et Chimie des Matériaux de Strasbourg, UMR 7504, F-67034 , Strasbourg, France 2Université de Mons, General, Organic and Biomedical Chemistry Unit, NMR and Molecular Imag-ing Laboratory, 7000 , Mons, Belgium 3. Center for Microscopy and Molecular imaging (CMMI), Gosselies, Belgium 18. Magnetic/Superparamagnetic hyperthermia in clinical trials for non-invasive alternative cancer therapy Costica Caizer West University of Timisoara, Department of Physics, Bv. V. Parvan no. 4, 300223 - Timisoara, Romania Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAssembling a great deal of material in one place, this book serves as a valuable guide for chemists and related physical scientists throughout their careers -- covering essential equations, theories, and tools needed for conducting and interpreting contemporary research. Offers a comprehensive and in-depth treatment of the most challenging concepts of chemistryUpdates and revises existing chapters from the prior edition and adds: new chapters on inorganic, organic, and biochemistry; appendices about nuclides and organic reactions; and expanded questions at the end of chaptersHas a complementary website with a solutions manual and PowerPoint presentations for instructorsTable of ContentsPrelims About the companion website Foreword Preface and Philosophy Chapter 1. Fundamental Particles, Fundamental Forces, and Mathematical Tools Chapter 2. Quantum Mechanics Chapter 3. Thermodynamics Chapter 4. Statistical Mechanics Chapter 5. Kinetics, Equilibria, and Electrochemistry Chapter 6. Symmetry Chapter 7. Solid State Physics Chapter 8. Electrical Circuits, Amplifiers, and Computers Chapter 9. Sources, Sensors, and Detection Methods Chapter 10. Instruments Chapter 11. Inorganic Chemistry and Nanomaterials Chapter 12. Organic and Polymer Chemistry and Catalysis Chapter 13. Biochemistry Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a review of the newest methodologies for the characterization and modelling of lightweight materials and structuresAdvanced Multifunctional Lightweight Aerostructures provides an in-depth analysis of the thermal, electrical, and mechanical responses of multi-functional lightweight structures. The authors, noted experts on the topic, address the most recent and innovative methodologies for the characterization and modelling of lightweight materials and discuss various multiscale simulation approaches and nonlinear/structural dynamics methodologies. They present multifunctional materials and structures and offer detailed descriptions of the complex modelling of these structures. The authors divide the text into two sections and demonstrate a keen understanding and awareness of multi-functional lightweight aerostructures by taking unique approaches. They explore multi-disciplinary modelling and characterization alongside benchmark problems and applications, topics that are rarely approached in this field. This important book: Offers thermal, electrical, and mechanical analyses of multi-functional lightweight structuresCovers innovative methodologies for the characterization and modelling of lightweight materials and structuresPresents characterizations of a wide variety of novel materialsConsiders multifunctional novel structures with potential applications in different high-tech industriesDiscusses thermal and mechanical behaviors of some critical parts of aircraftsIncludes efficient and highly accurate methodologies Written for professionals, engineers, researchers, and educators in academia, industrial, and other specialized research institutions, Advanced Multifunctional Lightweight Aerostructures is a much-needed text on the design practices of existing engineering building services and how these methods combine with recent developments.Table of ContentsPreface xii Biographies xv Part I Multi-Disciplinary Modeling and Characterization 1 1 Layer Arrangement Impact on the Electromechanical Performance of a Five-Layer Multifunctional Smart Sandwich Plate 3Rasool Moradi-Dastjerdi and Kamran Behdinan 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Modeling of 5LMSSP 5 1.3 Mesh-Free Solution 10 1.4 Numerical Results 13 1.5 Conclusions 21 2 Heat Transfer Behavior of Graphene-Reinforced Nanocomposite Sandwich Cylinders 25Kamran Behdinan and Rasool Moradi-Dastjerdi 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Modeling of Sandwich Cylinders 27 2.3 Mesh-Free Formulations 30 2.4 Results and Discussion 31 2.5 Conclusions 36 3 Multiscale Methods for Lightweight Structure and Material Characterization 43Vincent Iacobellis and Kamran Behdinan 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Overview of Multiscale Methodologies and Applications 44 3.3 Bridging Cell Method 46 3.4 Applications 48 3.5 Multiscale Modeling of Lightweight Composites 55 3.6 Conclusion 61 4 Characterization of Ultra-High Temperature and Polymorphic Ceramics 67Ali Radhi and Kamran Behdinan 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Crystalline Characterization of UHTCs 69 4.3 Chemical Characterization of a UHTC Composite 71 4.4 Polymeric Ceramic Crystalline Characterization 75 4.5 Multiscale Characterization of the Anatase-Rutile Transformation 78 4.6 Conclusion 85 Part II Multifunctional Lightweight Aerostructure Applications 91 5 Design Optimization of Multifunctional Aerospace Structures 93Mohsen Rahmani and Kamran Behdinan 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Multifunctional Structures 94 5.3 Computational Design and Optimization 95 5.4 Applications 98 5.5 Conclusions 106 6 Dynamic Modeling and Analysis of Nonlinear Flexible Rotors Supported by Viscoelastic Bearings 109Mohammed Khair Al-Solihat and Kamran Behdinan 6.1 Introduction 109 6.2 Dynamic Modeling 110 6.3 Free Vibration Characteristics 114 6.4 Nonlinear Frequency Response 115 6.5 Conclusions 120 7 Modeling and Experimentation of Temperature Calculations for Belt Drive Transmission Systems in the Aviation Industry 123Xingchen Liu and Kamran Behdinan 7.1 Introduction 123 7.2 Analytical-Numerical Thermal Model 125 7.3 Experimental Setup 139 7.4 Results and Discussion 140 7.5 Conclusion 146 8 An Efficient Far-Field Noise Prediction Framework for the Next Generation of Aircraft Landing Gear Designs 151Sultan Alqash and Kamran Behdinan 8.1 Introduction and Background 151 8.2 Modeling and Numerical Method 155 8.3 Implementation of the Multiple Two-Dimensional Simulations Method 163 8.4 Results and Discussion 170 8.5 Summary and Conclusions 179 9 Vibration Transfer Path Analysis of Aeroengines Using Bond Graph Theory 187Seyed Ehsan Mir-Haidari and Kamran Behdinan 9.1 Introduction 187 9.2 Overview of TPA Methodologies 188 9.3 Bond Graph Formulation 194 9.4 Bond Graph Modeling of an Aeroengine 196 9.5 Transmissibility Principle 204 9.6 Bond Graph Transfer Function 204 9.7 Aeroengine Global Transmissibility Formulation 205 9.8 Design Guidelines to Minimize Vibration Transfer 208 9.9 Conclusion 212 10 Structural Health Monitoring of Aeroengines Using Transmissibility and Bond Graph Methodology 215Seyed Ehsan Mir-Haidari and Kamran Behdinan 10.1 Introduction 215 10.2 Fundamentals of Transmissibility Functions 219 10.3 Bond Graphs 220 10.4 Structural Health Monitoring Damage Indicator Factors 223 10.5 Aircraft Aeroengine Parametric Modeling 223 10.6 Results and Discussion 225 10.7 Conclusion 234 References 235 Index 237

Read more less

Book SynopsisLaser Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy (LIBS) Essential resource covering the field of LIBS, with respect to its fundamentals, established and novel applications, and future prospects Laser Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy (LIBS), presents in two comprehensive volumes a thorough discussion of the basic principles of the method, including important recently available data which can lead to a better characterization of the LIBS plasma. This extensive work contains detailed discussions on the lasers, spectrometers, and detectors that can be used for LIBS apparatuses and describes various instrumentation, ranging from basic setups to more advanced configurations. As a modern resource, the work includes the newest advances and capabilities of LIBS instruments, featuring the recent developments of Dual-Pulse LIBS, Femtosecond LIBS, and Micro-LIBS as well as their applications. Throughout, the contributions discuss the analytical capabilities of the method in terms of detection limits, accuracy, and precision of measurements for a variety of samples. Lastly, an extensive range of applications is presented, including food technology, environmental science, nuclear reactors, nanoscience and nanotechnology, and biological and biomedical developments. Sample topics covered within the work include: iagnostics of laser induced plasma (LIP): LIBS plasma and its characteristics, factors affecting the LIBS plasma, methods of enhancing LIBS sensitivity, and LTE/non-LTE plasmasInstrumental developments in LIBS: light collection system and spectral detection systems, handheld LIBS, deep sea LIBS, and industrial sorters and analyzersFemtosecond laser ablation: laser-matter interaction, laser absorption, energy transport, ablation mechanisms and threshold, and plasma characterizationMicro-analysis and LIBS imaging: microjoule laser sources, scaling libs to microjoule energies, micrometer scaling, advanced applications, and future prospects Spectroscopic and analytical scientists working with LIBS will find this wide-ranging reference immensely helpful in developing LIBS instrumentation and applications. Researchers and students in natural sciences and related programs of study will be able to use the work to acquire foundational knowledge on the method and learn about cutting-edge advancements being made in the field.Table of ContentsVolume 1 Preface xix Part I Fundamental Aspects of LIBS and Laser-Induced Plasma 1 1 Nanosecond and Femtosecond Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy: Fundamentals and Applications 3K. M. Muhammed Shameem, Swetapuspa Soumyashree, P. Madhusudhan, Vinitha Nimma, Rituparna Das, Pranav Bhardwaj, Prashant Kumar and Rajesh K. Kushawaha 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 LIBS: ns-LIBS and fs-LIBS 5 1.3 Plasma-Plume Dynamics 10 1.4 Filamentation 14 1.5 Signal-Enhancing Strategies in LIBS 17 1.6 Applications 20 1.7 Summary 21 2 Elementary Processes and Emission Spectra in Laser-Induced Plasma 33V. Gardette, Z. Salajkova, M. Dell’Aglio and A. De Giacomo 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Laser-Ablation Mechanism 33 2.3 Plasma Characteristics and Elementary Processes 35 2.4 Plasma in Thermodynamic Equilibrium 37 2.5 Plasma Emission Features 39 2.6 Conclusion 41 3 Diagnostics of Laser-Induced Plasma 45Charles Ghany, Kyung-Min Lee, Herve K. Sanghapi and Vivek K. Singh 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 LIBS Plasmas and Its Characteristics 46 3.3 Factors Affecting the LIBS Plasma 49 3.4 Methods of Enhancing LIBS Sensitivity 51 3.5 LTE Plasmas and Non-LTE Plasmas 52 3.6 Laser–Plasma Expansion in Gas and Liquids: Modeling and Validation 54 3.7 Chemistry in Laser Plasmas (Biological, Medical, and Isotopic Applications) 57 3.8 Conclusion 58 4 Double and Multiple Pulse LIBS Techniques 65Francesco Poggialini, Asia Botto, Beatrice Campanella, Simona Raneri, Vincenzo Palleschi and Stefano Legnaioli 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Double-Pulse LIBS: Geometries and Configurations 67 4.3 Signal Enhancement in DP-LIBS: Principles and Theory 77 4.4 Applications of DP-LIBS 80 4.5 Conclusions 83 5 Calibration-Free Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 89Jörg Hermann 5.1 Introduction 89 5.2 Validity Conditions of the Physical Model 90 5.3 Methods of Calibration-Free Measurements 98 5.4 Critical Review of Analytical Performance 107 5.5 Conclusion 115 Part II Molecular LIBS and Instrumentation Developments 123 6 Molecular Species Formation in Laser-Produced Plasma 125K. M. Muhammed Shameem, Swetapuspa Soumyashree, P. Madhusudhan, Vinitha Nimma, Rituparna Das, Pranav Bhardwaj and Rajesh K. Kushawaha 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Atmospheric Contribution in LIBS Spectra 127 6.3 CN and C2 Molecular Formation in LIP 127 6.4 Summary 134 7 Recent Developments in Standoff Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 137Linga Murthy Narlagiri and Venugopal Rao Soma 7.1 Introduction 137 7.2 Laser Systems Used 137 7.3 Instrumentation in Standoff LIBS 138 7.4 Gated and Non-Gated CCDs/Spectrometers 139 7.5 Experimental Setup 139 7.6 Reviews on Standoff LIBS 140 7.7 Studies in Standoff LIBS 140 7.8 Variants in Standoff LIBS 146 7.9 Machine-Learning for Data Analysis in Standoff Mode 149 7.10 Advancements in Standoff LIBS Methods 150 7.11 Ongoing Study at ACRHEM, University of Hyderabad 153 7.12 Conclusions and Outlook 158 8 Nanoparticle-Enhanced Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 165Zita Salajková, Marcella Dell’Aglio, Vincent Gardette and Alessandro De Giacomo 8.1 Introduction 165 8.2 Fundamentals 166 8.3 Applications 174 8.4 Conclusion 179 9 Nanoparticle-Enhanced Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for Sensing Applications 183Linga Murthy Narlagiri and Venugopal Rao Soma 9.1 Introduction 183 9.2 Previous Reviews 183 9.3 Experimental Setup 184 9.4 Enhancement Via Different Conditions 185 9.5 Perspectives on the Mechanism(s) of Enhancement 191 9.6 Variations in NE-LIBS 199 9.7 Beyond NE-LIBS 200 9.8 Further Application of Nanoparticles in LIBS 202 9.9 Ongoing Study in the Lab 203 9.10 Conclusions 204 Part III Data Analysis and Chemometrics in LIBS 211 10 Full-Spectrum Multivariate Analysis of LIBS Data 213Catherine E. McManus and Nancy J. McMillan 10.1 Introduction 213 10.2 Full-Spectrum Multivariate Analysis 215 10.3 Analysis of Geologic Samples 216 10.4 Identification of Pharmaceuticals 218 10.5 Conclusions 224 11 Chemometrics for Data Analysis 229Manoj Kumar Gundawar and Rajendhar Junjuri 11.1 Introduction 229 11.2 Data 230 11.3 Machine Learning 231 11.4 Classification of the Data 236 11.5 Conclusion 237 12 Chemometric Processing of LIBS Data 241J. El Haddad, A. Harhira, E. Képeš, J. Vrábel, J. Kaiser and P. Poøízka 12.1 Introduction 241 12.2 Exploratory Analysis Methods for Visualization 243 12.3 Quantitative Analysis Methods 249 12.4 Classification 254 12.5 Data Preprocessing 257 12.6 Validation and Generalization 261 12.7 Conclusions 268 13 How Chemometrics Allowed the Development of LIBS in the Quantification and Detection of Isotopes: A Case Study of Uranium 277Carlos A. Rinaldi, Norberto Boggio and Juan Vorobioff 13.1 Introduction 277 13.2 The LIBS Method 278 13.3 Detection and Quantification 279 13.4 Chemometrics Solution 279 13.5 Conclusions 285 14 Application of Multivariate Analysis to the Problem of the Provenance of Gem Stones (Ruby, Sapphire, Emerald, Diamond) 287Nancy J. McMillan and Catherine E. McManus 14.1 Introduction 287 14.2 Gem Mineral Genesis 289 14.3 Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy and Multivariate Analysis 293 14.4 Gem Provenance Studies 294 14.5 Conclusions 300 15 Machine Learning in the Context of Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 305E. Képeš, J. Vrábel, J. El Haddad, A. Harhira, P. Poøízka and J. Kaiser 15.1 Introduction 305 15.2 Fundamental Concepts of Machine Learning 306 15.3 Decision Trees and Related Ensemble Methods 307 15.4 Support Vector Machines 311 15.5 Artificial Neural Networks 314 15.6 Unsupervised Learning 318 15.7 Self-Organizing Maps 319 15.8 Concluding Remarks 320 16 Analysis of LIBS Data from Coal and Biomass Using Artificial Intelligence Techniques 331Carlos E. Romero and Robert De Saro 16.1 Introduction 331 16.2 LIBS Coal and Biomass Laboratory Experimental Results 334 16.3 Application of Artificial Intelligence Techniques to LIBS Spectral Data 337 16.4 Conclusions 349 Part IV Special Topics and Comparison with Other Methods 353 17 Lasing in Optically Pumped Laser-Induced Plasma 355Lev Nagli, Michael Gaft and Yosef Raichlin 17.1 Introduction 355 17.2 Experimental Setups and Samples 357 17.3 Lasing Effects in a LIP Plume; 13 th Group Elements 360 17.4 Polarization of the LIPLs: the UV–VIS Generation 370 17.5 External Magnetic Field Effects 376 17.6 Fourteenth GROUP Elements LIPL (Ground-State Configuration 4s2np23P0 , n = 4,5,6) 377 17.7 LIPLs Tunability 379 17.8 Conclusions 382 18 LIBS Analysis of Optical Surfaces and Thin Films 387Christoph Gerhard and Jörg Hermann 18.1 Introduction 387 18.2 Sensitivity-Improved Calibration-Free LIBS 389 18.3 Analysis of Optical Materials and Surfaces 392 18.4 Elemental Analysis of Thin Films 395 18.5 Conclusion 407 19 LIBS Detection of Rare-Earth Elements and Comparison with Other Techniques 415Yashashchandra Dwivedi 19.1 Introduction 415 19.2 Importance of Rare Earth 416 19.3 Technological Challenges 417 19.4 Detection of RE Using LIBS 418 19.5 Detection of RE Using Other Techniques 423 20 Marine Biofouling Analysis by Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 431Della Thomas 20.1 Introduction 431 20.2 Biofouling Sample Preparation 431 20.3 Experimental LIBS Setup 432 20.4 Analysis and Discussion 432 20.5 Biomineralization and Elemental Mapping Studies 437 20.6 LIBS Spectra for Biofouling Sample 437 20.7 LIBS Spatial Elemental Mapping 440 20.8 Conclusion 444 21 Hyphenated LIBS Techniques 447U. K. Adarsh, V. S. Dhanada, Santhosh Chidangil and V. K. Unnikrishnan 21.1 Introduction 447 21.2 Why Hyphenate Spectroscopic Methods? 449 21.2.1 Significance 449 21.2.2 Developmental Strategies 451 21.2.3 Hyphenated LIBS Systems 452 21.3 Conclusion and Future Directions 457 22 Comparison of LIBS with Other Analytical Techniques 461Muhammad Aslam Baig, Rizwan Ahmed and Zeshan Adeel Umar 22.1 Introduction 461 22.2 Quantitative Analysis by LIBS 462 22.3 Laser-Ablation Time-of-Flight Mass Spectrometry 476 22.4 Conclusion 482 23 Combining Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy and Raman Spectroscopy: Instrumentation and Applications 487Vasily N. Lednev 23.1 Introduction 487 23.2 Instrumentation 489 23.3 Applications 502 23.4 Conclusions 520 Acknowledgments 521 References 521 Volume 2 Preface xix Part V Novel Applications of LIBS 531 24 Application of LIBS to the Analysis of Metals 533Francesco Poggialini, Asia Botto, Beatrice Campanella, Vincenzo Palleschi, Simona Raneri and Stefano Legnaioli 25 LIBS Analysis of Metals Under Extreme Conditions 551Mohamed Abdel-Harith and Raghda Hosny El-Saeid 26 LIBS Applications to Liquids and Solids in Liquids 559Chet R. Bhatt, Daniel Hartzler, Jinesh Jain and Dustin L. McIntyre 27 Coal Analysis by Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 581Shunchun Yao 28 Application of LIBS to Terrestrial Geological Research 593Giorgio S. Senesi and Russell S. Harmon 29 Plastic Waste Identification Using Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 615Rajendhar Junjuri and Manoj Kumar Gundawar 30 Cultural Heritage Applications of Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 623Duixiong Sun and Yaopeng Ying 31 Nuclear Applications of Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 643Gábor Galbács and Éva Kovács-Széles 32 Applications of Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for Trace Detection in Explosives 667Qianqian Wang and Geer Teng 33 Geochemical Fingerprinting Using Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 683Pengju Xing and Zhenli Zhu 34 Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for the Analysis of Chemical and Biological Hazards 701Lianbo Guo 35 Development of a Simple, Low-Cost, and On-Site Deployable LIBS Instrument for the Quantitative Analysis of Edible Salts 715Sandeep Kumar, Hyang Kim, Jeong Park, Kyung-Sik Ham, Song-Hee Han, Sang-Ho Nam and Yonghoon Lee 36 Bioimaging in Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 729Pavlina Modlitbová, Pavel Poøízka and Jozef Kaiser 37 Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for the Identification of Bacterial Pathogens 745Somenath Ghatak, Gaurav Sharma, Prashant Kumar Rai, Suman Yadav and Geeta Watal 38 Phase-Selective Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy of Metal-Oxide Nanoaerosols 755Gang Xiong and Stephen D. Tse 39 Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for the Analysis of Cultivated Soil 767R. K. Aldakheel, M. A. Gondal and M. A. Almessiere 40 Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy in Food Sciences 781J. Naozuka and A. P. Oliveira 41 Capabilities and Limitations of Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for Analyzing Food Products 807R. K. Aldakheel, M. A. Gondal and M. A. Almessiere 42 Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy and Its Application Perspectives in Industry and Recycling 823Reinhard Noll 43 Development of Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy for Application to Space Exploration 851Zhenzhen Wang and Han Luo 44 Femtosecond Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy of Complex Materials 863Mathi Pandiyathuray 45 Application of LIBS for the Failure Characteristics Prediction of Heat-Resistant Steel 883Meirong Dong, Junbin Cai, Shunchun Yao and Jidong Lu 46 Scope for Future Development in Laser-Induced Breakdown Spectroscopy 939Yoshihiro Deguchi Index 947

Read more less

Book SynopsisSMART SYSTEMS FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS The prime objective of this book is to provide an insight into the role and advancements of artificial intelligence in electrical systems and future challenges. The book covers a broad range of topics about AI from a multidisciplinary point of view, starting with its history and continuing on to theories about artificial vs. human intelligence, concepts, and regulations concerning AI, human-machine distribution of power and control, delegation of decisions, the social and economic impact of AI, etc. The prominent role that AI plays in society by connecting people through technologies is highlighted in this book. It also covers key aspects of various AI applications in electrical systems in order to enable growth in electrical engineering. The impact that AI has on social and economic factors is also examined from various perspectives. Moreover, many intriguing aspects of AI techniques in different domains are covered such as e-learning, healthc

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsForeword xxi Preface xxiii Part I: Nano-Flotillas Traversing in the Vein as Carriers to Deliver Theranostics 1 1 Diagnostic and Therapeutic Systems Using Nanomaterials 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Nanodiagnostic Agents 4 1.2.1 Bio-Barcode Assay (BCA) 5 1.2.2 Cantilever Beam 5 1.2.3 Carbon Dots/Carbon Quantum Dots 8 1.2.3.1 CD as Bioimaging Agent 9 1.2.3.2 CD as Sensor 10 1.2.4 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 11 1.2.4.1 Diagnostic Equipment Using CNT 13 1.2.5 Dendrimers 26 1.2.5.1 Types of Dendrimers 27 1.2.5.2 Applications of Dendrimers 28 1.2.6 DNA 30 1.2.7 Nanocrystals/Quantum Dots (QDs) 33 1.2.7.1 Applications of Nanocrystals/Quantum Dots (QDs) 34 1.2.8 Nanoparticles as Diagnostic Tool 35 1.2.8.1 Inorganic/Metal Nanoparticles 35 1.2.8.2 Polymeric Nanoparticles (PNPs) 43 1.2.9 Nanorobotics 45 1.2.10 Nanoshells 47 1.2.11 Nanowires 48 1.2.12 Optical Tweezers 48 1.2.13 Serum Albumin 50 1.3 Summary 51 References 51 2 Nano Trojan Horses for Delivery of Peptides and Protein Drugs 57 Roopa Dharmatti 2.1 Introduction 57 2.2 Peptides 58 2.2.1 Cell-Penetrating Peptides 61 2.2.1.1 CPP and NP Surface Conjugation Mechanism 62 2.2.1.2 CPP-NP Conjugates in Cancer 64 2.2.1.3 CPP-NP Conjugates in Inflammation 65 2.2.1.4 CPP-NPs Conjugates in Central Nervous System Disorders 66 2.2.2 Antimicrobial Peptides (AMPs) 66 2.2.2.1 Nanomedicines for Antimicrobial Peptides Delivery 68 2.2.3 Peptide Toxins 70 2.2.3.1 Action Mechanism of Peptide Toxins 71 2.2.3.2 Therapeutic Applications of Peptide Toxins from Various Sources 71 2.2.4 Modifications of Natural Peptides for NP and Drug Design 77 2.3 Role of Nanoparticles in Peptide Drug Delivery 77 2.3.1 Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide (VIP) NPs for Diagnostics and for Controlled and Targeted Drug Delivery 79 2.3.1.1 NPs for VIP Drug Delivery 80 2.3.1.2 Structural Basis for Neuropeptide VIP-Targeted Drug Delivery Aided by Nanotechnology 82 2.4 Protein 85 2.4.1 Protein and Peptide Drug Conjugates 86 2.4.1.1 Protein-Drug Conjugates 86 2.4.1.2 Strategies for Chemical Conjugation 90 2.5 Role of Nanoparticles (NPs) in Protein Drug Delivery 96 2.5.1 Liposomes 96 2.5.2 Nanoparticles (NPs) Made from Polymer 97 2.5.3 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 99 2.5.4 Other Metal Nanoparticles (NPs) 100 2.6 Summary 102 References 102 3 Biomimetic Nanomaterials as Smart Scaffolds for Tissue Regeneration 115 3.1 Introduction 115 3.1.1 Concept of Tissue Engineering (TE) 116 3.1.2 A Brief Look at the Type of Tissue-Specific Stem Cells Being Engineered for Tissue Regeneration 117 3.1.3 Growth Factor 119 3.2 Scaffold 119 3.2.1 Basic Requirements for Scaffold 120 3.2.1.1 Biocompatibility of Scaffold Material 120 3.2.1.2 Biodegradability of Scaffold Material 121 3.2.1.3 Mechanical Properties of Scaffold Material 121 3.2.1.4 Porosity in Scaffold Architecture 121 3.2.1.5 Surface Chemistry of Scaffold 121 3.2.2 Biological Scaffold Fabrication Techniques 122 3.2.2.1 Conventional Fabrication Techniques 122 3.2.2.2 Rapid Prototyping (RP) Technique or Solid Free-From Fabrication Technique 125 3.2.2.3 Decellularization 128 3.2.2.4 Tissue Vascularization and Integration 129 3.2.2.5 3D Bioprinting or Cell Printing 129 3.2.2.6 Crosslinking of Hydrogel 132 3.3 Biomaterials for the Fabrication of Scaffold 132 3.3.1 Natural Biomaterials and Extracellular Matrix Material (ECM) Used for Scaffolding 132 3.3.1.1 Collagen 133 3.3.1.2 Fibrin 134 3.3.1.3 Gelatin 136 3.3.1.4 Silk Fiber 137 3.3.1.5 Proteoglycan (PG) 137 3.3.1.6 Hyaluronan or Hyaluronic Acid (HA) 138 3.3.1.7 Chitosan 138 3.3.1.8 Alginate 139 3.3.1.9 Silica 140 3.3.1.10 Poly(Ethylene Glycol) (PEG) 140 3.3.2 Synthetic Biodegradable Polymer Biomaterials Used for Scaffolding 141 3.3.2.1 Poly(L-lactic Acid) (PLA) Scaffold 142 3.3.2.2 Polyglycolide (PGA) Scaffold 142 3.3.2.3 Poly(Lactic-co-Glycolic Acid) (PLGA) Scaffold 142 3.3.2.4 Polycaprolactone (PCL) Scaffold 143 3.3.2.5 Hydrogel 143 3.3.3 Ceramics 143 3.3.4 Functionality of Types of Scaffolds 144 3.3.4.1 Injectable Material for Scaffolds or ‘Injectabone’ 144 3.3.4.2 Scaffold as Delivery System for Growth Factor and Drugs 144 3.3.4.3 Supercritical Carbon Dioxide Processing of Polymers 145 3.3.4.4 Customized Scaffold via 3D Printing 145 3.3.4.5 Plasma Modification of Scaffold Surfaces 146 3.4 Nanomaterials for Versatile Scaffolds 146 3.4.1 Carbon-Based Nanoparticle Carbon Nanotubes as Versatile Scaffolds 148 3.4.2 Metal Nanoparticles 152 3.4.2.1 Tantalum (Ta) 153 3.4.2.2 Magnesium and Its Alloys 153 3.4.2.3 Titanium and Its Alloys 154 3.4.2.4 Silver Nanoparticles (AgNPs) 154 3.4.2.5 Aluminum Nanoparticles (AlNPs) 155 3.4.2.6 Gold Nanoparticles (AuNPs) 156 3.4.2.7 Copper Nanoparticles (CuNPs) 157 3.4.2.8 Iron (Fe), Iron Oxide and Its Conjugate Nanoparticles 158 3.4.2.9 Nickel Nanoparticles (NiNPs) 159 3.4.2.10 Zirconium Nanoparticles (ZrNPs) 160 3.4.3 Polymeric Nanoparticles and Nanofibers 160 3.4.4 Lipid-Based Nanoparticles 161 3.4.4.1 Liposomes 162 3.4.5 Ceramic Nanoparticles (CNPs) 163 3.4.5.1 Bioactive Ceramic Nanoparticles 164 3.4.5.2 Bioinert Ceramic Nanoparticles 164 3.4.5.3 Bioresorbable Ceramic Nanoparticles 164 3.4.6 Natural Extracellular Matrix (ECM) 165 3.5 Application of Scaffold for Various Tissue Regeneration and Incorporation of Nanomaterials 165 3.5.1 Scaffold for Bone Tissue Regeneration 166 3.5.2 Scaffold for Cartilage Tissue Regeneration 170 3.5.3 Scaffold for Cardiovascular Tissue Regeneration 172 3.5.4 Scaffold for Liver Tissue Regeneration 173 3.5.5 Scaffold for Muscle Tissues Regeneration 175 3.5.6 Scaffold for Nerve Tissue Regeneration 176 3.5.7 Scaffold for Skin Tissue Regeneration 180 3.5.8 Scaffold for Tendon and Ligament Tissue Regeneration 183 3.6 Considerations for Manufacturing a Scaffold at Commercial Level 186 3.7 Conclusion 187 References 187 Part II: The Cardinal Role of Biomedical Nanotechnology 209 4 Nanodiagnostics and Nanotherapeutics: A Powerful Tool for Ablation of Cancer 211 4.1 Introduction 211 4.2 Molecular Diagnostics 212 4.2.1 Radioimmunoassay (RIA) 215 4.2.2 Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA) 215 4.2.3 SDS-Page and Western Blot 216 4.2.4 Immunoprecipitation (IP) 217 4.2.5 Immunofluorescence 218 4.2.6 Immunoelectron Microscopy 218 4.2.7 Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR) 218 4.3 Radiological Diagnostics for Cancer 219 4.3.1 Computerized Tomography (CT) Scan 219 4.3.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) 219 4.3.3 Positron Emission Tomography (PET) 220 4.4 Biopsy 222 4.5 Nanodiagnostics for Cancer 223 4.5.1 Brain Cancer 224 4.5.1.1 Brain Cancer and Nanotechnology 226 4.5.2 Breast Cancer 228 4.5.2.1 Breast Cancer and Nanodiagnostic 230 4.5.3 Colon/Colorectal Cancer 230 4.5.3.1 Colon/Colorectal Cancer and Nanodiagnostic 231 4.5.4 Liver Cancer or Hepatocellular Carcinoma (HCC) 233 4.5.4.1 Liver Cancer and Nanotechnology 234 4.5.5 Lung Cancer 239 4.5.5.1 Lung Cancer and Nanotechnology 240 4.5.6 Melanoma and Skin Cancer 242 4.5.6.1 Melanoma and Nanotechnology 244 4.5.7 Oral Cancer 246 4.5.7.1 Oral Cancer and Nanotechnology 247 4.5.8 Ovarian Cancer 248 4.5.8.1 Ovarian Cancer and Nanotechnology 249 4.5.9 Pancreatic Cancer 251 4.5.9.1 Pancreatic Cancer and Nanotechnology 252 4.5.10 Prostate Cancer 255 4.5.10.1 Prostate Cancer and Nanotechnology 257 4.5.11 Renal Cancer/Kidney Cancer 259 4.5.11.1 Renal Cancer and Nanotechnology 261 4.5.12 Urinary Bladder Cancer 261 4.5.12.1 Urinary Bladder Cancer and Nanotechnology 262 4.6 Summary 264 References 265 5 Genetic Diseases and Nanotechnology-Based Theranostics 277 5.1 Introduction 277 5.2 Nanotechnologies and Microchips in Genetic Diseases 279 5.3 Nanotechnology and Gene Therapy for Genetic Disease 279 5.3.1 Diabetic Retinopathy (DR) 281 5.3.2 Some Diseases Successfully Treated with Nanotechnology + Gene Therapy 282 5.4 Gene Silencing Therapy 284 5.5 Ribonucleic Acid (RNA) Therapy and Nanotechnology 286 5.6 Nanoparticles-Based Therapies for Various Chromosomal Disorders 287 5.6.1 Down Syndrome 287 5.6.1.1 Mosaic Down Syndrome 287 5.6.1.2 Translocation Down Syndrome 288 5.6.1.3 Klinefelter Syndrome (47,XXY) 288 5.6.1.4 Turner Syndrome 288 5.6.1.5 Williams Syndrome 288 5.6.1.6 Cri du Chat Syndrome 289 5.6.2 Single-Gene Disorder 289 5.6.2.1 Niemann-Pick Type C1 Disease (NPC1) 289 5.6.2.2 Cystic Fibrosis 290 5.6.2.3 Galactosemia 291 5.6.2.4 Severe Combined Immunodeficiency (SCID) 292 5.6.2.5 Sickle Cell Disease (SCD) 292 5.6.2.6 Huntington’s Disease (HD) 293 5.6.2.7 Tay-Sachs Disease 294 5.6.3 Multifactorial Disorders 295 5.6.3.1 Thalassemia 295 5.6.3.2 Mitochondrial Disease 296 5.7 Summary 299 References 299 6 The Role of Biomedical Nanotechnology in CNS and Neurological Disorders 303 6.1 Introduction 303 6.2 Parkinson’s Disease 304 6.2.1 Nanotheranostic for Parkinson’s Disease (PD) 306 6.3 Alzheimer’s Disease 309 6.3.1 Nanotheranostic for Alzheimer’s Disease 312 6.4 Epilepsy/Seizure Disorder 316 6.4.1 Nanotheranostic for Epilepsy 318 6.5 Schizophrenia 319 6.5.1 Nanotheranostic for Schizophrenia 320 6.6 Summary 323 References 324 7 Nanotechnology-Based Theranostics for Fighting Infectious Diseases 329 7.1 Introduction 329 7.2 Diseases Caused by Prions 333 7.2.1 Nanotheranostic for Diseases Caused by Prions 334 7.3 Diseases Caused by Virus 336 7.3.1 HIV/AIDS (Human Immunodeficiency Virus/Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome) and Nanotheranostic 339 7.3.2 Hepatitis C Virus and Nanotheranostic 341 7.3.3 Dengue Virus and Nanotheranostic 344 7.3.4 Polio Virus and Nanotheranostic 347 7.3.5 Meningitis-Causing Virus and Nanotheranostic 349 7.3.6 Herpes-Causing Virus and Nanotheranostic 351 7.3.7 Influenza (Flu)-Causing Virus and Nanotheranostic 354 7.3.8 COVID-19 (Coronavirus) Nanotheranostic 357 7.4 Diseases Caused by Bacteria 362 7.4.1 Nanotheranostics for Diseases Caused by Bacteria 376 7.4.1.1 Antibacterial Nanoparticles, Nanoantibiotics and Nanotechnology 376 7.4.1.2 Nano-Strategies to Fight Multidrug-Resistant (MDR) Bacteria 376 7.4.1.3 Theranostics to Combat Biofilms of Bacteria 379 7.4.1.4 Theranostics for Bloodstream Infection 381 7.4.1.5 Nanoparticles for Drug Delivery 381 7.4.1.6 Modulation of Immune Response by Nanoparticles for Efficient Vaccination 382 7.5 Diseases Caused by Fungi 382 7.5.1 Nanotheranostic for Diseases Caused by Fungi 385 7.5.1.1 Nanotechnology for Cutaneous Fungal Infection Therapy 385 7.5.1.2 Nanotechnology for Invasive Mycoses Therapy 386 7.5.1.3 Nanotechnology for Ocular Mycoses Therapy 388 7.6 Diseases Caused by Parasitic Protozoa 389 7.6.1 Nanotheranostics for Diseases Caused by Parasitic Protozoa 393 7.6.1.1 Leishmaniasis, Chagas Disease and African Trypanosomiasis 394 7.6.1.2 Malaria 395 7.6.1.3 Amebiasis 396 7.6.1.4 Giardiasis 396 7.7 Diseases Caused by Helminths 397 7.7.1 Nanotheranostic for Diseases Caused by Parasitic Helminths 399 7.7.1.1 Nanotherapeutics and Nematodes (Roundworms) 399 7.7.1.2 Nanotherapeutics and Trematodes (Flatworms) 401 7.7.1.3 Nanotherapeutics and Cestodes (Tapeworms) 402 7.8 Summary 403 References 403 8 Nanotheranostics for Cardiovascular Diseases 419 8.1 Introduction 419 8.1.1 The Human Heart 419 8.1.2 Blood Vessels 419 8.1.3 Heart or Cardiovascular Diseases 421 8.1.4 Diseases of the Blood Vessels 423 8.1.5 Diagnostics and Therapeutics of Cardiovascular Disease 425 8.2 Nanotheranostics for Cardiovascular Diseases 426 8.2.1 Nanodiagnostics for Cardiovascular Disease 427 8.2.2 Nanotherapeutics for Cardiovascular Disease 429 8.2.2.1 Liposome NP for Cardiovascular Therapy 430 8.2.2.2 Polymeric Nanoparticles for Cardiovascular Therapy 431 8.2.2.3 Micelle NP for Cardiovascular Therapy 432 8.2.2.4 Dendrimers for Cardiovascular Therapy 434 8.2.2.5 Gel Nanoparticles for Cardiovascular Therapy 435 8.2.2.6 Metal Nanoparticles for Cardiovascular Therapy 435 8.2.2.7 Nanocoated Stents for Coronary Artery Bypass Graft (CABG), Percutaneous Transluminal Coronary Angioplasty (PTCA) and Percutaneous Coronary Intervention (PCI) 436 8.2.2.8 Nano Patch and Scaffold for Cardiovascular Disease 436 8.2.2.9 Suitability of Carbon Nanotubes for Cardiovascular Therapy 438 8.3 Summary 439 References 440 9 Role of Nanotechnology in Combatting Disease and Disorders of Ophthalmology 445 9.1 Introduction 445 9.2 Structure and Anatomy of the Human Eye 445 9.3 Eye Diseases and Disorders 449 9.3.1 Diseases and Disorders of Accessory Structures 449 9.3.1.1 Dry Eye 449 9.3.1.2 Conjunctivitis 450 9.3.1.3 Blepharitis/Blepharoptosis (Ptosis) 450 9.3.1.4 Hordeolum (Stye) 450 9.3.1.5 Chalazion (Meibomian Cyst) 451 9.3.1.6 Entropion 451 9.3.1.7 Ectropion 451 9.3.2 Diseases and Disorders of Fibrous Tunic 451 9.3.2.1 Keratoconus 451 9.3.2.2 Refractive Errors 452 9.3.3 Diseases and Disorders of Vascular Tunic 453 9.3.3.1 Uveitis 453 9.3.4 Diseases and Disorders of Nervous Tunic 454 9.3.4.1 Color Blindness 454 9.3.4.2 Retinal Detachment 454 9.3.4.3 Diabetic Retinopathy (DR) 456 9.3.4.4 Age-Related Macular Degeneration (AMD) 457 9.3.5 Diseases and Disorders of Interior Eyeball 457 9.3.5.1 Glaucoma 457 9.3.5.2 Cataract 459 9.3.5.3 Floater 461 9.3.6 Diseases and Disorders of Cornea and Uveal Tract 461 9.3.6.1 Pterygium 461 9.3.6.2 Keratitis 462 9.3.6.3 Scleritis 462 9.3.6.4 Iritis 463 9.3.7 Muscular Disorders 463 9.3.7.1 Nystagmus 463 9.3.7.2 Strabismus (Crossed Eyes) 463 9.4 Blindness 463 9.4.1 Trachoma 464 9.5 Nanotherapy for Ocular Diseases and Disorders 464 9.5.1 Nanotechnology for Regenerative Ophthalmology 465 9.5.1.1 Nanoscaffolds for Retinal Tissue Regeneration 466 9.5.1.2 Nanoscaffolds for Corneal Tissue Regeneration 468 9.5.2 Nanomaterials as Gene Delivery Devices to Reprogram Cells for Ocular Regeneration 470 9.5.2.1 Lipoplexes: Liposome-Protamine-DNA (LPD) Nanocomplexes 471 9.5.2.2 Polyplexes 471 9.5.2.3 Mesoporous Nanoparticles 472 9.5.2.4 Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Nanocrystals 472 9.5.2.5 NanoScript Nanoparticle 472 9.5.2.6 Self-Assembling DNA and Magnetic Nanoparticles 473 9.5.3 Nanomaterials as Immunomodulator in Ocular Regeneration 473 9.6 Glaucoma: Potential Implications of Nanotechnology and Nanomedicine 475 9.6.1 Drug Delivery System for Arresting Glaucoma 475 9.7 Cataract: Potential Implications of Nanotechnology and Nanomedicine 480 9.7.1 Nanoscaffolds for Lens Regeneration (Cataract) 480 9.7.2 Nanofiber-Based Hydrogel 481 9.8 Uveitis (Eye Inflammation) Therapy by Nanozyme (Superoxide Dismutase 1) 482 9.9 Contact Lenses for Ocular Theranostic 482 9.10 Nanodiagnostic for Ocular Diseases and Disorders 483 9.11 Summary and Future Perspective 484 References 485 10 Use of Nanotechnology in Dentistry 493 10.1 Introduction 493 10.1.1 Structure of Human Teeth 493 10.1.2 Types of Human Teeth 494 10.2 Diseases and Disorders of Teeth 495 10.2.1 Plaque Formation 495 10.2.2 Caries (Cavities) 496 10.2.3 Periodontal Disease 496 10.2.3.1 Periodontitis 497 10.2.3.2 Gingivitis 497 10.2.4 Trench Mouth 497 10.2.5 Thrush 497 10.2.6 Periapical Abscess (Dentoalveolar Abscess) 498 10.2.7 Malocclusion 498 10.2.8 Dry Mouth 498 10.2.9 Herpetic Gingivostomatitis 498 10.2.10 Mumps 499 10.2.11 Mouth Ulcer 499 10.2.12 Stained Teeth 500 10.2.13 Hyperdontia (Extra Teeth) 500 10.3 Nanotheranostics Used in Dentistry 500 10.3.1 Nanotechnology for Diagnosis 501 10.3.1.1 Nanocantilevers for Diagnostics 503 10.3.1.2 Nanopores/Porous Nanoparticles for Diagnostics 503 10.3.1.3 Nanotubes for Diagnostics 503 10.3.1.4 Quantum Dots (QD) for Diagnostics 503 10.3.1.5 Nanoelectromechanical Systems (NEMS) for Diagnostics 504 10.3.1.6 Lab-on-a-Chip or Biochips and Salivary Biomarkers for Diagnostics 504 10.3.1.7 Oral Fluid Nanosensor Test (OFNASET) for Diagnostics 505 10.3.1.8 Nanorobots or Dentifrobots for Diagnostics 506 10.3.1.9 Digital Dental Imaging for Diagnostics 507 10.3.2 Nanomaterials Used in Dental Therapeutics 507 10.3.2.1 Organic Nanomaterials for Therapeutics 507 10.3.2.2 Inorganic Nanomaterials for Therapeutics 508 10.3.2.3 Nanocomposites for Therapeutics 509 10.3.2.4 Carbon-Based Nanomaterials for Therapeutics 511 10.3.2.5 Nonsolution (Nano Adhesive) for Therapeutics 511 10.3.2.6 Nano Light-Curing Glass Ionomer Restorative 511 10.3.2.7 Nanoneedles 512 10.3.3 Role of Nanotechnology in Dental Tissue Engineering 512 10.3.3.1 Nanotechnology in Bone Grafting/Regeneration and Oral Maxillofacial Surgery 514 10.3.3.2 Nanotechnology for Dental Pulp Regeneration 514 10.3.3.3 Nanostructures and Enamel Tissues Engineering/Restoration 515 10.3.3.4 Nanotechnology and Nerve Regeneration 515 10.3.4 Bio-Nanofunctionalized Surface of Dental Implants 517 10.3.4.1 Prosthodontics and Nanotechnology 518 10.3.5 Nanomaterials for Periodontal Drug Delivery 520 10.3.6 Endodontics 522 10.3.7 Nanoanesthesia 524 10.3.8 Nanotechnology and Dental Disease Prevention 524 10.3.8.1 Nano Toothbrush 525 10.3.8.2 Nano-Modified Toothpaste and Mouthwash 525 10.3.8.3 Nanomaterials for Prevention of Caries 526 10.3.8.4 Nanomaterials for Prevention of Periodontal Disease 530 10.3.9 Antimicrobial Photodynamic Therapy (APDT) 531 10.4 Conclusion 534 References 535 Index 545

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnsteady Aerodynamics A comprehensive overview of unsteady aerodynamics and its applications The study of unsteady aerodynamics goes back a century and has only become more significant as aircraft become increasingly sophisticated, fly faster, and their structures are lighter and more flexible. Progress in the understanding of flow physics, computing power and techniques, and modelling technologies has led to corresponding progress in unsteady aerodynamics, with a wide range of methods currently used to predict the performance of engineering structures under unsteady conditions. Unsteady Aerodynamics offers a comprehensive and systematic overview of the application of potential and vortex methods to the subject. Beginning with an introduction to the fundamentals of unsteady flow, it then discusses the modelling of attached and separated, incompressible and compressible flows around two-dimensional and three-dimensional bodies. The result is an essential resource for design and simulation in aerospace engineering. Unsteady Aerodynamics readers will also find: MATLAB examples and exercises throughout, with codes and solutions on an accompanying websiteDetailed discussion of most classes of unsteady phenomena, including flapping flight, transonic flow, dynamic stall, flow around bluff bodies and moreValidation of theoretical and numerical predictions using comparisons to experimental data from the literature Unsteady Aerodynamics is ideal for researchers, engineers, and advanced students in aerospace engineering.Table of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why Potential and Vortex Methods? 2 1.2 Outline of This Book 3 2 Unsteady Flow Fundamentals 5 2.1 Introduction 5 2.2 From Navier–Stokes to Unsteady Incompressible Potential Flow 5 2.2.1 Irrotational Flow 6 2.2.2 Laplace's and Bernoulli's Equations 7 2.2.3 Motion in an Incompressible, Inviscid, Irrotational Fluid 9 2.3 Incompressible Potential Flow Solutions 14 2.3.1 Green's Third Identity 21 2.3.2 Solutions in Two Dimensions 40 2.4 From Navier–Stokes to Unsteady Compressible Potential Flow 42 2.4.1 The Compressible Bernoulli Equation 42 2.4.2 The Full Potential Equation 44 2.4.3 The Transonic Small Disturbance Equation 46 2.4.4 The Linearised Small Disturbance Equation 47 2.4.5 The Compressible Unsteady Pressure Coefficient 49 2.4.6 Motion in a Compressible, Inviscid, Irrotational Fluid 52 2.5 Subsonic Linearised Potential Flow Solutions 53 2.6 Supersonic Linearised Potential Flow Solutions 61 2.7 Vorticity and Circulation 66 2.7.1 Solutions of the Vorticity Transport Equations 71 2.7.2 Vorticity-Moment and Kutta–Joukowski Theorems 76 2.7.3 TheWake and the Kutta Condition 77 2.8 Concluding Remarks 79 3 Analytical Incompressible 2D Models 83 3.1 Introduction 83 3.2 Steady Thin Airfoil Theory 83 3.3 Fundamentals ofWagner and Theodorsen Theory 93 3.3.1 Flow Induced by the Source Distribution 97 3.3.2 Flow Induced by the Vortex Distribution 101 3.3.3 Imposing the Impermeability Boundary Condition 104 3.3.4 Calculating the Loads Due to the Source Distribution 108 3.3.5 Imposing the Kutta Condition 111 3.4 Wagner Theory 113 3.4.1 TheWagner Function 120 3.4.2 Drag and Thrust 123 3.4.3 General Motion 129 3.4.4 Total Loads 131 3.4.5 Quasi-Steady Aerodynamics 138 3.5 Theodorsen Theory 139 3.5.1 Theodorsen's Function 143 3.5.2 Total Loads for Sinusoidal Motion 146 3.5.3 General Motion 153 3.6 Finite State Theory 157 3.6.1 Glauert Expansions 161 3.6.2 Solution of the Impermeability Equation 170 3.6.3 Completing the Equations 172 3.6.4 Kutta Condition and Aerodynamic Loads 175 3.7 Concluding Remarks 183 3.8 Exercises 184 4 Numerical Incompressible 2D Models 187 4.1 Introduction 187 4.2 Lumped Vortex Method 187 4.2.1 Unsteady Flows 197 4.2.2 FreeWakes 206 4.3 Gust Encounters 212 4.3.1 Pitching and Plunging Wings 216 4.4 Frequency Domain Formulation of the Lumped Vortex Method 227 4.5 Source and Vortex Panel Method 233 4.5.1 Impulsively Started Flow 245 4.5.2 Thrust and Propulsive Efficiency 254 4.6 Theodorsen's Function andWake Shape 259 4.7 Steady and Unsteady Kutta Conditions 261 4.7.1 The Unsteady Kutta Condition 267 4.8 Concluding Remarks 275 4.9 Exercises 275 5 Finite Wings 279 5.1 Introduction 279 5.1.1 Rigid Wings and Flexible Wings 280 5.2 Finite Wings in Steady Flow 281 5.3 The Impulsively Started Elliptical Wing 290 5.3.1 The Solution by Jones 290 5.3.2 Unsteady Lifting Line Solution 302 5.4 The Unsteady Vortex Lattice Method 306 5.4.1 Impulsive Start of an Elliptical Wing 320 5.4.2 Other Planforms 326 5.5 Rigid Harmonic Motion 329 5.5.1 Longitudinal Harmonic Motion 329 5.5.2 Frequency Domain Load Calculations 335 5.5.3 Lateral Harmonic Motion 341 5.5.4 Aerodynamic Stability Derivatives 345 5.6 The 3D Source and Doublet Panel Method 351 5.7 Flexible Motion 364 5.7.1 Source and Doublet Panel Method in the Frequency Domain 372 5.8 Concluding Remarks 378 5.9 Exercises 379 6 Unsteady Compressible Flow 383 6.1 Introduction 383 6.2 Steady Subsonic Potential Flow 383 6.3 Unsteady Subsonic Potential Flow 390 6.3.1 The Doublet Lattice Method 391 6.3.2 Unsteady 3D Subsonic Source and Doublet Panel Method 402 6.3.3 Steady Correction of the Doublet Lattice Method 414 6.3.4 Unsteady 2D Subsonic Source and Doublet Panel Method 416 6.4 Unsteady Supersonic Potential Flow 419 6.4.1 The Mach Box Method 420 6.4.2 The Mach Panel Method 428 6.5 Transonic Flow 434 6.5.1 Steady Transonic Flow 435 6.5.2 Time Linearised Transonic Small Perturbation Equation 440 6.5.3 Unsteady Transonic Correction Methods 443 6.6 Concluding Remarks 453 6.7 Exercises 454 7 Viscous Flow 459 7.1 Introduction 459 7.1.1 Steady Flow Separation Mechanisms 461 7.1.2 Dynamic Stall 466 7.2 Impulsively Started Flow around a 2D Flat Plate at High Angles of Attack 472 7.2.1 Flow Separation Criteria 480 7.3 Flow Around a 2D Circular Cylinder 485 7.3.1 The Discrete Vortex Method for Bluff Bodies 488 7.3.2 Modelling the Flow Past a Circular Cylinder Using the DVM 491 7.4 Flow Past 2D Rectangular Cylinders 501 7.4.1 Modelling the Flow Past Rectangular Cylinders Using the DVM 502 7.5 Concluding Remarks 507 7.6 Exercises 507 A Fundamental Solutions of Laplace's Equation 511 A.1 The 2D Point Source 511 A.2 The 2D Point Vortex 513 A.3 The Source Line Panel 515 A.4 The Vortex Line Panel 518 A.5 The Horseshoe Vortex 521 A.6 The Vortex Line Segment 523 A.7 The Vortex Ring 525 A.8 The 3D Point Source 526 A.9 The 3D Point Doublet 528 A.10 The Source Surface Panel 528 A.11 The Doublet Surface Panel 534 B Fundamental Solutions of the Linearized Small Disturbance Equation 539 B.1 The Subsonic Doublet Surface Panel 539 B.2 The Acoustic Source Surface Panel 541 B.3 The Acoustic Doublet Surface Panel 542 B.4 The Supersonic Source Surface Panel 543 C Wagner's Derivation of the Kutta Condition 549 Reference 550 Index 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisCORROSION POLICY DECISION MAKING Explore the science, management, economy, ecology, and engineering of corrosion management and prevention In Corrosion Policy Decision Making, distinguished consultant and corrosion expert Dr. Reza Javaherdashti delivers an insightful overview of the fundamental principles of corrosion with a strong focus on the applicability of corrosion theory to industrial practice. The authors demonstrate various aspects of smart corrosion management and persuasively make the case that there is a real difference between corrosion management and corrosion knowledge management. The book contains seven chapters that each focuses on one important aspect of corrosion and corrosion management. Corrosion management is an issue that is not just corrosion science or corrosion engineering but rather a combination of both elements. To cover this paradoxical aspect of corrosion management, chapter 2 deals with some basic, introductory conceptTable of ContentsPreface xiii Authors and Contributors xv 1 Introduction 1 Reza Javaherdashti References 5 2 A Short Review of Some Important Aspects of the Science of Corrosion 7 Reza Javaherdashti and Ali Ghanbarzadeh 2.1 Introduction 7 2.1.1 Essentials of Electrochemical Corrosion 9 2.1.2 Prediction of Corrosion 12 2.1.2.1 Standard Hydrogen Electrode/Electrochemical Series 12 2.1.2.2 Galvanic Series 13 2.1.2.3 Pourbaix Diagrams 15 2.2 Important Technical Treatment Strategies for Corrosion Treatment 16 2.2.1 Design Modification-change/Materials Selection 17 2.2.2 Chemical Treatment 21 2.2.3 Electrical Treatment 22 2.2.4 Mechanical Treatment 23 2.2.5 Physical Treatment 23 2.2.5.1 Paints, Coating Systems, and Premature Destruction in Industrial Facilities 23 2.2.5.2 Features of Substrate 24 2.2.5.3 Characteristics of the Environment and Local Features 26 2.2.5.4 Paints Quality Control 34 2.2.5.5 Paint Warehousing and Storage 35 2.2.5.6 Role of Executors and Contractors 36 2.2.5.7 Surface Preparation 36 2.2.5.8 Technical Painting Operations 39 2.2.5.9 Inspection and Management 41 2.3 Conclusion 43 References 44 3 Smart Corrosion Management Elements 47 Reza Javaherdashti and Faranak Javaherdashti 3.1 Introduction 47 3.1.1 Risk, Importance, and How They Are Interrelated? 48 3.1.2 Corrosion Management: What It Is and What It Is Not 56 3.1.3 Management of Corrosion 58 3.1.3.1 Corrosion Reactions Geometry 59 3.1.3.2 Failure 60 3.1.3.3 Corrosion Prevention and Corrosion Control 67 3.1.3.4 cm Model 69 3.1.4 Phase 1: Definition 70 3.1.5 Phase 2: Application 73 3.1.6 Phase 3: Monitoring 74 3.1.7 Phase 4: Feedback 75 3.1.7.1 Corrosion Cost Estimation Model 76 3.1.7.2 Corrosion Knowledge Management (CKM) 79 3.2 Management of Corrosion and COVID 19 90 3.3 Environment 93 3.4 Application of Management of Corrosion Scheme to Underground Fire Water Ring 96 3.5 Damage Management 99 3.6 Algorithm 100 3.7 Final Remarks 104 References 107 4 Economics and Corrosion 111 Mahsa Mostashar-Nezami 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 Economics 112 4.2.1 What Is Economics 112 4.2.2 Gross Domestic Product 114 4.2.2.1 The Expenditure Approach 115 4.2.2.2 The Income Approach 117 4.2.2.3 The Value-Added Approach 117 4.2.2.4 Income, Consumption, Saving, and Investment 117 4.2.2.5 Gross National Product 123 4.2.3 Introduction to National Account 123 4.2.3.1 Production Account, the Intermediate Consumption, and the Consumption of Fixed Capital 124 4.2.4 Net Present Value (NPV) and Net Future Value (NFV) 128 4.2.5 Input–Output Model in Economics 129 4.2.5.1 Technical Coefficients 130 4.2.5.2 Price and the Input–output Table 135 4.2.5.3 Dynamic Input–output Analysis 137 4.2.6 Depreciation, Consumption of Fixed Capital, or Corrosion 137 4.3 Corrosion Economics 138 4.3.1 Input–output Model in Corrosion 138 4.3.1.1 Matrix of Technical Coefficients 139 4.3.1.2 Matrix of Capital Coefficients 140 4.3.1.3 Input–output Model 142 4.3.1.4 Final Demand 143 4.3.1.5 World I, World Ii, World III 144 4.3.1.6 Estimating Corrosion Cost by Battelle 144 4.3.2 Life Cycle Cost (LCC) 149 4.3.2.1 Life-Cycle Cost Model 149 4.4 Corrosion and Sustainability 152 4.5 Conclusion 154 4.6 Summary 155 References 155 5 Effective Management of Process Additives (EMPA) 159 Mohamedreza Hamedghafarian 5.1 Introduction 159 5.2 A Gas Plant 160 5.3 Utilities 161 5.4 Process Additives (Chemicals) 165 5.5 Effective Management of Process Additives (EMPA) 175 5.5.1 Production Costs 175 5.5.2 Quality Control 175 5.5.3 Corrosion 176 5.5.4 Energy 177 5.5.5 Environment 178 5.5.6 Process Issues 180 5.5.6.1 Production Reduction 180 5.5.6.2 Off-spec Products 181 5.5.6.3 Operation History 1 202 5.5.6.4 Operation History 2 203 5.5.6.5 Operation History 3 214 5.5.6.6 Operation History 4 214 5.6 Misleading Trends with Corrosion Conclusions 215 5.6.1 Phosphate Solution Preparation (Boiler Internal Treatment) 215 5.6.2 Putting A Kettle-type Reboiler into Service that Has Been Under Maintenance 219 5.6.3 Problems in Sampling from Deaerator and Oxygen Scavenger Analyzation 220 5.6.4 Problems in Sampling and Analyzing Specific Conductivity from Demineralized Water 222 5.6.5 An Improper Sample Point and Mistake in Determining Free Residual Chlorine 223 5.7 Chemicals, Their Corrosion, and Impacts of Their Corrosions on the Environment 225 5.7.1 Operation History 5 226 5.8 Configuring EMPA 226 5.9 Setting up an EMPA 229 5.9.1 Description of Activities 230 5.9.1.1 Selection 230 5.9.1.2 Operation History 6 230 5.9.1.3 Operation History 7 232 5.9.1.4 Operation History 8 233 5.9.1.5 Operation History 9 234 5.9.1.6 Procurement 236 5.9.1.7 Operation History 10 236 5.9.1.8 Operation History 11 237 5.9.1.9 Delivery 237 5.9.1.10 Operation History 12 238 5.9.1.11 Operation History 13 239 5.9.2 Storage 240 5.9.2.1 Operation History 14 241 5.9.2.2 Operation History 15 242 5.9.2.3 Operation History 16 242 5.9.2.4 Operation History 17 243 5.9.2.5 Operation History 18 244 5.10 Consumption 245 5.10.1 Operation History 19 246 5.10.2 Operation History 20 246 5.10.3 Operation History 21 247 5.10.4 Operation History 22 248 5.10.5 Operation History 23 249 5.10.6 Operation History 24 249 5.10.7 Operation History 25 256 5.10.8 Operation History 26 257 5.10.9 Operation History 27 257 5.10.10 Operation History 28 259 5.11 Reporting 259 5.12 Documentation 260 5.13 Summary 263 Abbreviations 263 References 265 6 Application of TRIZ for Corrosion Management 269 Reza Javaherdashti and Mehdi Basirzadeh 6.1 Introduction 269 6.2 Basic Structure of TRIZ 271 6.2.1 The Essence of TRIZ in 50 Words 273 6.3 Level of Invention 274 6.4 History of TRIZ 275 6.5 About the Founder of TRIZ 276 6.5.1 Genrich Saulovich Altshuller 276 6.6 Contradiction as a Means to Formulate an Inventive Problem 278 6.7 Procedure of Inventive Design 280 6.8 Concept Development Using TRIZ 281 6.9 Contradiction Matrix (39 × 39) 283 6.9.1 List of the 39 Features 284 6.9.2 List of the 40 Principles 285 6.10 Using the TRIZ Matrix 286 6.10.1 TRIZ Problem Solving Methodology 286 6.10.2 Reality of the “Four-Box Scheme” Theory 288 6.11 Physical Contradiction Resolution 289 6.12 Ideality and the Ideal Final Result (IFR) 294 6.13 TRIZ Crossover QMS 299 6.14 The Evolutionary S-Curve 299 6.15 Nine Windows 301 6.16 Trends of Engineering System Evolution 302 6.17 Geometric Evolution of Linear Constructions 305 6.18 Trimming 306 6.18.1 Making Things Better and Less Expensive 306 6.19 Input–Output–Trimming Operator (I–O–T) 308 6.20 Resource Analysis 310 6.21 Function Analysis 311 6.22 Substance-Field Analysis 312 6.23 Tool-Object-Product (TOP) Function Analysis 312 6.24 Generic Model of a Function 314 6.24.1 Precise Description of a Function 315 6.24.2 Link between Functions 315 6.24.3 Increasing Effectiveness of Function Analysis 315 6.25 TRIZ Offers Five Basic Function Models 315 6.26 Psychological Inertia 315 6.27 Size-Time–Cost Operator 317 6.28 Applying the 40 Inventive Principles in Corrosion Management 318 6.29 Conclusion 334 6.30 Glossary of TRIZ Terms 334 6.a TRIZ Contradiction Table 339 References 345 7 Environmental Impacts of Corrosion and Assessment Strategies 349 Reza Javaherdashti 7.1 Introduction 349 7.1.1 Characterization of the Disaster 350 7.1.2 Why Environment? 352 7.1.3 Corrosion Impact and Corrosion Effect 355 7.1.4 Modeling Environmental Impacts 356 7.1.4.1 Necessary Elements for Construction of Corrosion Impact Modeling 358 7.2 Some Uses of Rule 365 363 7.2.1 Application of Rule 365 to Assess Corrosion Effects 364 7.3 Conclusions 365 References 365 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisSMALL-ANGLE SCATTERING A comprehensive and timely volume covering contemporary research, practical techniques, and theoretical approaches to SAXS and SANSSmall-Angle Scattering: Theory, Instrumentation, Data, and Applications provides authoritative coverage of both small-angle X-ray scattering (SAXS), small-angle neutron scattering (SANS) and grazing incidence small-angle scattering (GISAS) including GISAXS and GISANS. This single-volume resource offers readers an up-to-date view of the state of the field, including the theoretical foundations, experimental methods, and practical applications of small-angle scattering (SAS) techniques including laboratory and synchrotron SAXS and reactor/spallation SANS. Organized into six chapters, the text first describes basic theory, instrumentation, and data analysis. The following chapters contain in-depth discussion on various applications of SAXS and SANS and GISAXS and GISANS, and on specific techniques for investigating structure and order in soft materials, biomolecules, and inorganic and magnetic materials. Author Ian Hamley draws from his more than thirty years' experience working with many systems, instruments, and types of small-angle scattering experiments across most European facilities to present the most complete introduction to the field available. This book:Presents uniquely broad coverage of practical and theoretical approaches to SAXS and SANSIncludes practical information on instrumentation and data analysisOffers useful examples and an accessible and concise presentation of topicsCovers new developments in the techniques of SAXS and SANS, including GISAXS and GISANSSmall-Angle Scattering: Theory, Instrumentation, Data, and Applications is a valuable source of detailed information for researchers and postgraduate students in the field, as well as other researchers using X-ray and neutron scattering to investigate soft materials, other nanostructured materials and biomolecules such as proteins.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Basic Theory 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Wavenumber and Scattering Amplitude 2 1.3 Intensity for Anisotropic and Isotropic Systems and Relationships to Pair Distance Distribution and Autocorrelation Functions 3 1.4 Guinier Approximation 7 1.5 Form and Structure Factors 8 1.6 Structure Factors 11 1.7 Form Factors 26 1.8 Form and Structure Factors for Polymers 36 References 41 2 Data Analysis 45 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 Pre-Measurement Sample Concentration and Polydispersity Measurements 46 2.3 Overview: Data Reduction Pipeline 46 2.4 Corrections for Sample Transmission and Others 48 2.5 Background Corrections 49 2.6 Detector Corrections, Mask Files, and Integration 51 2.7 Anisotropic Data 54 2.8 Calibration of q Scale 54 2.9 Absolute Intensity Calibration 56 2.10 Absorption 58 2.11 Smearing Effects 59 2.12 Solution SAXS Data Checks 60 2.13 Porod Regime 67 2.14 Kratky Plots 68 2.15 Zimm Plots 70 2.16 Invariant and Related Information Content From SAS Measurements 72 2.17 Form Factor Fitting 73 2.18 SAS Software 80 References 80 3 Instrumentation for SAXS and SANS 87 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Synchrotron Facilities 88 3.3 Neutron Scattering Facilities 88 3.4 Synchrotron SAXS Instrumentation 91 3.5 Laboratory SAXS Instrumentation 99 3.6 SANS Instrumentation 101 3.7 Ultra-Small-Angle Scattering Instruments 104 3.8 Standard Sample Environments – SAXS 106 3.9 Standard Sample Environments – SANS 109 3.10 Standard Sample Environments – GISAS 109 3.11 Microfocus SAXS and WAXS 110 3.12 Specialized Sample Environments 111 References 127 4 Applications and Specifics of SAXS 137 4.1 Introduction 137 4.2 Production of X-Rays 139 4.3 Scattering Processes for X-Rays 142 4.4 Atomic Scattering Factors 144 4.5 Anomalous SAXS and SAXS Contrast Variation 145 4.6 BioSAXS: Solution SAXS from Biomacromolecules, Especially Proteins 147 4.7 Solution SAXS from Multi-Domain and Flexible Macromolecules 154 4.8 Solution SAXS from Multi-Component Systems – Biomolecular Assemblies 160 4.9 Protein Structure Factor SAXS 161 4.10 SAXS (and WAXS) Studies of Soft Matter Systems 163 4.11 SAXS and WAXS From Semicrystalline Polymers 164 4.12 Lipid Phases: Electron Density Profile Reconstruction 168 4.13 SAXS Studies of Peptide and Lipopeptide Assemblies 171 4.14 SAXS Studies of the Structure Factor of Colloids 173 4.15 SAXS and SAXS/WAXS Studies of Biomaterials 177 4.16 Fast Time-Resolved SAXS 182 References 187 5 Applications and Specifics of SANS 197 5.1 Introduction 197 5.2 Production of Neutrons 198 5.3 Differential Scattering Cross-Section 199 5.4 Scattering Lengths 200 5.5 SANS Data Reduction Considerations 202 5.6 Contrast Variation 203 5.7 Single Molecule Scattering from Mixtures of Protonated and Deuterated Molecules 215 5.8 SANS from Labelled Polymers 217 5.9 Kinetic SANS Using Labelled Mixtures 222 5.10 Ultra-Small-Angle Sans (USANS) 223 5.11 SANS and USANS (AND SAXS and USAXS) Studies on Porous Structures 224 5.12 SANS on Magnetic Materials 227 5.13 Spin-Echo SANS (SESANS) 232 5.14 Complementary SAXS AND SANS 233 References 233 6 Grazing-Incidence Small-Angle Scattering 241 6.1 Introduction 241 6.2 Basic Quantities: Definition of Angles, Refractive Index, and Scattering Length Density 242 6.3 Characteristic Scans 245 6.4 The Distorted Wave Born Approximation 252 6.5 Data Analysis 256 6.6 Experimental Examples of GISAS Data 257 6.7 Experimental Examples of GIWAXS/GIXD Data 265 References 269 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisPHYSICS, OPTICS, AND SPECTROSCOPY OF MATERIALS Bridges a gap that exists between optical spectroscopists and laser systems developers Physics, Optics, and Spectroscopy of Materials provides professionals and students in materials science and engineering, optics, and spectroscopy a basic understanding and tools for stimulating current research, as well as developing and implementing new laser devices in optical spectroscopy. The authora noted expert on that subject mattercovers a wide range of topics including: effects of light and mater interaction such as light absorption, emission and scattering by atoms and molecules; energy levels in hydrogen, hydrogen-like atoms, and many electron atoms; electronic structure of molecules, classification of vibrational and rotational motions of molecules, wave propagation and oscillations in dielectric solids, light propagation in isotropic and anisotropic solids, including frequency doubling dividing and shifting, solid materials optics, and laseTable of ContentsIntroduction XIII 1 Electromagnetic Radiation/Matter Interaction – A Classical Approach 1 1.1 Electromagnetic Radiation by Atoms and Molecules 1 1.2 Spectral Line Widths 5 1.2.1 Natural Width 5 1.2.2 Doppler Broadening 7 1.2.3 Additional Broadening Mechanisms 9 1.3 Electromagnetic Radiation Absorption by Atoms and Molecules 10 1.4 Radiation Scattering by Atoms and Molecules 14 1.5 Reminder: Multipole Moments Expansion 18 Exercises for Chapter 1 20 2 Electromagnetic Radiation/Matter Interaction – A Semi-Quantum Approach 21 2.1 A Reminder of Perturbation Theory 21 2.1.1 Static Perturbation Theory 21 2.1.2 Time-Dependent Perturbation Theory 23 2.2 A Reminder of Planck’s Black-Body Radiation 26 2.3 An Atom or Molecule in an Electromagnetic Radiation Field 28 2.4 Stimulated Emission and Einstein’s Coefficients 30 2.5 Radiation Absorption and Amplification in Matter 32 2.6 Black Body Radiation – Continuation and Completion 36 Exercises for Chapter 2 39 3 The Hydrogen Atom – Electrostatic Attraction Approximation 41 3.1 De Broglie Waves and Schrödinger’s Equation 41 3.2 Differential Operators and Physical Quantities 44 3.3 Schrödinger Equation Solution for Hydrogen and Hydrogen-Like Atoms 45 3.4 Physical Meanings of Schrödinger Equation Solutions for Hydrogen-Like Atoms 55 3.5 Spectroscopy of Hydrogen and Hydrogen-Like Atoms 60 3.6 Selection Rules 61 Exercises for Chapter 3 64 4 Hydrogen Atom – Corrections to the Electrostatic Attraction Approximation 67 4.1 Angular Momentum and the Orbital Quantum Number 67 4.2 Mechanical Relativistic Correction to the Eigenenergies of the Hydrogen Atom 71 4.3 Electron Spinning 72 4.3.1 Infinitesimal Rotations and the Angular Momentum Operator 73 4.3.2 Generalization of the Angular Momentum Concept 75 4.3.2.1 Basis Functions Properties 75 4.3.2.2 Eigenvalues of the J 2 Operator 76 4.3.2.3 Matrix Elements of Angular Momentum Operators 77 4.3.2.4 Electron Spin 77 4.4 Combining Orbital Angular Momentum and Spin 80 4.5 Gyromagnetic Ratio and Spin/Orbit Coupling 82 4.5.1 The Gyromagnetic Ratio 82 4.5.2 Spin/Orbit Interaction 83 4.5.2.1 Electric Dipole of a Moving Magnetic Dipole 83 4.5.2.2 Thomas Precession 84 4.5.2.3 Total Spin/Orbit Coupling 85 4.5.3 Summed Energy Spectrum Correction 85 4.6 Landé Factor 86 4.7 Lamb Shift 87 4.8 Selection Rules and Transition Probabilities 91 4.9 Static External Magnetic and Electric Fields: Zeeman and Stark Effects 95 4.9.1 Zeeman Splitting 95 4.9.1.1 Weak Magnetic Field 95 4.9.1.2 Strong Magnetic Field 97 4.9.2 Stark Splitting 98 4.9.2.1 Ground State; First-Order Perturbation Theory 98 4.9.2.2 Ground State; Second-Order Perturbation Theory 98 4.9.2.3 First Excited State; First-Order Perturbation Theory 101 4.10 The Fine Structure 103 4.10.1 Isotope Shifting 103 4.10.2 Nuclear Magnetic Shifting 104 4.10.3 Nuclear Quadrupole Shifting 104 4.11 Appendix: Clebsch-Gordan Coefficients for Coupling of Two Angular Momentums 104 Exercises for Chapter 4 104 5 Many-Electron Atoms 107 5.1 Preamble 107 5.2 Helium-Like Atoms 107 5.2.1 Zero-Order Approximation under the Independent Electron Model 108 5.2.2 First-Order Correction and the Effective Screening Idea 109 5.2.3 Exchange Symmetry 111 5.2.4 Helium Energy Level Scheme 114 5.3 Bosons, Fermions, and Pauli Exclusion Principle 115 5.3.1 Harmonic Oscillator 115 5.3.1.1 Hamiltonian and Creation and Destruction Operators 115 5.3.1.2 Energy Levels Scheme of the Harmonic Oscillator 117 5.3.1.3 Eigenfunctions of the Harmonic Oscillator 117 5.3.1.4 Bosons 119 5.3.2 Angular Momentum 119 5.3.2.1 Annihilation, Creation, and Occupation Operators 119 5.3.2.2 Pauli Exclusion Principle 121 5.4 Electronic Structure of Many-Electron Atoms 122 5.4.1 Slater Determinant 122 5.4.2 Electron Configuration and the Shell Structure 122 5.4.3 Electronic Configuration and Chemical Stability 124 5.4.4 Spin/Orbit Coupling and Term Determination 125 5.5 Excited-States Structure in Many-Electron Atoms 133 5.5.1 States Structure of Single Valence Atoms 133 5.5.2 States Structure of Two-Valence Atoms 135 5.5.3 Classical Approximations 138 Exercises for Chapter 5 139 6 Electron Orbits in Molecules 141 6.1 Preamble 141 6.2 The Hydrogen Molecule Ion 142 6.2.1 The Hamiltonian of the Hydrogen Molecule Ion 142 6.2.2 A Qualitative Approach to Solution Using a Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals 143 6.2.3 Energy States Calculation by LCAO Method 145 6.2.4 Improvements in the LCAO Method 149 6.2.5 Optical Transition Probabilities 149 6.3 Molecular Electronic Angular Momentum 150 6.3.1 Eigenfunctions of L 2 and L 2 Z in a Lone Atom 150 6.3.2 Orbital Angular Momentum of an Independent Electron in a Molecule 152 6.3.3 Electronic Spin in a Diatomic Molecule 153 6.4 Many-Electron Homonuclear Diatomic Molecules 153 6.5 Many-Electron Heteronuclear Diatomic Molecules 158 6.6 Multiatomic Molecules 160 6.6.1 Nonconjugated Molecules 161 6.6.2 Conjugated Molecules 166 6.7 Appendix: Calculation of an Infinitesimal Volume Element in Elliptic Coordinates 170 Exercises for Chapter 6 172 7 Molecular (Especially Diatomic) Internal Oscillations 173 7.1 Preamble 173 7.2 The Born-Oppenheimer Approximation 173 7.3 Vibrational and Rotational Modes of Diatomic Molecules 176 7.3.1 Empiric Analytic Potential 176 7.3.2 Molecular Vibrational Modes 177 7.3.3 Molecular Rotational Modes 178 7.3.4 Molecular Vibrational/Rotational Modes 180 7.3.5 Transition Probabilities and Selection Rules 182 7.4 Vibrational/Rotational Absorption Spectra 185 7.4.1 Pure Rotational Transitions 185 7.4.2 Temperature Dependence of Pure Rotational Transitions 185 7.4.3 Mixed Vibration/Rotation Transitions 188 7.5 Electronic Transitions and the Franck-Condon Principle 189 7.5.1 General Considerations 189 7.5.2 Selection Rules for Electronic Transitions 190 7.5.3 Temperature Dependence of the Electronic Transitions Spectrum 192 7.5.4 The Franck-Condon Principle 193 7.5.5 Fluorescence and Stokes-Shift 195 7.5.6 Selection Rules for Electronic Transitions Including Vibrations and Rotations 197 Exercises for Chapter 7 199 8 Internal Oscillations of Polyatomic Molecules 201 8.1 Preamble 201 8.2 Zero-Order Mechanical Energy Approximation of a Polyatomic Molecule 201 8.3 Molecular Vibrational Modes 204 8.4 Vibrational Energy Scheme 207 8.5 Rayleigh and Raman Scattering 207 8.5.1 General Rayleigh Scattering by Molecules 207 8.5.2 Raman Scattering 212 8.6 Point Symmetry 215 8.7 Group Representations, Characters, and Reduction Equation 220 8.8 Similarity Classes, Irreducible Representations, and Character Tables 221 8.9 Selection Rules for Electric Dipole Absorption and Raman Scattering 223 8.10 Method for Calculation and Description of Molecular Vibrational Species 225 8.11 Examples of Molecular Vibrational Symmetry Species 227 8.11.1 The Ammonia NH 3 Molecule 227 8.11.2 The Ethylene C 2 H 4 Molecule 228 8.11.3 The Carbon Tetrachloride CCl 4 Molecule 230 8.12 Point Groups, Character Tables, and Selection Rules 232 8.12.1 The C p group 232 Exercises for Chapter 8 241 9 Crystalline Solids 245 9.1 Preamble 245 9.2 Periodic Crystals 245 9.3 Lattice-Vector and Lattice-Plane Orientations 251 9.4 The Reciprocal Lattice 251 9.5 Internal Crystalline Oscillations 252 9.5.1 Introduction 252 9.5.2 Hamiltonian and Dynamic Equations 253 9.5.3 Allowed Wave-Number States and Their Density 255 9.5.4 Dispersion Curves 257 9.5.4.1 Acoustic Modes 259 9.5.4.2 Optical Oscillation Modes 264 9.5.5 Theoretical Dispersion Curve Calculations – A Basic Approach 272 9.5.6 Dispersion Curves and Specific Heats 273 9.6 Appendix: Intermediate Calculation for Justifying Eq. (9.11) 274 Exercises for Chapter 9 275 10 Dielectric Crystalline Solids 277 10.1 Light Propagation in a Dielectric Medium 277 10.2 Light Transition from Vacuum into a Dielectric Medium 283 10.3 Kramers-Kronig Relations 286 10.4 A Microscopic Model of the Dielectric Function 289 10.5 A Reminder: Gradient, Divergence, Rotor, and the Cauchy Equation 297 10.5.1 Gradient, Divergence, and Rotor 297 10.5.2 Cauchy’s Equation 298 Exercises for Chapter 10 299 11 Crystalline Oscillation Species 301 11.1 Introduction 301 11.2 Crystalline Sites 301 11.3 Tabulation Method 302 11.4 Calculation of Crystalline Oscillation Species – An Example 305 11.5 Tabulation of Crystalline Space Group Properties 310 Exercises for Chapter 11 346 12 Atoms and Ions in Crystalline Sites 347 12.1 Introduction 347 12.2 Energy States of Alkali and Alkali-Like Atoms 347 12.3 Energy States of Many-Electron Atoms and Ions 349 12.4 Dopant Atoms or Ions in Crystalline Sites 362 12.4.1 The Full Rotation Group and its Representations 363 12.4.2 A Hydrogen-Like Atom in a Crystalline Perturbation Field 366 12.4.3 Example: States Splitting in a Cubic Perturbation Field 368 12.4.4 Tanabe-Sugano Diagrams 373 12.5 Transition Probabilities and Selection Rules 374 12.6 Spectroscopic Examples 375 12.7 Appendix: An Integral Over Three Multiplied Spherical Harmonics 378 Exercises for Chapter 12 379 13 Non-Radiative and Mixed Decay Transitions 381 13.1 Non-Radiative Transitions Between Close Electronic States 381 13.1.1 Debye Approximation of Phonon Dispersion Curves 381 13.1.2 Non-Radiative Transitions Between Very Close Electronic States 382 13.1.3 Non-Radiative Transitions Between Close Electronic States 386 13.2 Radiative Transition Lifetime and Optical Absorption and Emission Spectra 389 13.3 Multi-Phonon Non-Radiative Transitions 395 13.3.1 Principles and Methods in Experimental Measurement of Non-Radiative Lifetimes 395 13.3.2 Theoretical Calculation of the Non-Radiative Lifetime 396 Exercises for Chapter 13 406 14 Basic Acquaintance with the Laser and Its Components 407 14.1 General Description 407 14.2 The Optical Cavity 408 14.3 The Prism 409 14.3.1 A Prism Minimum Deviation Arrangement 410 14.3.2 Light Dispersion in a Prism 412 14.3.3 Prism Wavelength Resolution 412 14.4 Reflection Grating 414 14.4.1 Light Diffraction Off a Reflection Grating 414 14.4.2 Wavelength Resolution of a Reflection Grating 416 14.5 Fabry-Pérot Etalon 417 14.5.1 General Description and Fundamental Terms 417 14.5.2 The Etalon as an Optical Filter 419 14.5.3 The Etalon as a Spectrometer 421 14.5.3.1 A Solid Etalon 421 14.5.3.2 A Scanning Etalon 422 14.5.4 Etalon Transmission of Incoherent Light 423 14.6 Brewster Window and a Brewster Plate 423 14.6.1 Snell’s Law and Fresnel Equations 423 14.6.2 Achieving Polarized Laser Emission 428 14.7 Loss Presentation in a Laser Cavity 429 Exercises for Chapter 14 430 15 Transverse Optical Modes and Crystal Optics 431 15.1 Preamble 431 15.2 Transverse Single-Mode Gaussian Beam 432 15.3 Transverse Multi-Mode Beams 435 15.4 Selecting a Transverse Mode for a Laser Output 437 15.5 Lens Crossing of a Single-Mode Transverse Gaussian Beam 437 15.6 Multi-Mode Transverse Gaussian Beams 439 15.7 Crystal Optics 440 15.7.1 General Description 440 15.7.2 Uniaxial Crystals 441 15.7.3 Walk-Off 442 15.8 Retardation Plates 443 Exercises for Chapter 15 445 16 Pulsed High Power Lasers 447 16.1 Introduction 447 16.2 Passive Q-Switching Using a Saturable Light Absorber 447 16.2.1 Saturable Absorbers 447 16.2.1.1 Slow Saturable Absorber 449 16.2.1.2 Fast Saturable Absorber 450 16.2.1.3 Examples 451 16.2.2 Q-Switching Using a Saturable Absorber 455 16.3 Active Q-Switching Using Electrooptic Crystals 456 16.3.1 The Electrooptic Effect 456 16.3.2 Q-Switching Using an Electrooptic Crystal 461 16.4 Mode-Locking 462 Exercises for Chapter 16 466 17 Frequency Conversions of Laser Beams 469 17.1 Non-Linear Crystals 469 17.2 Electromagnetic Wave Propagation in a Non-Linear Crystal 475 17.2.1 Maxwell’s Equations 475 17.2.2 Overlapping Beams of Different Frequencies Propagating in the Same Direction 476 17.2.3 Frequency Doubling 477 17.3 Optical Parametric Oscillations 483 17.3.1 Forced Parametric Oscillations 483 17.3.2 Optical Parametric Amplification 485 17.3.3 Optical Parametric Oscillations Based Laser 488 17.4 A Reminder: Hyperbolic “Trigonometric” Functions 490 Exercises for Chapter 7 490 18 Examples of Various Laser Systems 493 18.1 Introduction 493 18.2 Helium-Neon Laser 493 18.3 Copper Vapor Laser 496 18.4 Hydrogen Fluoride Chemical Laser 499 18.5 Neodymium-YAG Laser 503 18.6 Dye Lasers 506 18.7 Diode Lasers 510 Exercises for Chapter 18 515 Appendix A Greek alphabet and phonetic names 517 Appendix B Table of physical constants 519 Appendix C Dirac δ function 521 Appendix D Literature references for further reading 523 Index 525

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the fundamentals and applications of Carbon Nanofiber (CNF). In the first section, the initial chapter on the fundamentals of CNF is by Professor Maheshwar Sharon, the recognized Father of Carbon Nanotechnology in India, which powerfully provides a succinct overview of CNFs. This is followed by a chapter on biogenics that have produced unique morphologies of CNF that makes them suitable to various applications. This is followed by a chapter that mainly focuses on nanocomposites, especially those involving nanocomposites of CNF. The role of nanocatalysts and composites in promoting and enhancing the synthesis and application of CNF is then covered, followed by an important chapter on the characterization of CNF. The second section of the book encompasses the various applications of CNF, such as its use as a possible superconductor to adsorb and store hydrogen, and as a microwave absorber. The application of CNF for environmental concerns is also detailed by asTable of ContentsForeword xix Preface xxi 1 An Introduction to Carbon Nanofiber 1Maheshwar Sharon 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 History of Carbon Fiber 2 1.1.2 What is a Carbon Fiber? 3 1.1.3 Structures of Carbon Fibers 5 1.1.4 Synthesis of Carbon Fibers 6 1.1.4.1 Carbon Fibers from PAN 6 1.1.5 Properties of Carbon Fibers 6 1.2 Properties of Carbon Nanofiber and How It Differs from Carbon Nanotube 7 1.2.1 History of CNF 8 1.2.2 Role of Surface States in Controlling the Properties of CNFs 9 1.3 Synthesis of Carbon Nanofiber (CNF) 11 1.3.1 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) Method 11 1.3.2 Precursors for CNF 12 1.3.3 Use of Catalyst in the Synthesis of CNF 12 1.3.4 Selection of Variable Parameters for Growth of CNF 13 1.3.5 Epitaxial Growth of Aligned CNF 14 1.3.6 Mechanism of CNF Synthesis 14 1.4 Properties of CNF and Its Composites 15 1.5 Applications of CNF 15 1.6 Health Hazards of CNF 18 1.7 Summary 19 References 19 2 Biogenic Carbon Nanofibers 21Madhuri Sharon 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Plants as Source of Precursor for CNF Synthesis 22 2.2.1 Plant Parts 26 2.2.1.1 Fibrous Plant Material Used for Synthesizing CNF 26 2.2.1.2 Characterization of CNF Obtained by Pyrolysis of Plant Seeds 29 2.2.2 Plant Metabolites 34 2.2.2.1 Characterization of CNF Obtained by Pyrolysis of Plant Metabolites 36 2.3 CNF Derived from Parts of Different Plants and Their Applications 37 2.3.1 Hydrogen Storage in CNF 37 2.3.2 Removal of Heavy Metals by CNF 38 2.3.3 Microwave Absorption Capacity of CNF 39 2.3.4 CNF as Electrocatalysts for Microbial Energy Harvesting 40 2.3.5 CNF as Regenerative Medicine 40 2.3.6 CNF as Deodorizer 41 2.3.7 CNF Composites for Strong and Lightweight Material 41 2.3.8 Biogenic CNF as Supercapacitor 42 2.3.9 Plant-Derived CNM for Use in Coatings 43 2.4 Comparative Structure of Chemically and Biogenically Synthesized CNF 43 2.4.1 CNF Synthesized from Chemical Precursors 43 2.4.2 CNF Synthesized from Plant Parts or Plant Metabolites as Precursors 44 2.5 Concluding Remarks 45 References 45 3 Role of Nanocatalysts in Synthesis of Carbon Nanofiber 49Suman Tripathi 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Nanocatalysts 50 3.2.1 Concept of Nanocatalysis 51 3.2.2 Metallic Nanoparticles (NP) as Catalyst 52 3.2.3 Types of Nanometals as Catalyst 53 3.2.3.1 Nanometal Colloids as Catalysts 54 3.2.3.2 Nanoclusters as Catalysts 54 3.2.3.3 Nanoparticles as Catalysts 54 3.2.3.4 Nanopowder as Catalysts 54 3.3 Methods for the Preparation of Nanoparticles 54 3.3.1 Hydrothermal Method of Metal Nanoparticles 55 3.3.2 Microwave-Irradiated Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 55 3.3.3 Dendrimer-Assisted Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 55 3.3.4 Reverse Micelle Method of Metal Nanoparticles 56 3.3.5 Co-Precipitation Method of Metal Nanoparticles 57 3.3.6 Biogenic Synthesis (Green Synthesis) Method of Metal Nanoparticles 58 3.4 Role of Nanocatalyst in the Production of CNF 60 3.5 Different Types of CNF 61 3.6 Synthesis of Carbon Nanofiber (CNF) Using Nanocatalysts 64 3.6.1 Laser Ablation Method 65 3.6.2 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 65 3.6.3 Self-Propagating High-Temperature Synthesis (SHS) or Combustion Synthesis (CS) 67 3.6.4 Floating Catalyst Method 68 3.6.5 Electrospinning Method 68 3.6.5.1 Polyacrylonitrile (PAN) 70 3.6.5.2 Pitch 70 3.6.5.3 Cellulose 70 3.7 Summary 71 References 71 4 Carbon Nanofiber and Polymer Conjugate 75Anuradha Pandey Dubey 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 What is a Composite? 76 4.3 Polymers Used for Conjugating CNF 79 4.3.1 Starch 79 4.3.2 Cellulose 81 4.3.3 Collagen 81 4.3.4 Chitosan 82 4.3.5 Gelatin 83 4.3.6 Fibrin 83 4.3.7 Alginate 84 4.3.8 Poly Vinyl Alcohol (PVA) 84 4.3.9 Poly Ethylene Glycol (PEG) 84 4.3.10 Poly Caprolactone (PCL) 85 4.3.11 Poly Lactic-co-Glycolic Acid (PLGA) 85 4.3.12 Poly Glycerol Sebacate (PGS) 86 4.4 Approaches Involved in Synthesizing Polymer/CNF Nanocomposites 86 4.5 Various CNF Composites 87 4.5.1 CNF/Epoxy Composites 88 4.5.2 CNF/Phenolic Resin Composites 89 4.5.3 CNF/Polyaniline (PANI) Composites 89 4.5.4 CNF/Poly (Ether Ether Ketone) Nanocomposite 90 4.5.5 CNF/Biopolymers Nanocomposites 90 4.5.6 CNT/CNF-Epoxy Nanocomposites 91 4.6 Possible Futuristic Applications of CNF/Polymer Composites 91 4.6.1 Sensors 92 4.6.2 Batteries 93 4.6.3 Food Packaging 94 4.7 Summary 95 References 95 5 Characterization of Carbon Nanofiber 99Sundeep Deulkar 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Microscopic Characterization Techniques 99 5.2.1 Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) 100 5.2.2 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM) 103 5.2.3 Electron Microscopy for Morphology and Surface Characterization 104 5.2.3.1 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 104 5.2.3.2 Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) and Scanning Transmission Electron Microscopy (STEM) 108 5.3 Spectroscopic Characterization 112 5.3.1 Raman Spectroscopic Studies of Carbon Nanofibers 113 5.4 Spectroscopic Analysis of CNF by XRD 117 5.5 Measurement of Mechanical Properties of CNF 122 5.5.1 Tensile Strength Testing/Tension Testing 122 5.5.2 Young’s Modulus 123 5.6 Optical Property Analysis of CNF 127 5.6.1 Ellipsometric Method for CNF and MCNF 128 5.6.2 UV-Vis-NIR Spectrophotometric Method for ACNF Analysis 129 5.6.3 Measuring Optical Band Gap 131 5.7 Thermal Properties and Thermal Effect Analysis 132 5.7.1 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 132 5.7.2 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) 134 5.7.3 Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) 135 5.7.4 Thermal Conductivity 135 5.8 Specific Surface Area (SSA) Determination of CNF 139 5.8.1 Methylene Blue (MB) Test 140 5.8.2 Brunauer–Emmett–Teller (BET) Specific Surface Areas 142 5.9 Characterization of Electrical Properties 145 5.9.1 Two-Probe and Four-Probe Methods for Resistivity Measurement 148 5.9.2 Four-Probe Methods for Resistivity Measurement 149 5.9.3 Tunneling Atomic Force Microscopy (TUNA) Analysis 150 5.9.4 Hall Effect Measurement 152 References 154 6 Carbon Nanofiber – A Potential Superconductor 159Harish K. Dubey 6.1 Introduction 159 6.2 Superconductors 161 6.2.1 Theory of Superconductors 161 6.2.2 Measurement Technique of Superconductivity 163 6.2.3 Types of Superconductors 163 6.3 History of Existing Superconductors 165 6.4 Superconductivity in Organic Materials 168 6.5 Can Carbon Nanofiber Also Be a Possible Superconductor? 169 6.6 Summary 173 References 173 7 Carbon Nanofiber for Hydrogen Storage 175Bholanath Mukherjee 7.1 Introduction 175 7.2 Hydrogen – Its Advantages and Disadvantages as Source of Energy 176 7.2.1 Advantages 177 7.2.2 Disadvantages 177 7.3 Methods of Hydrogen Storage 178 7.3.1 Storage of Liquid Hydrogen 178 7.3.2 Storage of Gaseous Hydrogen 178 7.3.2.1 In Metal Hydride Storage Tanks 178 7.3.2.2 Storage of Compressed Hydrogen in High-Pressure Tank 179 7.3.2.3 Hydrogen Storage in Glass Microspheres 179 7.3.2.4 Storage in Array of Glass Micro Tubules/Capillaries 180 7.3.2.5 Storage of Hydrogen in Chemicals 180 7.3.2.6 Storage of Hydrogen in Metal Amidoboranes 180 7.3.2.7 Storage of Hydrogen in Metal Organic Framework System 181 7.4 Different Forms of Carbon and Nanocarbon for Storage of Hydrogen 181 7.4.1 Activated Carbon 182 7.4.2 Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes (SWCNTs) 184 7.4.3 Multi-Walled Carbon Nanotubes (MWCNTs) 187 7.4.4 Metal-Doped Carbon Nanotubes 188 7.4.5 Graphene and the Like 189 7.5 Carbon Fibers for Storage of Hydrogen 191 7.6 Pyrolyzed Natural Fibers from Plant/Animals to Store Hydrogen 192 7.6.1 Carbonization/Pyrolysis 192 7.7 Summary 201 References 201 8 Carbon Nanofiber for Microwave Absorption 211Dattatray E. Kshirsagar 8.1 The Need to Develop a Microwave Absorber 211 8.2 Types of Microwave Absorbers 212 8.2.1 Resonant Absorber 213 8.2.2 Broadband Absorbers 215 8.2.3 Magnetic Absorbers 217 8.2.4 Dielectric Absorber 218 8.2.5 Metal Absorber 220 8.3 Considerations for Nano Absorbers 221 8.3.1 Nanoferrite Absorber 222 8.3.1.1 Limitations of Ferrites 222 8.4 The Radars 223 8.4.1 Detection and Ranging 223 8.4.2 Multi-Band 3D Radar 223 8.4.3 Quantum Radar 224 8.4.4 LIDAR (Light Imaging Detection & Ranging) 225 8.5 Role of CNF in Microwave Absorption 226 8.6 Need for Fabricating a CNF and Polymer Composite 228 8.7 Summary 230 References 232 9 Carbon Nanofiber for Removal of Dye from Aqueous Medium 235Sanjukta Bhowmik 9.1 Introduction 235 9.2 Morphology of Biogenic and Chemically Synthesized CNFs from Different Precursors 236 9.2.1 Chemical Vapor Deposition Method (CVD) 237 9.2.2 Plasma-Enhanced Chemical Vapor Deposition (PECVD) 240 9.2.3 Electrospinning of Polymer Fibers 241 9.3 Novel Dye Removal Properties of CNF 243 9.4 Absorption of Different Dyes 245 9.5 Summary 248 References 249 10 Carbon Nanofiber to Remove Heavy Metals from Aqueous Medium 251Jayashri Shukla 10.1 Introduction 251 10.1.1 What Are Heavy Metals? 251 10.1.2 List of Heavy Metals 252 10.1.3 Sources of Heavy Metals 252 10.2 Are Heavy Metals Essential for Living Beings? 253 10.2.1 Damaging Effect of Heavy Metals on Biosystem 253 10.2.1.1 Arsenic 254 10.2.1.2 Cadmium 254 10.2.1.3 Chromium 255 10.2.1.4 Lead 256 10.2.1.5 Mercury 256 10.2.2 Heavy Metal and Soil Toxicity 257 10.2.3 Heavy Metal and Plant Toxicity 258 10.2.4 Toxic Effects of Heavy Metals on Aquatic Environment 258 10.3 Methods Used for Removal of Heavy Metals 258 10.3.1 Adsorption 259 10.3.1.1 Adsorption on New Adsorbents 259 10.3.1.2 Adsorption on Modified Natural Materials 259 10.3.1.3 Adsorption on Industrial By-Products 260 10.3.1.4 Adsorption on Modified Agricultural and Biological Wastes (Biosorption) 263 10.3.1.5 Adsorption on Modified Biopolymers and Hydrogels 263 10.3.2 Membrane Separation/Filtration 265 10.3.3 Electrodialysis and Photocatalysis 269 10.3.4 Chemical Oxidation and Advanced Oxidation 269 10.3.5 Chemical Precipitation 269 10.3.6 Chemical Coagulation 270 10.3.7 Chemical Stabilization 271 10.3.8 Ion Exchange 271 10.3.9 Waste LCD Panel Glass 271 10.3.10 Electrolytic Recovery or Electrowinning 272 10.3.11 Electrodialysis 272 10.3.12 Photocatalysis 272 10.4 Evaluation of Heavy Metals Removal Processes 274 10.5 Role of CNF in Removing Heavy Metals 275 10.5.1 Suitability of Chemically Synthesized CNF for Heavy Metal Removal 277 10.5.2 Suitability of Biogenic CNF 277 10.6 CNF to Remove Heavy Metals 279 10.7 Summary 284 References 284 11 Carbon Nanofiber as Electrode in Li-Ion Battery 291Manisha Khemani 11.1 Introduction 291 11.1.1 Why Lithium? 292 11.2 Types of Lithium-Ion Batteries 294 11.2.1 Lithium Nickel Manganese Cobalt Oxide Battery 294 11.2.2 Lithium Cobalt Oxide Battery 294 11.2.3 Lithium Manganese Oxide Battery 294 11.2.4 Lithium-Titanate Battery 295 11.2.5 Lithium Iron Phosphate Battery 295 11.3 Theory of Generation of Power in Lithium Battery 295 11.3.1 Positive Electrode or Cathode 295 11.3.2 Negative Electrode Anode 296 11.3.3 Electrolyte 296 11.4 Role of Carbon, Lithium and Cobalt in Li-Battery 297 11.4.1 Advantages of LIB 300 11.4.2 Disadvantages of LIB 302 11.5 Role of CNF in Lithium Battery and Possibility of Increasing Its Efficiency 303 11.6 Recent Advances in Lithium Battery Utilizing Carbon Nanomaterial and CNF 305 11.6.1 Polyacrylonitrile (PAN) 306 11.6.2 Walnut Shell 306 11.6.3 FeOx-CNT/CNF Composite 306 11.6.4 Carbon Nanobeads (CNB) from Camphor 306 11.6.5 Tea Leaves 307 11.6.6 Various Carbon Materials 308 11.7 Summary 309 References 309 12 Carbon Nanofiber and Photovoltaic Solar Cell 313Kailash Jagdeo and Maheshwar Sharon 12.1 Introduction 313 12.2 Formation of a Semiconducting Material 314 12.2.1 Introduction to P-N Junction 316 12.3 Semiconductors for Solar Cell 320 12.4 Attempts Made in Making Carbon-Based Solar Cell 320 12.5 Is CNF a Suitable Material for Solar Cell? 321 12.6 Summary 327 References 327 13 Application of Carbon Nanofiber in Antenna 331Mahesh Partapure 13.1 Introduction 331 13.2 Radiation Types and Characteristics of Antenna 333 13.2.1 Radiation Density 334 13.2.2 Radiation Pattern 334 13.2.3 Directivity 335 13.2.4 Gain 335 13.2.5 Effective Area 336 13.2.6 Input Impedance 336 13.2.7 Impedance Matching 336 13.2.8 Return Loss and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) 336 13.3 Carbon Nanomaterial 337 13.4 Application of Carbon Nanofibers in Antenna 338 13.5 Summary 339 References 340 14 Carbon Nanofiber in Cosmetics 341Archana Singh 14.1 Introduction 341 14.2 What is a Nanocosmetic 342 14.3 Cosmetics with Nanoparticles in Today’s Market 342 14.4 Nanoparticles Used in Cosmetics 344 14.4.1 Titanium Dioxide (TiO2) 344 14.4.2 Zinc Oxide (ZnO) 346 14.4.3 Gold Nanoparticles 348 14.4.4 Silver Nanoparticles 349 14.4.5 Selenium Nanoparticles 350 14.5 Nano-Compositions Used for Loading and Delivery of Nanoparticle 351 14.5.1 Nanoliposomes 352 14.5.2 Solid Liquid Nanoparticles (SLN) 353 14.5.3 Cubosomes 354 14.5.4 Dendrimers 355 14.5.5 Nanocrystals 356 14.6 Cosmetics Containing Carbon Nanomaterials 357 14.6.1 Nanoforms of Carbon for Cosmetics Used in Ancient India that Still Prevail Today: Herbal Kajal/Kohl 357 14.6.2 Carbon-Based Cosmetics 358 14.6.3 Contemporary Cosmetics Using Carbon 358 14.7 Can Activated Carbon, Carbon Black and Carbon Nanotubes Be Replaced with CNF for Use in Cosmetics? 359 14.8 Summary 361 References 362 15 Carbon Nanofiber in Regenerative Medicine 365Pramod Desai 15.1 Introduction 365 15.1.1 Tissue Engineering – Concept in a Nutshell 365 15.1.2 Why Carbon Nanotubes Are Versatile Scaffolds 367 15.2 Cell Tracking and Labeling 368 15.2.1 Optical Labeling 368 15.2.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) Contrast Agent 369 15.2.3 Radio Labeling 370 15.3 Sensing Cellular Behavior 371 15.4 Augmenting Cellular Behavior 372 15.5 Carbon Nanotubes as Structural Support for Tissue Engineering 374 15.6 Cytotoxicity of Carbon Nanofiber (CNF) 375 15.7 Biocompatibility of Carbon Nanofibers 377 15.7.1 CNTs with Neuronal Cells 378 15.7.2 CNTs with Osteoblast Cell 379 15.7.3 CNTs with Antibody Interactions 380 15.7.4 Ion Channel Interactions with CNTs 380 15.8 Dispersion of Carbon Nanofibers 380 15.8.1 Sonication 380 15.8.2 Stabilization with Surfactant 381 15.8.3 Covalent Functionalization 381 15.9 Summary 381 References 382 16 Carbon Nanofibers and Agro-Technology 389Manisha Sharan and Madhuri Sharon 16.1 Introduction 389 16.1.1 The Importance of Nanoscale 390 16.1.2 Carbon Nanomaterials 390 16.2 Carbon Nanofibers 391 16.3 Carbon Nanofiber and Agriculture 391 16.3.1 CNF for Plant Growth and Crop Yield 393 16.3.1.1 Seed Germination 394 16.3.1.2 CNF as Fertilizer 395 16.3.1.3 CNF as Plant Growth Stimulator 396 16.3.2 CNF for Plant Protection 396 16.3.2.1 CNF as Antimicrobial and Antifungal for Surface Coating 396 16.3.2.2 CNF as Support for Pesticides, Herbicides and Insecticides 398 16.3.3 CNF for Soil Improvement 398 16.3.4 CNF for Controlled Environment Agriculture 398 16.3.5 CNF for Precision Farming 399 16.3.5.1 CNF and Nanosensors for Diagnostics in Agriculture 400 16.4 Summary 401 References 401 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive textbook on the foundational principles of plasmas, including material on advanced topics and related disciplines such as optics, fluid dynamics, and astrophysics Foundations of Plasma Physics for Physicists and Mathematicians covers the basic physics underlying plasmas and describes the methodology and techniques used in both plasma research and other disciplines such as optics and fluid mechanics. Designed to help readers develop physical understanding and mathematical competence in the subject, this rigorous textbook discusses the underlying theoretical foundations of plasma physics as well as a range of specific problems, focused on those principally associated with fusion. Reflective of the development of plasma physics, the text first introduces readers to the collective and collisional behaviors of plasma, the single particle model, wave propagation, the kinetic effects of gases and plasma, and other foundational concepts and principles. Subsequent chapters cover topics including the hydrodynamic limit of plasma, ideal magneto-hydrodynamics, waves in MHD plasmas, magnetically confined plasma, and waves in magnetized hot and cold plasma. Written by an acknowledged expert with more than five decades' active research experience in the field, this authoritative text: Identifies and emphasizes the similarities and differences between plasmas and fluidsDescribes the different types of interparticle forces that influence the collective behavior of plasmaDemonstrates and stresses the importance of coherent and collective effects in plasmaContains an introduction to interactions between laser beams and plasmaIncludes supplementary sections on the basic models of low temperature plasma and the theory of complex variables and Laplace transforms Foundations of Plasma Physics for Physicists and Mathematicians is the ideal textbook for advanced undergraduate and graduate students in plasma physics, and a valuable compendium for physicists working in plasma physics and fluid mechanics.Table of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Fundamental Plasma Parameters – Collective Behaviour 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Cold Plasma Waves 2 1.2.1 Wave Breaking 3 1.3 Debye Shielding 4 1.3.1 Weakly and Strongly Coupled Plasmas 6 1.3.2 The Plasma Parameter 7 1.4 Diffusion and Mobility 8 1.4.1 Einstein–Smoluchowski Relation 8 1.4.2 Ambipolar Diffusion 9 1.5 Wall Sheath 9 1.5.1 Positively Biased Wall 10 1.5.2 Free Fall Sheath 10 1.5.2.1 Pre-sheath 11 1.5.3 Mobility Limited Sheath 11 2 Fundamental Plasma Parameters – Collisional Behaviour 13 2.1 Electron Scattering by Ions 13 2.1.1 Binary Collisions – Rutherford Cross Section 13 2.1.2 Momentum Transfer Cross Section 15 2.1.2.1 Dynamical Friction and Diffusion 16 2.1.3 Many Body Collisions – Impulse Approximation 16 2.1.4 Relaxation Times 20 2.2 Collisional Transport Effects 21 2.2.1 Random Walk Model for Transport Effects 22 2.2.2 Maxwell’s Mean Free Path Model of Transport Phenomena 23 2.2.2.1 Flux Limitation 25 2.2.3 Drude Model of Electrical Conductivity 26 2.2.3.1 Alternating Electric Field, No Magnetic Field 27 2.2.3.2 Steady Electric Field, Finite Magnetic Field 27 2.2.3.3 Oscillatory Electric Field, Finite Magnetic Field 28 2.2.4 Diffusivity and Mobility in a Uniform Magnetic Field 29 2.3 Plasma Permittivity 30 2.3.1 Poynting’s Theorem – Energy Balance in an Electro-magnetic Field 31 2.4 Plasma as a Fluid – Two Fluid Model 32 2.4.1 Waves in Plasma 33 2.4.2 Beam Instabilities 36 2.4.2.1 Plasma Bunching 36 2.4.2.2 Two Stream Instability 36 2.4.3 Kinematics of Growing Waves 37 Appendix 2.A Momentum Transfer Collision Rate 39 Appendix 2.B The Central Limit Theorem 41 3 Single Particle Motion – Guiding Centre Model 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Motion in Stationary and Uniform Fields 44 3.2.1 Static Uniform Magnetic Field – Cyclotron Motion 44 3.2.2 Uniform Static Electric and Magnetic Fields 45 3.3 The Guiding Centre Approximation 45 3.3.1 The Method of Averaging 46 3.3.2 The Guiding Centre Model for Charged Particles 48 3.4 Particle Kinetic Energy 51 3.5 Motion in a Static Inhomogeneous Magnetic Field 52 3.5.1 Field Gradient Drift 53 3.5.2 Curvature Drift 53 3.5.3 Divergent Field Lines 55 3.5.4 Twisted Field Lines 55 3.6 Motion in a Time Varying Magnetic Field 56 3.7 Motion in a Time Varying Electric Field 56 3.8 Collisional Drift 58 3.9 Plasma Diamagnetism 58 3.10 Particle Trapping and Magnetic Mirrors 59 3.10.1 Fermi Acceleration 61 3.11 Adiabatic Invariance 61 3.12 Adiabatic Invariants of Charged Particle Motions 63 Appendix 3.A Northrop’s Expansion Procedure 64 3.A.1 Drift Velocity and Longitudinal Motion along the Field Lines 65 4 Kinetic Theory of Gases 67 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Phase Space 68 4.2.1 Γ Phase Space 68 4.2.1.1 Liouville’s Equation 69 4.2.2 𝜇Space 70 4.3 Relationship Between Γ Space and 𝜇Space 71 4.3.1 Integrals of the Liouville Equation 72 4.4 The BBGKY (Bogoliubov–Born–Green–Kirkwood–Yvon) Hierarchy 73 4.5 Bogoliubov’s Hypothesis for Dilute Gases 74 4.6 Derivation of the Boltzmann Collision Integral from the BBGKY Hierarchy 76 4.7 Boltzmann Collision Operator 78 4.7.1 Summation Invariants 79 4.8 Boltzmann’s H Theorem 79 4.9 The Equilibrium Maxwell–Boltzmann Distribution 80 4.9.1 Entropy and the H function 81 4.10 Hydrodynamic Limit – Method of Moments 81 4.10.1 Conservation of Mass 83 4.10.2 Conservation of Momentum 83 4.10.3 Conservation of Energy 84 4.11 The Departure from Steady Homogeneous Flow: The Chapman–Enskog Approximation 84 5 Wave Propagation in Inhomogeneous, Dispersive Media 89 5.1 Introduction 89 5.2 Basic Concepts of Wave Propagation – The Geometrical Optics Approximation 90 5.3 The WKB Approximation 92 5.3.1 Oblique Incidence 93 5.4 Singularities in Waves 93 5.4.1 Cut-off or Turning Point 94 5.4.2 Resonance Point 96 5.4.3 Resonance Layer and Collisional Damping 99 5.5 The Propagation of Energy 100 5.5.1 Group Velocity of Waves in Dispersive Media 100 5.5.2 Waves in Dispersive Isotropic Media 101 5.6 Group Velocity of Waves in Anisotropic Dispersive Media 102 5.6.1 Equivalence of Energy Transport Velocity and Group Velocity 106 Appendix 5.A Waves in Anisotropic Inhomogeneous Media 107 6 Kinetic Theory of Plasmas – Collisionless Models 111 6.1 Introduction 111 6.2 Vlasov Equation 111 6.3 Particle Trapping by a Potential Well 114 7 Kinetic Theory of Plasmas 121 7.1 Introduction 121 7.2 The Fokker–Planck Equation – The Stochastic Approach 122 7.2.1 The Scattering Integral for Coulomb Collisions 124 7.3 The Fokker–Planck Equation – The Landau Equation 128 7.3.1 Application to Collisions between Charged Particles 130 7.4 The Fokker–Planck Equation – The Cluster Expansion 131 7.4.1 The Balescu–Lenard Equation 132 7.5 Relaxation of a Distribution to the Equilibrium Form 135 7.5.1 Isotropic Distribution 135 7.5.2 Anisotropic Distribution 137 7.6 Ion–Electron Thermal Equilibration by Coulomb Collisions 139 7.7 Dynamical Friction 140 Appendix 7.A Reduction of the Boltzmann Equation to Fokker–Planck Form in the Weak Collision Limit 142 Appendix 7.B Finite Difference Algorithm for Integrating the Isotropic Fokker–Planck Equation 144 Appendix 7.C Monte Carlo Algorithm for Integrating the Fokker–Planck Equation 145 Appendix 7.D Landau’s Calculation of the Electron–Ion Equilibration Rate 147 8 The Hydrodynamic Limit for Plasma 149 8.1 Introduction – Individual Particle Fluid Equations 149 8.2 The Departure from Steady, Homogeneous Flow: The Transport Coefficients 150 8.3 Magneto-hydrodynamic Equations 151 8.3.1 Equation of Mass Conservation 151 8.3.2 Equation of Momentum Conservation 152 8.3.3 Virial Theorem 154 8.3.4 Equation of Current Flow 154 8.3.5 Equation of Energy Conservation 155 8.4 Transport Equations 156 8.4.1 Collision Times 157 8.4.2 Symmetry of the Transport Equations 158 8.5 Two Fluid MHD Equations – Braginskii Equations 161 8.5.1 Magnetic Field Equations 162 8.5.1.1 Energy Balance 164 8.6 Transport Coefficients 165 8.6.1 Collisional Dominated Plasma 165 8.6.1.1 Force Terms F 165 8.6.1.2 Energy Flux Terms 165 8.6.1.3 Viscosity 166 8.6.2 Field-Dominated Plasma 166 8.6.2.1 Force Terms F 166 8.6.2.2 Energy Flux Terms 167 8.6.2.3 Viscosity 168 8.7 Calculation of the Transport Coefficients 168 8.8 Lorentz Approximation 170 8.8.1 Electron–Electron Collisions 173 8.8.2 Electron Runaway 174 8.9 Deficiencies in the Spitzer/Braginskii Model of Transport Coefficients 177 Appendix 8.A BGK Model for the Calculation of Transport Coefficients 178 8.A.1 BGK Conductivity Model 178 8.A.2 BGK Viscosity Model 180 Appendix 8.B The Relationship Between the Flux Equations Given By Shkarofsky and Braginskii 181 Appendix 8.C Electrical Conductivity in a Weakly Ionised Gas and the Druyvesteyn Distribution 182 9 Ideal Magnetohydrodynamics 187 9.1 Infinite Conductivity MHD Flow 188 9.1.1 Frozen Field Condition 189 9.1.2 Adiabatic Equation of State 190 9.1.3 Pressure Balance 191 9.1.3.1 Virial Theorem 191 9.2 Incompressible Approximation 192 9.2.1 Bernoulli’s Equation – Steady Flow 192 9.2.2 Kelvin’s Theorem – Circulation 193 9.2.3 Alfvén Waves 193 10 Waves in MHD Fluids 197 10.1 Introduction 197 10.2 Magneto-sonic Waves 198 10.3 Discontinuities in Fluid Mechanics 203 10.3.1 Classical Fluids 203 10.3.2 Discontinuities in Magneto-hydrodynamic Fluids 204 10.4 The Rankine–Hugoniot Relations for MHD Flows 205 10.5 Discontinuities in MHD Flows 206 10.6 MHD Shock Waves 207 10.6.1 Simplifying Frame Transformations 207 10.7 Properties of MHD Shocks 208 10.7.1 Shock Hugoniot 208 10.7.2 Shock Adiabat – General Solution for a Polytropic Gas 209 10.8 Evolutionary Shocks 212 10.8.1 Evolutionary MHD Shock Waves 213 10.8.2 Parallel Shock – Magnetic Field Normal to the Shock Plane 214 10.9 Switch-on and Switch-off Shocks 216 10.10 Perpendicular Shock – Magnetic Field Lying in the Shock Plane 217 10.11 Shock Structure and Stability 218 Appendix 10.A Group Velocity of Magneto-sonic Waves 218 Appendix 10.B Solution in de Hoffman–Teller Frame 220 10.B.1 Parallel Shocks 222 11 Waves in Cold Magnetised Plasma 223 11.1 Introduction 223 11.2 Waves in Cold Plasma 223 11.2.1 Cut-off and Resonance 226 11.2.2 Polarisation 227 11.3 Cold Plasma Waves 227 11.3.1 Zero Applied Magnetic Field 227 11.3.2 Low Frequency Velocity Waves 228 11.3.3 Propagation of Waves Parallel to the Magnetic Field 229 11.3.4 Propagation of Waves Perpendicular to the Magnetic Field 232 11.3.5 Resonance in Plasma Waves 234 12 Waves in Magnetised Warm Plasma 237 12.1 The Dielectric Properties of Unmagnetised Warm Dilute Plasma 237 12.1.1 Plasma Dispersion Relation 238 12.1.1.1 Dispersion Relation for Transverse Waves 239 12.1.1.2 Dispersion Relation for Longitudinal Waves 239 12.1.2 Dielectric Constant of a Plasma 239 12.1.2.1 The Landau Contour Integration Around the Singularity 241 12.2 Transverse Waves 243 12.3 Longitudinal Waves 244 12.4 Linear Landau Damping 245 12.4.1 Resonant Energy Absorption 245 12.5 Non-linear Landau Damping 248 12.5.1 Particle Trapping 248 12.5.2 Plasma Wave Breaking 250 12.6 The Plasma Dispersion Function 252 12.7 Positive Ion Waves 256 12.7.1 Transverse Waves 256 12.7.2 Longitudinal Waves 256 12.7.2.1 Plasma Waves, 𝜁e > 1 257 12.7.2.2 Ion Waves 𝜁e < 1 257 12.8 Microscopic Plasma Instability 258 12.8.1 Nyquist Plot 259 12.8.1.1 Penrose’s Criterion 260 12.9 The Dielectric Properties of Warm Dilute Plasma in a Magnetic Field 262 12.9.1 Propagation Parallel to the Magnetic Field 269 12.9.2 Propagation Perpendicular to the Magnetic Field 270 Appendix 12.A Landau’s Solution of the Vlasov Equation 274 Appendix 12.B Electrostatic Waves 276 13 Properties of Electro-magnetic Waves in Plasma 281 13.1 Plasma Permittivity and the Dielectric Constant 281 13.1.1 The Properties of the Permittivity Matrix 284 13.2 Plane Waves in Homogeneous Plasma 286 13.2.1 Waves in Collisional Cold Plasma 287 13.2.1.1 Isotropic Unmagnetised Plasma 287 13.2.1.2 Anisotropic Magnetised Plasma 289 13.3 Plane Waves Incident Obliquely on a Refractive Index Gradient 290 13.3.1 Oblique Incidence at a Cut-off Point – Resonance Absorption 293 13.3.1.1 s Polarisation 293 13.3.1.2 p Polarisation 293 13.4 Single Particle Model of Electrons in an Electro-magnetic Field 295 13.4.1 Quiver Motion 295 13.4.2 Ponderomotive Force 297 13.4.3 The Impact Model for Collisional Absorption 298 13.4.3.1 Electron–Electron Collisions 301 13.4.4 Distribution Function of Electrons Subject to Inverse Bremsstrahlung Heating 301 13.5 Parametric Instabilities 305 13.5.1 Coupled Wave Interactions 305 13.5.1.1 Manley–Rowe Relations 306 13.5.1.2 Parametric Instability 307 13.5.2 Non-linear Laser-Plasma Absorption 308 13.5.2.1 Absorption Instabilities 309 13.5.2.2 Reflection Instabilities 310 Appendix 13.A Ponderomotive Force 310 14 Laser–Plasma Interaction 313 14.1 Introduction 313 14.2 The Classical Hydrodynamic Model of Laser-Solid Breakdown 314 14.2.1 Basic Parameters of Laser Breakdown 315 14.2.2 The General Theory of the Interaction of Lasers with Solid Targets 316 14.2.3 Distributed Heating – Low Intensity, Self-regulating Flow 318 14.2.3.1 Early Time Self-similar Solution 319 14.2.3.2 Late Time Steady-State Solution 319 14.2.4 Local Heating – High Intensity, Deflagration Flow 321 14.2.4.1 Early Time Thermal Front 321 14.2.4.2 Late Time Steady-State Flow 323 14.2.5 Additional Simple Analytic Models 324 14.2.5.1 Short Pulse Heating 324 14.2.5.2 Heating of Small Pellets – Homogeneous Self-similar Model 325 14.3 Simulation of Laser-Solid Target Interaction 325 Appendix 14.A Non-linear Diffusion 327 Appendix 14.B Self-similar Flows with Uniform Velocity Gradient 329 15 Magnetically Confined Plasma 337 15.1 Introduction 337 15.2 Equilibrium Plasma Configurations 337 15.3 Linear Devices 338 15.4 Toroidal Devices 340 15.4.1 Pressure Balance 341 15.4.1.1 Pressure Imbalance Mitigation 342 15.4.2 Guiding Centre Drift 343 15.5 The General Problem: The Grad–Shafranov Equation 344 15.6 Boundary Conditions 345 15.7 Equilibrium Plasma Configurations 347 15.7.1 Perturbation Methods 348 15.7.2 Analytical Solutions of the Grad–Shafranov Equation 349 15.7.3 Numerical Solutions of the Grad–Shafranov Equation 350 15.8 Classical Magnetic Cross Field Diffusion 351 15.9 Trapped Particles and Banana Orbits 352 15.9.1 Collisionless Banana Regime (𝜈∗ ≪1) 354 15.9.1.1 Diffusion in the Banana Regime 355 15.9.1.2 Bootstrap Current (𝜈∗ ≪1) 355 15.9.2 Resistive Plasma Diffusion – Collisional Pfirsch–Schlüter Regime 356 15.9.2.1 Pfirsch–Schlüter Current (𝜈∗ ≫1) 357 15.9.2.2 Diffusion in the Pfirsch–Sclüter Regime 357 15.9.3 Plateau Regime 357 15.9.4 Diffusion in Tokamak Plasmas 358 Appendix 15.A Equilibrium Maintaining ‘Vertical’ Field 359 Appendix 15.B Perturbation Solution of the Grad–Shafranov Equation 360 Appendix 15.C Analytic Solutions of the Homogeneous Grad–Shafranov Equation 363 Appendix 15.D Guiding Centre Motion in a Twisted Circular Toroidal Plasma 364 Appendix 15.E The Pfirsch–Schlüter Regime 368 15.E.1 Diffusion in the Pfirsch–Schlüter Regime 369 16 Instability of an Equilibrium Confined Plasma 371 16.1 Introduction 371 16.2 Ideal MHD Instability 371 16.2.1 Linearised Stability Equations 371 16.2.2 Normal Mode Analysis – The Stability of a Cylindrical Plasma Column 375 16.2.3 m = 0 Sausage Instability 379 16.2.4 m = 1 Kink Instability 380 16.3 Potential Energy 381 16.4 Interchange Instabilities 382 Supplementary Material 387 M.1 Breakdown and Discharges in d.c. Electric Fields 387 M.1.1 Gas Breakdown and Paschen’s Law 387 M.1.2 Similarity and Proper Variables 388 M.1.3 Townsend’s First Coefficient 388 M.1.4 Townsend’s Breakdown Criterion 389 M.1.5 Paschen Curve and Paschen Minimum 389 M.1.6 Radial Profile of Glow Discharge 390 M.1.7 Collisional Ionisation Rate for Low Temperature Electrons 391 M.1.8 Radio Frequency and Microwave Discharges 392 M.2 Key Facts Governing Nuclear Fusion 393 M.2.1 Fusion Rate 393 M.2.2 Lawson’s Criterion 396 M.2.3 Triple Product 398 M.3 A Short Introduction to Functions of a Complex Variable 400 M.3.1 Cauchy–Riemann Relations 401 M.3.2 Harmonic Functions 402 M.3.3 Area Rule 402 M.3.4 Cauchy Integral Theorem 402 M.3.5 Morera’s Theorem 403 M.3.6 Analytic Continuation 403 M.3.7 Extension or Contraction of a Contour 404 M.3.8 Inclusion of Isolated Singularities 404 M.3.9 Cauchy Formula 404 M.3.9.1 Interior Domain 404 M.3.9.2 Exterior Domain 405 M.3.10 Treatment of Improper Integrals 405 M.3.11 Sokhotski–Plemelj Theorem 406 M.3.12 Improper Integral Along a Real Line 407 M.3.13 Taylor and Laurent Series 407 M.3.14 The Argument Principle 408 M.3.15 Estimation Lemma 408 M.3.16 Jordan’s Lemma 409 M.3.17 Conformal Mapping 409 M.4 Laplace Transform 410 M.4.1 Bromwich Contour 410 Problems 413 Bibliography 427 Index 437

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive resource summarizing current approaches to generating hydrogen from water and reducing CO2 into various hydrocarbons Green Energy Harvesting: Materials for Hydrogen Generation and Carbon Dioxide Reduction provides an in-depth treatment of the subject by exploring the fundamentals required for the selection of the materials, their synthesis methods, and possible ways to modify them for higher efficiency and enhanced stability. The prospects of adopting these sustainable solutions at a commercial level are summarized. Special emphasis is given to the figure-of-merits for currently developed systems for hydrogen generation and CO2 reduction and to an assessment of available materials in terms of efficacy and efficiency. Green Energy Harvesting also includes information on: Renewable energy in general, including the role of renewable hydrogen and hydrocarbon fuels, and possible renewable energy sources A fundamental Table of ContentsRenewable energy: Introduction, Current Status and Future Prospects Hydrogen and Hydrocarbons as Fuel Possible ways for H2 Generation Fundamental Understanding and Figure of Merits for H2 Production and CO2 Reduction Single Atom Catalysts for Hydrogen Production from Chemical Hydrogen Storage Materials Metal-Organic Framework Based Electrocatalyst for Electrochemical Hydrogen Generation 2D-Materials for CO2 Reduction and H2 Generation Hybrid Materials for CO2 Reduction and H2 Generation Possible Ways for CO2 Reduction Into Hydrocarbons Mxenes Hybrid for H2 Generation and CO2 Reduction Transition Metal Oxides, Phosphides, Sulphides and Selenides for H2 Generation Device Development and Deployment Status for H2 Production and CO2 Utilization

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive coverage of weapon damage effects on a variety of objects Damaging Effects of Weapons and Ammunition delivers a thorough exploration of a range of issues related to the effects of ammunition and weapons. The book includes coverage of the basic concepts of the theory of efficiency and the physical foundations of the functional and damaging effects of fragments, shaped charges, high-explosive and penetrating weapons. The author discusses the calculation formulas used to evaluation the parameters of damage fields and their interaction with various objects. Additionally, the book expands on the damage criteria of weapons, the characteristics of the vulnerability of objects with respect to a variety of damaging factors, dependencies for assessing safe distances, and the resistance of various structures to the effects of explosion and impact. Damaging Effects of Weapons and Ammunition also offers: Detailed calculation methods indicating areas of application and the necesTable of ContentsPreface xv I Introduction 1 I.1 Ammunition Types and Characteristics of Their Damaging Effect 1 I.1.1 Basic Concepts and Definitions 1 I.1.2 Types of Ammunition and Their Damaging Effects 2 I.2 Generalized Characteristics of the Damaging Effect 3 I.2.1 Degrees of Damage 3 I.2.2 Contact and Remote Ammunition 4 I.2.3 Generalized Characteristics of Contact Ammunition 4 I.2.4 The Accumulation of Damage 5 I.2.5 Generalized Characteristics of the Damaging Effect of Remote Ammunition 6 I.2.6 Specified Zone of Target Damage 8 I.3 Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Shooting 9 I.3.1 The Concepts of Combat Effectiveness of Weapons 9 I.3.2 Classification of Targets, Typical Efficiency Indicators 9 I.3.3 Dispersion During Shooting 10 I.3.4 Scheme of Two Groups of Errors 12 I.3.5 Probability of Damaging a Single Target 14 I.3.5.1 Damaging the Target with a Single Shot 14 I.3.5.2 Damaging the Target with Multiple Shots 16 I.3.6 Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Firing on a Group Target 18 I.3.7 Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Firing at Area Target 21 I.3.7.1 Fraction of Damage U with One Shot 22 I.3.7.2 Determining the Average Damage Fraction at Multiple Shots 29 I.4 Self-assessment Questions 29 References 30 1 Fragmentation Ammunitions 31 1.1 Basic Concepts and Definitions. General Information 31 1.1.1 Classification of Fragmentation Ammunition 31 1.1.2 High-explosive Fragmentation Projectiles of Field Artillery 32 1.1.3 Brief Description of Other Classes of Fragmentation Ammunition 35 1.2 The Mechanics of High-speed Deformation and Destruction of Shells Under the Action of an Explosion 38 1.3 Modeling the Processes of Explosive Fragmentation of Shells Using Standard Samples 46 1.3.1 The Basic Theorem of the Dimensional Theory 46 1.3.2 Dimensional Analysis for Fragmentation Processes 47 1.3.2.1 Chemical Composition 47 1.3.2.2 Grain Size 47 1.3.3 Ratios for the Total Number of Fragments 49 1.3.4 Standard Fragmentation Cylinders 50 1.3.5 The Main Grades of Fragmentation Steels 53 1.3.5.1 Group of Carbon Steels 53 1.3.5.2 Siliceous Steels 54 1.3.5.3 Сhromic Steels 54 1.3.5.4 Silicon–Manganese Steels 54 1.3.6 Prospects of Using Manganese Austenitic Steels to Improve Fragmentation Quality 54 1.4 Statistical Models of the Fragment Fields and the Fragment Spectra 57 1.4.1 Fields of Fragment Dispersion, Methods of Controlling the Fields of Dispersion 57 1.4.2 Laws of Fragment Distribution by Mass 63 1.4.2.1 Numerical Distributions 63 1.4.2.2 Mass Distributions 65 1.4.3 Analytical Representation of Fragment Distribution Laws 66 1.4.3.1 Weibull Distribution 66 1.4.3.2 The Mott Law 67 1.4.4 Distribution of Fragments by Shape 67 1.5 External Ballistics of Fragments 68 1.6 Kinds of the Damaging Effect of Fragments 71 1.6.1 Ignition Effect of Fragments 72 1.6.2 Initiating Action of Fragments 73 1.6.3 Effects of a Dense Flow of Fragments 73 1.7 Laws of Target Damage with Fragments 73 1.8 Specified Zone of Target Damage with Fragmentation Munitions 77 1.8.1 The Area of the Specified Zone 77 1.9 Methods for Optimizing the Parameters of Fragmentation Munitions 79 1.9.1 The Method of Bauman Moscow State Technical University (bmstu) 79 1.9.2 Warhead Optimization for the C-13 Unguided Aircraft Missile 84 1.10 Vulnerability Characteristics of Objects to the Effects of Fragments, Determination of Safe Distances 85 1.10.1 Methods of Efficiency Estimation 85 1.10.2 Characteristics of Target Vulnerability to Fragment Action 88 1.10.3 Determining Safe Distances 89 1.11 Self-assessment Questions 90 References 92 2 Ammunitions with Shaped Charges 93 2.1 Basic Concepts and Definitions. General Information 93 2.1.1 Artillery Projectiles 94 2.1.2 Engineering Mines with Shaped Charges 94 2.1.3 Anti-tank-guided Missiles (ATGM) 98 2.1.4 Anti-tank Bombs and Cluster Submunitions 99 2.2 Fundamentals of Cumulative Effects 100 2.2.1 The Phenomenon of Cumulation 100 2.2.2 The Cumulative Effect in Explosives Charges with Cavities 103 2.2.3 Hydrodynamic Theory of Shaped Charges 107 2.2.3.1 Theory of Jets of Ideal Fluid 107 2.2.3.2 Theory of Shaped Charge Jet Formation 109 2.2.3.3 PER-theory 110 2.2.4 Limitations of Hydrodynamic Theory 111 2.2.4.1 The “Reverse” Cumulation Mode 111 2.2.5 Accounting for Compressibility of the Liner Material 112 2.3 Explosion Loading of Shaped Charge Liners, Their Throwing, and Collapse 114 2.3.1 Calculation of Throw Velocity and Rotation Angle of a Shaped Charge Liner 114 2.3.1.1 The Planar Case 114 2.3.1.2 The Case of Axial Symmetry 116 2.3.2 Investigation of a Shaped Charge with a High-modulus Ceramic Tube 117 2.3.2.1 Experiments 117 2.3.2.2 Numerical Modeling 119 2.4 Formation, Tension of Metal Jets, and Their Penetration into Targets 122 2.4.1 Movement and Breaking of Shaped Charge Jets 122 2.4.2 Penetration of Shaped Charge Jets into Barriers 123 2.5 The Influence of Design Parameters and Manufacturing Technology of Shaped Charges on the Penetration Effect 125 2.5.1 Shaped Charge Liner 125 2.5.2 High-explosive Charge and Case 126 2.5.2.1 HE Charge 126 2.5.2.2 The Shape of HE Charge 127 2.5.2.3 HE Charge Case 127 2.5.3 Detonation Front Control 127 2.5.4 Shaped Charge Manufacturing Technology 128 2.5.4.1 Reasons for Longitudinal–Transverse Instability of Detonation Wave Propagation 130 2.5.4.2 Longitudinal–Transverse Instability of Initiating Shock Waves 131 2.6 Influence of the Operational Conditions of Ammunitions with Shaped Charges on Their Damaging Effects 132 2.6.1 Standoff Distance 132 2.6.2 The Effect of Rotation on the Shaped Charge Effect 133 2.7 Formation and Effect of Explosively Formed Projectiles 134 2.8 The Effect of Ammunition with Shaped Charges on the Armor of Modern Tanks 136 2.8.1 Characteristics of Modern Tank Armor 136 2.8.2 Interaction of Shaped Charge Jets with Explosive Reactive Armor 138 2.8.2.1 External Dynamic Protection 139 2.8.2.2 Built-in Dynamic Protection 139 2.8.2.3 Dynamic Protection Embedded into the Armor 139 2.9 Methods for Evaluating the Effectiveness of Ammunition with Shaped Charges 141 2.10 Self-assessment Questions 142 References 143 3 High-explosive Ammunitions 145 3.1 Basic Concepts and Definitions. General Information 145 3.1.1 Artillery Projectiles 147 3.1.2 Artillery Mines 147 3.1.3 Aviation Bombs 150 3.1.4 Volumetric Explosion Ammunition 152 3.2 Parameters of an Air Shock Wave During the Explosion of High Explosives 156 3.2.1 Physical Phenomena Accompanying the Explosion of a Charge in the Air 156 3.2.2 Air Shock Wave (ASW) Parameters 159 3.2.3 Overpressure, Specific Impulse, and Time of Action of the Air Shock Wave 161 3.2.3.1 Overpressure 162 3.2.3.2 Time of Action of the Shock Wave 164 3.2.3.3 Specific Impulse 164 3.2.4 Influence of Conditions of the Explosion of Explosive Charge on Blast Action 166 3.2.4.1 The Charge Shape 166 3.2.4.2 Own HE Charge Velocity 166 3.2.4.3 Properties of the Soil 167 3.2.4.4 The Khariton Layer 167 3.2.4.5 The Shell of the HE Charge 168 3.3 Reflection of Shock Waves from Barriers and Flow Around Barriers 168 3.3.1 Reflection of a Shock Wave from a Barrier 168 3.3.1.1 Normal Reflection 168 3.3.1.2 Oblique Reflection of SW 170 3.3.2 Flow Around Barriers 176 3.4 Determination of Parameters of an Air Shock Wave During Detonation of Fuel–Air Mixtures 178 3.4.1 General Information About Fuel–Air Mixtures 178 3.4.2 Parameters of an Explosion of Fuel–Air Mixtures in the Detonation Mode 183 3.4.2.1 Parameters of FAM Detonation Inside the Cloud 183 3.4.2.2 Parameters of a Detonation Explosion at the Boundary of the FAM Cloud 186 3.4.2.3 Parameters of the Air Shock Wave During FAM Detonation 188 3.5 Evaluation of the Damaging Effect of Shock Waves on Various Objects 190 3.5.1 Criteria of the Damaging Effect of Shock Waves 190 3.5.2 Characteristics of Target Vulnerability to Blast Effects 192 3.5.2.1 Parameters of the Destruction of Buildings and Other Objects 192 3.5.2.2 Parameters of Human Damage 196 3.5.2.3 Determination of the Degree of Damage of Enemy Personnel 200 3.6 Explosion in Water 202 3.6.1 The Physical Picture of an Explosion in the Water 202 3.6.2 Basic Parameters of an Underwater Explosion 205 3.6.3 The Damaging Effect of an Underwater Explosion 207 3.7 Underground Explosion 209 3.7.1 The Physical Picture of an Underground Explosion 209 3.7.2 Parameters Characterizing the Explosion Process in the Ground 211 3.7.3 The Damaging Effect of an Explosion in the Ground 218 3.7.3.1 Explosion for Ejection 218 3.7.4 Destruction of Underground Structures 218 3.7.4.1 Seismic Action of the Explosion 219 3.8 Self-assessment Questions 222 References 223 4 Penetrating Ammunitions 225 4.1 Basic Concepts and Definitions. General Information 225 4.1.1 Armor-piercing Artillery Projectiles 225 4.1.2 Armor-piercing Caliber Projectiles 226 4.1.3 Sub-caliber Armor-piercing Projectiles 228 4.1.4 Concrete Piercing Artillery Projectiles 233 4.1.5 Weapons and Ammunition for Damaging Extremely Resistant Targets 235 4.1.6 Ammunition of Small Arms 236 4.2 Interaction of Impactors with Targets 238 4.2.1 Classification of Dynamic Penetration Conditions. Main Factors 240 4.2.2 Impact Velocity 240 4.2.3 Mechanical Properties 240 4.2.4 The Geometry of the Impactor and the Barrier 241 4.2.5 The Angle of Impact 241 4.2.6 Other Factors 241 4.2.7 Plug Formation 243 4.2.8 Viscous Crater Formation (Puncture) 244 4.2.9 Ballistic Limit 245 4.2.10 Peculiarities of a High-velocity Impact 250 4.2.11 Damaging Effect of the Impactors on the Living Force 254 4.3 Formulation of Penetration Problems and Ways to Solve Them 255 4.4 Shock with Long Rods 258 4.4.1 Segmented Impactors 263 4.4.2 Telescopic Impactors 263 4.5 Peculiarities of Collision with Thin Targets (Screens) 264 4.6 Self-assessment Questions 266 References 267 5 Numerical Simulation of High-speed Processes 269 5.1 Introduction. Basic Concepts 269 5.2 The System of Equations of Continuum Mechanics 273 5.3 Behavior of Materials Under Intense Dynamic Loads 277 5.3.1 Elastic Medium 278 5.3.2 Hydrodynamic Model 279 5.3.3 Elastoplastic, Viscoplastic, and Elastoviscoplastic Models 281 5.3.4 Dislocation Models 283 5.4 Numerical Methods for Solving Dynamic Problems 286 5.5 Short Introduction to ANSYS AUTODYN 293 5.5.1 Choice of the Numerical Method 294 5.5.1.1 Lagrange Solvers 294 5.5.1.2 Euler Solvers 294 5.5.1.3 ALE (Arbitrary Lagrange Euler) Solver 296 5.5.1.4 Mesh Free Solver 297 5.6 Numerical Modeling Example 297 5.6.1 Experimental Data 298 5.6.2 Numerical Simulation 299 5.7 Self-assessment Questions 305 References 306 Appendix A 309 Index 329

Read more less

Book SynopsisPRODUCT DEVELOPMENT An insightful development roadmap to help engineers and businesspeople successfully bring a product to market In Product Development: An Engineer's Guide to Business Considerations, Real-World Product Testing, and Launch, accomplished project manager, engineer, and business strategist David V. Tennant delivers a comprehensive walkthrough of the full scope of product development activities, from initial business considerations to real-world product testing and launch. The book covers key product development considerations like determining the target market, working with a product development team, management challenges, funding, user identification, ergonomics, product design, testing, and launch. The distinguished author presents the material in the form of practical, hands-on tutorials with case studies featuring large corporations and small- and mid-size firms. He also includes team exercises and question-and-answer features to help Table of ContentsAcknowledgments viii About the Author ix 1 Introduction to Product Development 1 Project Management and Product Development 2 What Is Product Development? 3 How This Book Is Organized 3 2 The Role of Marketing in Product Development 7 Corporate Strategy – Strategic Planning 7 Marketing, Sales, and the Four Ps 10 The 1st P – Product 11 Example of Product Displacement 13 The 2nd P – Promotion 15 The 3rd P – Pricing 16 The 4th P – Placement 17 The Business Case 18 The Roles of Marketing and Engineering in Product Development 19 Marketing Services 21 New Product Development and Market Economics: The Future of Electric Trucks vs Costs and Public Policy 21 3 The Role of the Engineering Group in Product Development 35 Driving Products – the Engineering Perspective 35 Engineering Disciplines 37 The Engineering Process 39 Ergonomics (Human Factors Engineering) 45 Additional Design Considerations – Product Liability 48 Government Oversight – Consumer Protection in the United States 50 Discussion Case 3.1 – Lawsuit over Hot Coffee 52 Design Challenges – Product Misuse 53 Problems with Product Development 55 4 The Core Team and Teamwork in Product Development 61 The Executive’s Role in Product Development 61 Working Within the Strategic Plan 61 Project Management Processes 62 Who Should Be Involved in Product Development? 63 Constraint on Product Development: A Note about Sarbanes-Oxley and Publicly Held Companies 66 Essentials of Teamwork and Communications across Functional Lines 67 Project/Product Communication 68 Budgets, Schedules, and Miscellaneous Small Tasks 70 Leadership in Product Development 73 How Do Leaders Go Wrong? 76 The Roles of Accounting and Finance 77 Decision Points and Net Present Value (NPV) 81 The Bigger Picture 84 Driving Product Development 85 Working in Silos and with Stakeholders 86 Identifying Stakeholders 87 5 Getting Started – Project Approved: Product/Project Management and Engineering 95 Taking the Business Case from Concept to Reality 95 Basic Research 96 Applied Research 97 Project Management in Product Development 98 Why Do Projects Fail? 99 Traditional and Agile Project Management 101 Sample Project Plan – Detailed Table of Contents 103 A True Case Study - Company Dysfunction and a Lack of Project Management 105 Developing and Controlling Scope – Using a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) 107 Developing a Budget and Cash Flows 108 Agile PM 112 The Vision Statement 113 Agile Hybrid in Action – Marketing Natural Gas in the Southeastern United States: Gas South, A True Story 115 Discussion Case 5.1 – A True Story: Product Development Without Project Management 117 6 Product Development for Small Firms and Entrepreneurs 125 Funding for Your Start-Up: A Necessary Ingredient 125 Loans from the Bank and Small Business Administration (SBA) 126 Funding from Venture Capitalists 127 Funding by Issuing Shares of Stock 128 Funding with Angel Investors 128 Other Sources of Business and Financial Assistance 129 Summary on Product Development and Sources of Funding 130 Small Firm Challenges 131 Lack of Structured Planning 132 Marketing Message Not Strong or Clear 133 Legal and Regulatory Obstacles 133 Use of a Product Roadmap 134 Innovation 135 When (Or If) to Patent 137 7 Manufacturing the New Product 147 The State of Manufacturing 150 New Manufacturing Advances 156 8 Engineering Product Design and Testing 163 Managing the Approved Scope and Budget – Why Is This Important? 163 The Project Lifecycle 164 A True Story: Ignoring the Warning Signs 166 Preventing Failure and Surprises: Performing a Risk Review 167 Two Types of Risk Review: Qualitative and Quantitative 168 Design and Status Reviews 171 Modeling – Speeding Product Development 173 Integrating Supply Chain and Manufacturing 174 The Role of Supply Chain in Product Development 176 Proposals, Pricing, Statements of Work (SOWs) 180 New Technologies – Identification and Adaptation 182 Alignment with Business Strategy 185 Using SWOT 186 Gates and Stakeholders 187 9 Successful Product Launch and Post Review 193 Pricing 194 Integrated Marketing 196 Product Development – Post Review 198 10 Summary – Connecting the Dots 205 A Logical Process Flow 206 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisPrinciples and Applications of Mass Transfer Core textbook teaching mass transfer fundamentals and applications for the design of separation processes in chemical, biochemical, and environmental engineering Principles and Applications of Mass Transfer teaches the subject of mass transfer fundamentals and their applications to the design of separation processes with enough depth of coverage to guarantee that students using the book will, at the end of the course, be able to specify preliminary designs of the most common separation process equipment. Reflecting the growth of biochemical applications in the field of chemical engineering, the fourth edition expands biochemical coverage, including transient diffusion, environmental applications, electrophoresis, and bioseparations. Also new to the fourth edition is the integration of Python programs, which complement the Mathcad programs of the previous edition. On the accompanying instructor's website, theTable of ContentsPreface to the Fourth Edition xvii Preface to the Third Edition xix Preface to the Second Edition xxi Preface to the First Edition xxiii Nomenclature xxv 1. Fundamentals of Mass Transfer 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Molecular Mass Transfer 3 1.2.1 Concentrations 4 1.2.2 Velocities and Fluxes 10 1.2.3 The Maxwell–Stefan Relations 12 1.2.4 Fick’s First Law for Binary Mixtures 15 1.3 The Diffusion Coefficient 16 1.3.1 Diffusion Coefficients for Binary Ideal Gas Systems 17 1.3.2 Diffusion Coefficients for Dilute Liquids 22 1.3.3 Diffusion Coefficients for Concentrated Liquids 26 1.3.4 Effective Diffusivities in Multi component Mixtures 28 1.4 Steady-state Molecular Diffusion in Fluids 34 1.4.1 Molar Flux and the Equation of Continuity 34 1.4.2 Steady-State Molecular Diffusion in Gases 35 1.4.3 Steady-State Molecular Diffusion in Liquids 47 1.5 Steady-state Diffusion in Solids 50 1.5.1Steady-State Binary Molecular Diffusion in Porous Solids 51 1.5.2 Knudsen Diffusion in Porous Solids 52 1.5.3 Hydrodynamic Flow of Gases in Porous Solids 55 1.5.4“DustyGas”Model for Multi component Diffusion 57 1.6 Transient Molecular Diffusion in Solids 58 1.7 Diffusion with Homogeneous Chemical Reaction 62 1.8 Analogies Among Molecular Transfer Phenomena 66 Problems 68 References 83 Appendix 1.1 84 Appendix 1.2 85 Appendix 1.3 86 Appendix 1.4 89 2. Convective Mass Transfer 91 2.1 Introduction 91 2.2 Mass-transfer Coefficients 92 2.2.1 Diffusion of A Through Stagnant B (NB=0,ΨA=1) 92 2.2.2 Equimolar Counter diffusion (NB=–NA,ΨA=undefined) 95 2.3 Dimensional Analysis 96 2.3.1 The Buckingham Method 97 2.4 Flow Past Flat Plate in Laminar Flow; Boundary Layer Theory 101 2.5 Mass- and Heat-transfer Analogies 108 2.6 Convective Mass-transfer Correlations 116 2.6.1 Mass-Transfer Coefficients for Flat Plates 116 2.6.2 Mass-Transfer Coefficients for a Single Sphere 118 2.6.3 Mass-Transfer Coefficients for Single Cylinders 122 2.6.4 Turbulent Flow in Circular Pipes 122 2.6.5 Mass Transfer in Packed and Fluidized Beds 128 2.6.6 Mass Transfer in Hollow-Fiber Membrane Modules130 2.7Multi component Mass-transfer Coefficients 133 Problems 135 References 149 Appendix 2.1 152 Appendix 2.2 153 3. Interphase Mass Transfer 155 3.1Introduction 155 3.2 Equilibrium Considerations in Chemical and Biochemical Systems 155 3.2.1 Chemical Phase Equilibria 156 3.2.2 Biochemical Equilibrium Concepts (Seaderetal.,2011) 160 3.3 Diffusion Between Phases 166 3.3.1 Two-Resistance Theory 166 3.3.2 Overall Mass-Transfer Coefficients 168 3.3.3 Local Mass-Transfer Coefficients: General Case 172 3.4 Material Balances 180 3.4.1 Counter current Flow 180 3.4.2 Co current Flow 194 3.4.3 Batch Processes 195 3.5 Equilibrium-stage Operations 196 Problems 204 References 216 Appendix 3.1 217 Appendix 3.2 218 Appendix 3.3 219 Appendix 3.4 220 Appendix 3.5 221 4. Equipment for Gas–liquid Mass-transfer Operations 225 4.1 Introduction 225 4.2 Gas–liquid Operations :Liquid Dispersed 225 4.2.1 Types of Packing 226 4.2.2 Liquid Distribution 229 4.2.3 Liquid Holdup 230 4.2.4 Pressure Drop 237 4.2.5 Mass-Transfer Coefficients 239 4.3 Gas–liquid Operations : Gas Dispersed 243 4.3.1 Sparged Vessels (Bubble Columns) 244 4.3.2 Tray Towers 249 4.3.3 Tray Diameter 252 4.3.4 Tray Gas-Pressure Drop 255 4.3.5 Weeping and Entrainment 257 4.3.6 Tray Efficiency 258 Problems 264 References 274 5. Absorption and Stripping 277 5.1 Introduction 277 5.2 Counter current Multi stage Equipment 278 5.2.1 Graphical Determination of the Number of IdealTrays 278 5.2.2 Tray Efficiencies and Real Traysby Graphical Methods 279 5.2.3 Dilute Mixtures279 5.3 Counter current Continuous-contact Equipment285 5.3.1 Dilute Solutions; Henry’s Law290 5.4 Thermal Effects During Absorption and Stripping 292 5.4.1 Adiabatic Operation of a Packed-Bed Absorber 296 Problems 300 References 311 Appendix 5.1 312 6. Distillation 315 6.1Introduction 315 6.2 Single-stage Operation—flash Vaporization 316 6.3 DifferentialDistillation320 6.4ContinuousRectification—binarySystems322 6.5 Mc CABE–Thiele method for trayed towers324 6.5.1 Rectifying Section 325 6.5.2 Stripping Section 326 6.5.3 Feed Stage 328 6.5.4 Number of Equilibrium Stages and Feed-Stage Location 330 6.5.5 Limiting Conditions 332 6.5.6 Optimum Reflux Ratio 333 6.5.7 Large Number of Stages 339 6.5.8 Use of Open Steam 342 6.5.9 Tray Efficiencies 343 6.6 Binary Distillation in Packed Towers350 6.7 Multi component Distillation 354 6.8 Fenske–underwood–Gillil and Method 357 6.8.1 Total Reflux : Fenske Equation 357 6.8.2 Minimum Reflux : Underwood Equations 361 6.8.3 Gillil and Correlation for Number of Stages at Finite Reflux 366 6.9 Rigorous Calculation Procedures for Multi component Distillation 368 6.9.1 Equilibrium Stage Model368 6.9.2 Non equilibrium, Rate-Based Model 370 6.10 Batch Distillation 371 6.10.1 Binary Batch Distillation with Constant Reflux 372 6.10.2 Batch Distillation with Constant Distillate Composition 375 6.10.3 Multicomponent Batch Distillation 377 Problems 378 References 389 Appendix 6.1 390 Appendix 6.2 391 Appendix 6.3 392 7. Liquid–liquid Extraction 393 7.1 Introduction 393 7.2 Liquid Equilibria 394 7.3 Stage wise Liquid–liquid Extraction 399 7.3.1 Single-Stage Extraction 400 7.3.2 Multistage Crosscurrent Extraction 403 7.3.3 Counter current Extraction Cascades4 04 7.3.4 Insoluble Liquids 409 7.3.5 Continuous Countercurrent Extraction with Reflux 412 7.4 Equipment for Liquid–liquid Extraction 419 7.4.1Mixer-Settler Cascades 419 7.4.2 Multi compartment Columns 428 7. Liquid–liquid Extraction of Bio products 430 Problems 437 References 446 8. Humidification Operations447 8.1 Introduction 447 8.2 Equilibrium Considerations 448 8.2.1 Saturated Gas–Vapor Mixtures 448 8.2.2 Unsaturated Gas–Vapor Mixtures 451 8.2.3 Adiabatic-Saturation Curves 452 8.2.4 Wet-Bulb Temperature 454 8.3 Adiabatic Gas–liquid Contact Operations 457 8.3.1 Fundamental Relationships 458 8.3.2 Water Cooling with Air 460 8.3.3 Dehumidification of Air–Water Vapor 466 Problems 468 References 472 Appendix 8.1 473 Appendix 8.2 474 9. Membranes and other Solid: Sorption Agents 477 9.1 Introduction 477 9.2 Mass Transfer in Membranes 478 9.2.1 Solution-Diffusion for Liquid Mixtures479 9.2.2 Solution-Diffusionfor Gas Mixtures 481 9.2.3 Module Flow Patterns 484 9.3 Equilibrium Considerations in Porous Sorbents 489 9.3.1 Adsorption and Chromatography Equilibria 489 9.3.2 Ion-Exchange Equilibria 494 9.4 Mass Transfer in Fixed Beds of Porous Sorbents 497 9.4.1 Basic Equations for Adsorption 499 9.4.2 Linear Isotherm 500 9.4.3 Langmuir Isotherm 501 9.4.4 Length of Unused Bed 505 9.4.5 Mass-Transfer Rates in Ion Exchangers506 9.4.6 Mass-Transfer Rates in Chromatographic Separations507 9.4.7 Electrophoresis 510 9.5 Applications of Membrane-separation Processes512 9.5.1 Dialysis 513 9.5.2 Reverse Osmosis 515 9.5.3 Gas Permeation 518 9.5.4 Ultrafiltration and Microfiltration 518 9.5.5 Bio separations 522 9.6 Applications of Sorption-separation Processes524 Problems 529 References 535 Appendix9.1 536 Appendix 9.2 538 Appendix 9.3 540 Appendix 9.4 542 Appendix 9.5 544 Appendix 9.6 546 Appendix 9.7 548 Appendix A Binary Diffusion Coefficients 551 Appendix B Lennard-Jones Constants 555 Appendix C-1 Maxwell-Stefan Equations (Mathcad) 557 Appendix C-2 Maxwell-Stefan Equations (Python) 559 Appendix D-1 Packed-Column Design (Mathcad) 563 Appendix D-2 Packed-Column Design (Python) 569 Appendix E-1 Sieve-Tray Design (Mathcad) 573 Appendix E-2 Sieve-Tray Design (Python) 579 Appendix F-1 McCabe-Thiele Method : Saturated Liquid Feed(Mathcad) 583 Appendix F-2 McCabe-Thiele Method : SaturatedLiquid Feed(Python) 587 Appendix G-1 Single-Stage Extraction (Mathcad) 591 Appendix G-2 Single-Stage Extraction (Python) 593 Appendix G-3 Multi stage Crosscurrent Extraction (Mathcad) 595 Appendix G-4 Multi stage Crosscurrent Extraction (Python) 598 Appendix H Constants and Unit Conversions 601 Index 603

Read more less

Book SynopsisSolving Problems with Microscopy Comprehensive resource, based on real case examples, on the ability of the microscope for solving problems This book takes a why to rather than the common how to approach to demonstrate the capabilities of microscopy to solve problems. It provides entertaining and informative case examples and lessons regarding the unique value the microscope brings to problem solving by experienced scientists in various industries, including criminal and civil forensic science, manufacturing, environmental science, pharmaceutical science, cultural heritage, and biological sciences. Sample topics covered in this learning resource include: History of problem solving with microscopy Fortune favors the prepared mind The value of multiple associations The importance of context Knowing your limitations (i.e. knowing what you don't know) Microscopists and other professional scientists who use microsTable of ContentsList of Contributors x Foreword xii Preface xvi Abbreviations xvii Introduction 1 1 Discovery with the Light Microscope 8 1.1 Hooke, Leeuwenhoek and the Single Lens 10 1.2 Single-lens Microscopes come of Age 14 1.3 Light Microscopes in the Modern Age 17 2 When Problem Solving, Exercise the Scientific Method at Every Step 22 2.1 The Buttonier Case 23 2.2 The Leaky Polio Virus Dispettes 28 2.3 The Green River Killer 32 2.4 The Unfortunate Failure of the Dragline Excavator 40 2.5 The Bodega Burglary 42 3 Images Are Real Data, Too 46 3.1 Mesothelioma Linked to Asbestos 49 3.2 Talc Case 54 3.3 Ford Pinto Case 57 3.4 Uncovering a Moose Hair Cover-up 61 3.5 Carbon Black and Tire Rubber Problems 63 3.6 Optical Microscopy Takes Center Stage: Melamine in Pet Food 67 3.7 Characterization of Foreign Particulate in Pharmaceuticals 77 4 The Microscope as a Compass 87 4.1 Hair Extension Case 88 4.2 Blue Yarn Case 91 4.3 eBay Evidence 93 4.4 An Attractive Contamination 96 4.5 Identifying Metallic Particulates in Pharmaceutical Sample Holders 97 4.6 15th-Century Block Books at The Morgan Library & Museum: The Role of Microscopy in Unraveling Complex Ink Formulations 104 4.7 The Critical Value of Microscopy within Pharmaceutical Development 110 5 Rely on the Fundamentals 120 5.1 A Mouse, a Soft Drink Can … and a Felony 121 5.2 Goodrich Corrosion Problem 129 5.3 The Perils of Forgetting the Fundamentals in Criminal Cases 131 5.4 Super Bowl White Powder Attacks 2014 134 5.5 College Drug Party 137 6 Fortune Favors the Prepared Mind 139 6.1 The NASA Problem 140 6.2 A Train Engine Contamination 142 6.3 Mianus River Bridge Collapse: Why Do You Need a Microscope to Determine Why a Bridge Fell Down? 145 6.4 Microcrystals Tests for Drugs Using the Chemical Microscope (PLM) 152 7 Know Your Limitations 157 7.1 Why Does Guercino's Samson Captured by the Philistines Have a Grainy Surface Texture in Some Paint Passages? 158 7.2 The Secrets of Hair 163 7.3 A Connecticut Murder Case 171 8 The Resonance Theory of Experiments 175 8.1 The Red Hooded Sweatshirt 176 8.2 Florida Arson Case 179 8.3 The Multimillion-Dollar Waterproof Failure 182 9 Value of Multiple Associations 202 9.1 Atlanta Child Murders Investigation 203 9.2 Hog Trail Murders 210 9.3 Hoeplinger Murder 213 9.4 Jackson Pollock Authentication 221 10 Defining Meaningful Differences 238 10.1 The Yellow Rope 240 10.2 Lightning Strike 243 10.3 Raman Microprobe Characterization of ZrO2 Inclusions in Glass Lightguides 247 10.4 Whose Soot Is It Anyway? 253 11 The Importance of Context 267 11.1 GE Capital White-Powder Case 268 11.2 XB-70 Valkyrie Fuel Line 270 11.3 Cocaine Case 272 11.4 The Preppy Murder 274 12 Conclusion 282 12.1 Introduction 282 12.2 Solving World Problems 283 12.3 Lifelong Learning 287 12.4 Continued Evolution of Microscopy and Photonics 288 12.5 Final Thoughts 290 Index 292

Read more less

Book SynopsisAtomically Precise Nanochemistry Explore recent progress and developments in atomically precise nanochemistry Chemists have long been motivated to create atomically precise nanoclusters, not only for addressing some fundamental issues that were not possible to tackle with imprecise nanoparticles, but also to provide new opportunities for applications such as catalysis, optics, and biomedicine. In Atomically Precise Nanochemistry, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a state-of-the-art reference for researchers and industry professionals working in the fields of nanoscience and cluster science, in disciplines ranging from chemistry to physics, biology, materials science, and engineering. A variety of different nanoclusters are covered, including metal nanoclusters, semiconductor nanoclusters, metal-oxo systems, large-sized organometallic nano-architectures, carbon clusters, and supramolecular architectures. The book contains not only experimental contributions, but also theoretiTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xvii 1 Introduction to Atomically Precise Nanochemistry 1 Rongchao Jin 1.1 Why Atomically Precise Nanochemistry? 1 1.1.1 Motivations from Nanoscience Research 1 1.1.2 Motivations from Inorganic Chemistry Research 5 1.1.3 Motivations from Gas Phase Cluster Research 6 1.1.4 Motivations from Other Areas 6 1.2 Types of Nanoclusters Covered in This Book 7 1.2.1 Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters (Au, Ag, Cu, Ni, Rh) 8 1.2.2 Endohedral Fullerenes and Graphene Nanoribbons 10 1.2.3 Zintl Clusters 10 1.2.4 Metal- Oxo Nanoclusters 11 1.3 Some Fundamental Aspects 12 1.3.1 Synthesis and Crystallization 12 1.3.2 Structural and Bonding Patterns 16 1.3.3 Transition from Nonmetallic to Metallic State: Emergence of Plasmon 25 1.3.4 Transition from Metal Complexes to the Cluster State: Emergence of Core 29 1.3.5 Doping and Alloying 32 1.3.6 Redox and Magnetism 33 1.3.7 Energy Gap Engineering 39 1.3.8 Assembly of Atomically Precise Nanoclusters 40 1.4 Some Applications 42 1.4.1 Chemical and Biological Sensing 43 1.4.2 Biomedical Imaging, Drug Delivery, and Therapy 44 1.4.3 Antibacteria 45 1.4.4 Solar Energy Conversion 45 1.4.5 Catalysis 45 1.5 Concluding Remarks 49 Acknowledgment 49 References 49 2 Total Synthesis of Thiolate- Protected Noble Metal Nanoclusters 57 Qiaofeng Yao, Yitao Cao, Tiankai Chen, and Jianping Xie 2.1 Introduction 57 2.2 Size Engineering of Metal Nanoclusters 58 2.2.1 Size Engineering by Reduction- Growth Strategy 58 2.2.2 Size Engineering by Size Conversion Strategy 62 2.3 Composition Engineering of Metal Nanoclusters 64 2.3.1 Metal Composition Engineering 64 2.3.2 Ligand Composition Engineering 70 2.4 Structure Engineering of Metal Nanoclusters 73 2.4.1 Pseudo- Isomerization 75 2.4.2 Isomerization 75 2.5 Top- Down Etching Reaction of Metal Nanoclusters 78 2.6 Conclusion and Outlooks 80 Contributions 83 References 83 3 Thiolated Gold Nanoclusters with Well- Defined Compositions and Structures 87 Wanmiao Gu and Zhikun Wu 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Synthesis, Purification, and Characterization of Gold Nanoclusters 88 3.2.1 Synthesis 88 3.2.1.1 Synthesis Strategy 89 3.2.1.2 Gold Salt (Complex) Reduction Method 89 3.2.1.3 Ligand Induction Method 91 3.2.1.4 Anti- Galvanic Reaction Method 91 3.2.2 Isolation and Purification 92 3.2.3 Characterization 94 3.3 Structures of Gold Nanoclusters 95 3.3.1 Kernel Structures of Au n (SR) m 96 3.3.2 Kernels Based on Tetrahedral Au 4 Units 96 3.3.2.1 Kernels in fcc Structure 99 3.3.2.2 Kernels Arranged in hcp and bcc Fashions 99 3.3.2.3 Kernels in Mirror Symmetry and Dual- Packing (fcc and non- fcc) 101 3.3.2.4 Kernels Based on Icosahedral Au 13 Unit 102 3.3.2.5 Kernels with Multiple Shells 105 3.3.3 Protecting Surface Motifs of Au n (SR) m Clusters 111 3.3.3.1 Staple- Like Au X (sr) X+1 (x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 8) Motifs 111 3.3.3.2 Ring- Like Au X (sr) X (x = 4, 5, 6, 8) Motifs 111 3.3.3.3 Giant Au 20 S 3 (SR) 18 and Au 23 S 4 (SR) 18 Staple Motifs 112 3.3.3.4 Homo- Kernel Hetero- Staples 112 3.4 Properties and Applications 115 3.4.1 Properties 115 3.4.1.1 Optical Absorption 116 3.4.1.2 Photoluminescence 119 3.4.1.3 Chirality 123 3.4.1.4 Magnetism 124 3.4.2 Applications 125 3.4.2.1 Sensing 125 3.4.2.2 Biological Labeling and Biomedicine 127 3.4.2.3 Catalysis 127 3.5 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 130 Acknowledgments 131 References 131 4 Structural Design of Thiolate- Protected Gold Nanoclusters 141 Pengye Liu, Wenhua Han, and Wen Wu Xu 4.1 Introduction 141 4.2 Structural Design Based on “Divide and Protect” Rule 142 4.2.1 A Brief Introduction of the Idea 142 4.2.2 Atomic Structure of Au 68 (SH) 32 142 4.2.3 Atomic Structure of Au 68 (SH) 34 142 4.3 Structural Design via Redistributing the “Staple” Motifs on the Known Au Core Structures 144 4.3.1 A Brief Introduction of the Idea 144 4.3.2− Atomic Structure of Au 22 (SH) 17 145 4.3.3 Atomic Structures of Au 27 (SH) − 20 , Au 32 (SR) − 21 , Au 34 (SR) − 23 , and Au 36 (SR) 25 − 146 4.4 Structural Design via Structural Evolution 149 4.4.1 A Brief Introduction of the Idea 149 4.4.2 Atomic Structures of Au 60 (SR) 36 , Au 68 (SR) 40 , and Au 76 (SR) 44 150 4.4.3 Atomic Structure of Au 58 (SR) 30 152 4.5 Structural Design via Grand Unified Model 153 4.5.1 A Brief Introduction of the Idea 153 4.5.2 Atomic Structures of Hollow Au 36 (SR) 12 and Au 42 (SR) 14 154 4.5.3 Atomic Structures of Au 28 (SR) 20 155 4.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 155 Acknowledgment 156 References 156 5 Electrocatalysis on Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters 161 Hoeun Seong, Woojun Choi, Yongsung Jo, and Dongil Lee 5.1 Introduction 161 5.1.1 Materials Design Strategy for Electrocatalysis 161 5.1.2 Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters as Electrocatalysts 163 5.2 Electrochemistry of Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters 164 5.2.1 Size- Dependent Voltammetry 164 5.2.2 Metal- Doped Gold Nanoclusters 166 5.2.3 Metal- Doped Silver Nanoclusters 169 5.3 Electrocatalytic Water Splitting on Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters 170 5.3.1 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction: Core Engineering 170 5.3.2 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction: Shell Engineering 172 5.3.3 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction on Ag Nanoclusters 173 5.3.4 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 176 5.4 Electrocatalytic Conversion of CO 2 on Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters 178 5.4.1 Mechanistic Investigation of CO 2 RR on Au Nanoclusters 179 5.4.2 Identification of CO 2 RR Active Sites 181 5.4.3 CO 2 RR on Cu Nanoclusters 183 5.4.4 Syngas Production on Formulated Metal Nanoclusters 185 5.5 Conclusions and Outlook 187 Acknowledgments 188 References 188 6 Atomically Precise Metal Nanoclusters as Electrocatalysts: From Experiment to Computational Insights 195 Fang Sun, Qing Tang, and De- en Jiang 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Factors Affecting the Activity and Selectivity of NCs Electrocatalysis 196 6.2.1 Size Effect 196 6.2.2 Shape Effect 198 6.2.3 Ligands Effect 199 6.2.3.1 Different –R Groups in Thiolate Ligands 199 6.2.3.2 Different Types of Ligands 199 6.2.3.3 Ligand- on and - off Effect 200 6.2.4 Charge State Effect 201 6.2.5 Doping and Alloying Effect 202 6.3 Important Electrocatalytic Applications 205 6.3.1 Electrocatalytic Water Splitting 205 6.3.1.1 Water Electrolysis Process 205 6.3.1.2 Cathodic Water Reduction–HER 206 6.3.1.3 Anodic Water Oxidation–OER 208 6.3.2 Oxygen Reduction Reaction (ORR) 210 6.3.3 Electrochemical CO 2 Reduction Reaction (CO 2 RR) 213 6.4 Conclusion and Perspectives 219 Acknowledgments 220 References 220 7 Ag Nanoclusters: Synthesis, Structure, and Properties 227 Manman Zhou and Manzhou Zhu 7.1 Introduction 227 7.2 Synthetic Methods 228 7.2.1 One- Pot Synthesis 228 7.2.2 Ligand Exchange 228 7.2.3 Chemical Etching 229 7.2.4 Seeded Growth Method 229 7.3 Structure of Ag NCs 229 7.3.1 Based on Icosahedral Units’ Assembly 231 7.3.2 Based on Ag 14 Units’ Assembly 235 7.3.3 Other Special Ag NCs 241 7.4 Properties of Ag NCs 245 7.4.1 Chirality of Ag NCs 245 7.4.2 Photoluminescence of Ag NCs 247 7.4.3 Catalytic Properties of Ag NCs 250 7.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 250 Acknowledgment 251 References 251 8 Atomically Precise Copper Nanoclusters: Syntheses, Structures, and Properties 257 Chunwei Dong, Saidkhodzha Nematulloev, Peng Yuan, and Osman M. Bakr 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 Syntheses of Copper NCs 258 8.2.1 Direct Synthesis 258 8.2.2 Indirect Synthesis: Nanocluster- to- Nanocluster Transformation 260 8.3 Structures of Copper NCs 261 8.3.1 Superatom- like Copper NCs without Hydrides 261 8.3.2 Superatom- like Copper NCs with Hydrides 263 8.3.3 Copper(I) Hydride NCs 265 8.3.3.1 Determination of Hydrides 265 8.3.3.2 Copper(I) Hydride NCs Determined by Single- Crystal Neutron Diffraction 265 8.3.3.3 Copper(I) Hydride NCs Determined by Single- Crystal X- ray Diffraction 268 8.4 Properties 270 8.4.1 Photoluminescence of Copper NCs 270 8.4.1.1 Aggregation- Induced Emission 271 8.4.1.2 Circularly Polarized Luminescence (CPL) 273 8.4.2 Catalytic Properties of Copper NCs 273 8.4.2.1 Reduction of CO 2 273 8.4.2.2 “Click” Reaction 276 8.4.2.3 Hydrogenation 276 8.4.2.4 Carbonylation Reactions 276 8.4.3 Other Properties 276 8.4.3.1 Hydrogen Storage 276 8.4.3.2 Electronic Devices 277 8.5 Summary Comparison with Gold and Silver NCs 277 8.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 278 References 279 9 Atomically Precise Nanoclusters of Iron, Cobalt, and Nickel: Why Are They So Rare? 285 Trevor W. Hayton 9.1 Introduction 285 9.2 General Considerations 287 9.3 Synthesis of Ni APNCs 288 9.4 Synthesis of Co APNCs 294 9.5 Attempted Synthesis of Fe APNCs 297 9.6 Conclusions and Outlook 299 Acknowledgments 300 References 300 10 Atomically Precise Heterometallic Rhodium Nanoclusters Stabilized by Carbonyl Ligands 309 Guido Bussoli, Cristiana Cesari, Cristina Femoni, Maria C. Iapalucci, Silvia Ruggieri, and Stefano Zacchini 10.1 Introduction 309 10.1.1 Metal Carbonyl Clusters: A Brief Historical Overview 309 10.1.2 State of the Art on Rhodium Carbonyl Clusters 310 10.2 Synthesis of Heterometallic Rhodium Carbonyl Nanoclusters 311 10.2.1 Synthesis of the [Rh12 E(CO)27 ] n− Family of Nanoclusters 311 10.2.2 Growth of Rhodium Heterometallic Nanoclusters 314 10.2.2.1 Rh─Ge Nanoclusters 314 10.2.2.2 Rh─Sn Nanoclusters 316 10.2.2.3 Rh─Sb Nanoclusters 316 10.2.2.4 Rh─Bi Nanoclusters 319 10.3 Electron- Reservoir Behavior of Heterometallic Rhodium Nanoclusters 319 10.4 Conclusions and Perspectives 322 Acknowledgments 324 References 324 11 Endohedral Fullerenes: Atomically Precise Doping Inside Nano Carbon Cages 331 Yang- Rong Yao, Jiawei Qiu, Lihao Zheng, Hongjie Jiang, Yunpeng Xia, and Ning Chen 11.1 Introduction 331 11.2 Synthesis of Endohedral Metallofullerenes 332 11.3 Fullerene Structures Tuned by Endohedral Doping 334 11.3.1 Geometry of Empty and Endohedral Fullerene Cage Structures 334 11.3.2 Conventional Endohedral Metallofullerenes 336 11.3.2.1 Mono- Metallofullerens 336 11.3.2.2 Di- Metallofullerenes 337 11.3.3 Clusterfullerenes 339 11.3.3.1 Nitride Clusterfullerenes 339 11.3.3.2 Carbide Clusterfullerenes 339 11.3.3.3 Oxide and Sulfide Clusterfullerenes 341 11.3.3.4 Carbonitride and Cyanide Clusterfullerenes 341 11.4 Properties Tuned by Endohedral Doping 342 11.4.1 Spectroscopic Properties 342 11.4.1.1 NMR Spectroscopy 343 11.4.1.2 Absorption Spectroscopy 344 11.4.1.3 Vibrational Spectroscopy 347 11.4.2 Electrochemical Properties 349 11.4.2.1 Conventional Endohedral Metallofullerenes 349 11.4.2.2 Clusterfullerenes 351 11.4.3 Magnetic Properties 353 11.4.3.1 Dimetallofullerenes 353 11.4.3.2 Clusterfullerenes 354 11.5 Chemical Reactivity Tune by Endohedral Doping 358 11.5.1 Impact of Endohedral Doping on the Reactivity of Fullerene Cages 358 11.5.2 Chemical Reactivity of Endohedral Fullerenes Altered by Atomically Endohedral Doping 360 11.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 362 References 362 12 On- Surface Synthesis of Polyacenes and Narrow Band- Gap Graphene Nanoribbons 373 Hironobu Hayashi and Hiroko Yamada 12.1 Introduction 373 12.1.1 Nanocarbon Materials 374 12.1.2 Graphene Nanoribbons 374 12.2 Bottom- Up Synthesis of Graphene Nanoribbons 375 12.3 On- Surface Synthesis of Narrow Bandgap Armchair- Type Graphene Nanoribbons 378 12.4 On- Surface Synthesis of Polyacenes as Partial Structure of Zigzag- Type Graphene Nanoribbons 382 12.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 390 Acknowledgments 390 References 390 13 A Branch of Zintl Chemistry: Metal Clusters of Group 15 Elements 395 Yu-He Xu, Nikolay V. Tkachenko, Alvaro Muñoz-Castro, Alexander I. Boldyrev, and Zhong- Ming Sun 13.1 Introduction 395 13.1.1 Homoatomic Group 15 Clusters 395 13.1.2 Bonding Concepts 396 13.1.3 Aromaticity in Zintl Chemistry 397 13.2 Complex Coordination Modes in Arsenic Clusters 399 13.3 Antimony Clusters with Aromaticity and Anti- Aromaticity 401 13.4 Recent Advances in Bismuth- Containing Compounds 408 13.5 Ternary Clusters Containing Group 15 Elements 411 13.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 414 References 415 14 Exploration of Controllable Synthesis and Structural Diversity of Titanium─Oxo Clusters 423 Mei- Yan Gao, Lei Zhang, and Jian Zhang 14.1 Introduction 423 14.2 Coordination Delayed Hydrolysis Strategy 425 14.2.1 Solvothermal Synthesis 426 14.2.2 Aqueous Sol- Gel Synthesis 426 14.2.3 Ionothermal Synthesis 427 14.2.4 Solid- State- Like Synthesis 427 14.3 Ti─O Core Diversity 427 14.3.1 Dense Structures 431 14.3.2 Wheel- Shaped Structures 431 14.3.3 Sphere- Shaped Structures 431 14.3.4 Multicluster Structures 432 14.4 Ligand Diversity 432 14.4.1 Carboxylate Ligands 433 14.4.2 Phosphonate Ligands 433 14.4.3 Polyphenolic Ligands 435 14.4.4 Sulfate Ligands 436 14.4.5 Nitrogen Heterocyclic Ligands 437 14.5 Metal- Doping Diversity 438 14.5.1 Transition Metal Doping 439 14.5.2 Rare Earth Metal Doping 440 14.6 Structural Influence on Properties and Applications 441 14.7 Conclusion and Perspectives 445 Acknowledgment 446 References 446 15 Atom- Precise Cluster- Assembled Materials: Requirement and Progresses 453 Sourav Biswas, Panpan Sun, Xia Xin, Sukhendu Mandal, and Di Sun 15.1 Introduction 453 15.2 Prospect of Cluster- Assembling Process and Their Classification 454 15.2.1 Nanocluster Assembly in Crystal Lattice through Surface Ligand Interaction 455 15.2.2 Nanocluster Assembly through Metal–Metal Bonds 456 15.2.3 Nanocluster Assembly through Linkers 461 15.2.3.1 One- Dimensional Nanocluster Assembly 463 15.2.3.2 Two- Dimensional Nanocluster Assembly 465 15.2.3.3 Three- Dimensional Nanocluster Assembly 469 15.2.4 Nanocluster Assembly through Aggregation 470 15.3 Conclusions and Outlook 474 Notes 474 Acknowledgments 475 References 475 16 Coinage Metal Cluster- Assembled Materials 479 Zhao- Yang Wang and Shuang- Quan Zang 16.1 Introduction 479 16.2 Structures of Metal Cluster- Assembled Materials 480 16.2.1 Silver Cluster- Assembled Materials (SCAMs) 480 16.2.1.1 Simple Ion Linker 480 16.2.1.2 POMs Linker 482 16.2.1.3 Organic Linker 482 16.2.2 Gold Cluster- Assembled Materials (GCAMs) 491 16.2.3 Copper Cluster- Assembled Materials (CCAMs) 492 16.3 Applications 493 16.3.1 Ratiometric Luminescent Temperature Sensing 494 16.3.2 Luminescent Sensing and Identifying O2 and VOCs 495 16.3.3 Catalytic Properties 495 16.3.4 Anti- Superbacteria 498 16.4 Conclusion 499 Acknowledgments 499 References 499 Index 503

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamental Design of Steelmaking Refractories Comprehensive up-to-date resource organizing fundamental aspects for the design and performance of steelmaking refractories Fundamental Design of Steelmaking Refractories provides a fundamental understanding in the design of steelmaking refractories, in detail and all in one source, enabling readers to understand various issues including how heat and mass transfer occurs throughout the refractory, how matrix impurity or their contact affects the phases, and how invisible defects form during refractory manufacturing that eventually facilitates to analyze wear, corrosion, and performance of different refractory linings for primary and secondary steelmaking vessels, tundish, and continuous casting refractories. Other specific sample topics covered in Fundamental Design of Steelmaking Refractories include: Phase formations and correlation with impurity effects and refractory processing shortcomingsStress, wear, and corrosion to design refracTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgment xvii About Author xix 1 Heat and Mass Transfer 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Energy Conservation 2 1.3 Conduction 6 1.3.1 Basic Concept and Properties 6 1.3.2 One-Dimensional Steady-state Conduction 9 1.3.3 Two-Dimensional Steady-state Conduction 14 1.4 Convection 16 1.4.1 Boundary Layers 18 1.4.2 Laminar and Turbulent Flow 21 1.4.3 Free and Forced Convection 23 1.4.4 Flow in Confined Region 24 1.5 Radiation 29 1.5.1 Basic Concepts 29 1.5.2 Emission from Real Surfaces 29 1.5.3 Absorption, Reflection, and Transmission by Real Surfaces 31 1.5.4 Exchange Radiation 32 1.6 Mass Transfer 34 1.6.1 Convection Mass Transfer 35 1.6.2 Multiphase Mass Transfer 35 1.6.3 Analogy—Heat, Mass, and Momentum Transfer 37 1.7 Heat Transfer in Refractory Lining 39 1.7.1 Tunnel Kiln 39 1.7.2 Ladle Lining 40 References 43 2 Equilibrium and Nonequilibrium Phases 45 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 Basics of Phase Diagram 45 2.2.1 Gibb’s Phase Rule 45 2.2.2 Binary Phase Diagram and Crystallization 47 2.2.3 Ternary Phase Diagram and Crystallization 55 2.2.4 Alkemade Lines 60 2.3 One-Component Phase Diagrams 62 2.3.1 Water 62 2.3.2 Quartz 63 2.4 Two-Component Phase Diagrams 64 2.4.1 Fe–C 64 2.4.2 Two Oxides Phase Diagrams 66 2.5 Three-Component Phase Diagrams 72 2.5.1 Three Oxides Phase Diagrams 72 2.5.2 FeO–SiO2 –C 78 2.6 Nucleation and Crystal Growth 79 2.6.1 Homogenous and Heterogeneous Nucleation 79 2.6.2 Crystal Growth Process 82 2.7 Nonequilibrium Phases 83 References 85 3 Packing, Stress, and Defects in Compaction 87 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Refractory Grading and Packing 88 3.2.1 Binary and Ternary System 89 3.2.2 Particle Morphology and Mechanical Response 91 3.2.3 Nanoscale Particles and Mechanical Response 93 3.2.4 Binder and Mixing on Packing 95 3.3 Stress–Strain during Compaction 98 3.4 Agglomeration and Compaction 99 3.5 Uniaxial Pressing 102 3.6 Cold Isostatic Pressing 104 3.7 Defects in Shaped Refractories 107 References 111 4 Degree of Ceramic Bonding 113 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Importance of Heating Compartment 114 4.2.1 Loading and Heating 114 4.2.2 Heat Distribution 116 4.2.3 Temperature Conformity 116 4.3 Initial Stage Sintering 118 4.3.1 Sintering Mechanisms of Two-particle Model 118 4.3.2 Atomic Diffusion 120 4.3.3 Sintering Kinetics 121 4.3.4 Sintering Variables 125 4.3.5 Limitations of Initial Stage of Sintering 126 4.4 Intermediate and Final Stage Sintering 126 4.4.1 Intermediate Stage Model 126 4.4.2 Final Stage Model 128 4.4.3 Influence of Entrapped Gases 129 4.5 Microstructure Alteration 130 4.5.1 Recrystallization and Grain Growth 130 4.5.2 Grain Growth: Normal and Abnormal 131 4.5.3 Pores and Secondary Crystallization 135 4.6 Sintering with Low Melting Constituents 137 4.7 Bonding Below 1000°C 138 4.7.1 Organic Binder 139 4.7.2 Inorganic Binder 140 4.7.3 Carbonaceous Binder 141 References 142 5 Thermal and Mechanical Behavior 143 5.1 Introduction 143 5.2 Mechanical Properties 144 5.2.1 Elastic Modulus 144 5.2.2 Hardness 146 5.2.3 Fracture Toughness 147 5.2.4 Strength 149 5.2.5 Fatigue 154 5.3 Cracking 154 5.3.1 Theory of Brittle Fracture 156 5.3.2 Physics of Fracture 158 5.3.3 Spontaneous Microcracking 159 5.4 Thermal Properties 160 5.4.1 Stress Anisotropy and Magnitude 160 5.4.2 Thermal Conductivity 162 5.4.3 Thermal Expansion 164 5.4.4 Thermal Shock 166 5.4.5 Thermal Stress Distribution 166 5.5 Thermomechanical Response 168 5.5.1 Refractoriness under Load 169 5.5.2 Creep in Compression (CIC) 171 5.5.3 Hot Modulus of Rupture 174 5.6 Wear 176 5.6.1 System-dependent Phenomena 176 5.6.2 Adhesive 178 5.6.3 Abrasive 179 5.6.4 Erosive 180 5.6.5 Oxidative 181 References 182 6 High Temperature Refractory Corrosion 183 6.1 Introduction 183 6.2 Thermodynamic Perceptions 184 6.3 Effect of Temperature and Water Vapor 187 6.4 Slag–Refractory Interactions 191 6.4.1 Diffusion in Solids 193 6.4.2 Oxidation 195 6.4.3 Infiltration 198 6.4.4 Dissolution 201 6.4.5 Crystallite Alteration 204 6.4.6 Endell, Fehling, and Kley Model 205 6.5 Phenomenological Approach and Slag Design 206 6.5.1 Refractory Solubility 209 6.5.2 Slag Composition and Volume Optimization 210 References 215 7 Operation and Refractories for Primary Steel 217 7.1 Introduction 217 7.2 Operational Features in BOF 221 7.2.1 Charging and Blowing 222 7.2.2 Mode of Blowing 223 7.2.3 Physicochemical Change in BOF 227 7.2.4 Tapping 230 7.2.5 Slag Formation 231 7.3 Operational Features in EAF 232 7.4 Refractory Designing and Lining 236 7.4.1 Steel Chemistry and Slag Composition 236 7.4.2 Thermal and Mechanical Stress 239 7.4.3 Refractory Lining and Corrosive Wear 243 7.4.4 Refractory Composition and Properties 249 7.5 Refractory Maintenance Practice 252 7.6 Philosophy to Consider Raw Materials 254 7.7 Microstructure-dependent Properties of Refractories 257 7.7.1 Microstructure Deterioration Inhibition to Improve Slag Corrosion Resistance 257 7.7.2 Slag Coating to Protect the Working Surface 258 7.7.3 Microstructure Reinforcement by Evaporation-Condensation of Pitch 259 7.7.4 Whisker Insertion to Reinforce Microstructure 259 7.7.5 Fracture Toughness Enhancement and Crack Propagation Inhibition 259 References 260 8 Operation and Refractories for Secondary Steelmaking 263 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Steel Diversity, Nomenclature, and Use 267 8.3 Vessels for Different Grades of Steel 270 8.4 Operational Features of Vessels 272 8.4.1 Ladle Furnace (LF) 273 8.4.2 Argon Oxygen Decarburization (AOD) 278 8.4.3 Vacuum Ladle Degassing Process 279 8.4.4 Stirring and Refining Process in Degassing 285 8.4.5 Composition Adjustment by Sealed Ar Bubbling with Oxygen Blowing (CAS–OB) 288 8.4.6 RH Snorkel 289 8.5 Designing Aspects of Refractories 291 8.6 Refractories for Working Lining 303 8.6.1 Magnesia–Carbon Refractories 303 8.6.2 Alumina–Magnesia–Carbon Refractories 306 8.6.3 Dolo–Carbon Refractories 310 8.6.4 Magnesia–chrome (MgO-Cr2O3) 313 8.6.5 Spinel Bricks 314 References 315 9 Precast and Purging System 319 9.1 Introduction 319 9.2 Composition Design of Castables 320 9.2.1 Choice of Raw Materials and Properties 322 9.2.2 Choice of Binders 329 9.2.3 Aggregates Grading 333 9.2.4 On-site Castable Casting 335 9.3 Precast-Shape Design and Manufacturing 337 9.4 Precast Shapes and Casting 337 9.5 Purging Plugs 341 9.5.1 Plug Design and Refractory 341 9.5.2 Gas Purging 344 9.5.3 Installation and Maintenance 346 9.5.4 Clogging and Corrosion 348 References 350 10 Refractories for Flow Control 353 10.1 Introduction 353 10.2 First–Second–Third Generation Slide Gate 355 10.3 New Generation Ladle Slide Gate System 359 10.4 Ladle Slide Gate Plate 360 10.4.1 Critical Design Parameters 362 10.4.2 Selection of Slide Plate and Fixing 366 10.4.3 Materials and Fabrication of SGP 369 10.4.4 Mode of Failures 374 10.4.5 FEA for Stress and Cracking 378 10.5 Tundish Slide Gate and Plate 380 10.5.1 Modern Slide Gate and Refractory Assembly 381 10.5.2 Materials and Fabrication 381 10.5.3 Cracking and Corrosion Phenomena 383 10.6 Short Nozzles for Ladle and Tundish 389 10.7 Nozzle Diameter and Gate Opening in Flow 390 References 393 11 Refractories for Continuous Casting 395 11.1 Introduction 395 11.2 Importance of Long Nozzles in Steel Transfer 397 11.2.1 Furnace to Ladle Transfer 397 11.2.2 Ladle to Tundish Transfer 398 11.2.3 Tundish to Mold Transfer 399 11.3 Tundish Lining 400 11.3.1 Lining and Failure 400 11.3.2 Lining Improvement and Maintenance 407 11.4 Ladle Shroud (LS) 409 11.4.1 Design and Geometry 409 11.4.2 Failures, Materials and Processing 418 11.4.3 Operational Practice 424 11.4.4 Flow Pattern 425 11.5 Mono Block Stopper 427 11.5.1 Preheating Schedule 427 11.5.2 Installation 428 11.5.3 Failures 429 11.5.4 Glazing 430 11.6 Submerged-Entry Nozzle 430 11.6.1 Installation and Failures 431 11.6.2 SEN Fixing for Thin Slab Caster 432 11.6.3 SES Installation and Failures 432 11.6.4 Corrosion and Clogging 435 References 444 12 Premature Refractory Life by Other Parameters 445 12.1 Introduction 445 12.2 Refractory Manufacturing Defects 446 12.2.1 Consistence Raw Material 447 12.2.2 Processing Parameters 449 12.2.3 Pressing and Firing 451 12.3 Packing and Transport 453 12.3.1 Packaging and Packing Material 453 12.3.2 Vibration-free Packaging 454 12.3.3 Loading, Transporting, and Unloading 455 12.4 Procurement and Lining Failures 456 12.4.1 Total Cost of Ownership Concept 457 12.4.2 Preliminary Features of Lining 458 12.4.3 Workmanship 462 12.5 Preventive Maintenance in Operation 463 12.5.1 Professional Service 464 12.5.2 Slag Composition, Temperature, and Viscosity 465 12.5.3 Monitor and Maintenance of Lining 472 12.6 Consistent Supply and Time Management 475 12.6.1 Cycle Concept 476 12.6.2 Pull/Push Concept 476 References 477 Index 479

Read more less